Operator’s manual S240, S280

Operator’s Manual S240, S280

Serial numbers

Cab number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type Plate EEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front axle number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

S start 2

---1---
 Main index
The Operator’s Manual is divided in 12 main chapters that are denoted with the letters A, B, C, ... L. The
main chapters are further divided into numbered sections. Headings are in several levels. For example,
the D in the combination D.1.3 indicates that the main chapter is D, Gauges and Controls. The first number
1 (see the Table of Contents) indicates that the section is Illustrated gauges and controls, etc. In addition
to regular page numbers, it is easy to find the desired place from this manual using this logical
alphanumerical combination found in the Table of Contents. Each of the main chapters can also be easily
found with the help of the reference printed at the foot of each page.

Page no.

A Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 --- 7

B Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 --- 12

C General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 --- 25

DA Gauges and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 --- 84

DB Tractor Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 --- 116

E Starting and Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 --- 126

F Work Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 --- 153

G Lubrication and Maintenance Table 154 --- 160

H Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 --- 182

I Checks and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 --- 197

J Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 --- 211

K Extra and Alternative Equipment . . . . 212 --- 222

L Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 --- 226

---2---
 To the operator

VALTRA S240, S280

(models may vary in different market areas)
This manual is intended as a support and guide for the owner and the operator
of a new S Series Valtra.
On the following pages, we aim to provide you with the best possible
information about the correct operation and maintenance of your tractor. This
will lay a foundation for the efficient and economical use of your new tractor.
This Operator’s Manual only deals with farm tractors. If the tractor is intended
for use on public roads, it must comply with the appropriate legislation. In such
cases, always contact a Valtra dealer first.
In this manual, the term ”alternative equipment” is used to describe equipment
that is only available for the tractor at the moment of purchase. Alternative
equipment cannot be fitted to the tractor after purchase without unreasonably
extensive changes. The term ”extra equipment”, on the other hand, is used to
describe equipment that can also be acquired and fitted to the tractor after
purchase.
We recommend that you read this Manual thoroughly, carry out maintenance
according to the scheduled maintenance program and make daily
maintenance a routine operation. All this will benefit both you and your tractor.
Extensive maintenance procedures requiring special tools or accurate
measurements are outside the scope of this Manual. When such services are
required, feel confident in contacting the expert service personnel of your
tractor dealer. They are ready to serve you.
Using only original spare parts will also benefit your tractor. You can order
spare parts following the instructions at the start of the spare part catalogue.
Because Valtra is constantly developing its products, we reserve the right to
make changes without prior notice. For this reason, some details of your tractor
may differ from the information presented in this Manual.
Additionally, the tractor must always be used in compliance
with all actual laws and regulations, even if they are not
specifically referred to in this Manual.

Valtra Inc.

---3---
 A. Table of Contents
Main index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . .
B. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 1. Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. General Description . . . . . . . 13
C 1. Introduction, VALTRA S280 . . . . . . . . . . .
C 2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 3. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 4. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 4.1. Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 4.3. Powershift gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 4.4. Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 4.5. Powered front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 5. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 6. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C 7. Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DA. Gauges and Controls . . . . . 26 DB. Tractor terminal . . . . . . . . . . 85
DA 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DA 1.1. Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DA 1.2. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DA 1.3. Right---side panel/arm rest, controls . 29
DA 1.3.1. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DA 1.3.2. Linkage/PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DA 1.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
DA 1.3.4. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DA 1.4. Left---side controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DA 1.5. Rear controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DA 1.6. Overhead panel controls, front . . . . . 35
DA 1.7. Overhead panel controls, right . . . . . . 35
DA 1.8. Overhead panel controls, left . . . . . . . 36
DA 1.9. Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DA 1.10. Controls outside the cab . . . . . . . . . . 38
DA 1.10.1. Rear mudguard buttons . . . . . . . . 38
DA 1.10.2. Front linkage/front PTO buttons, extra
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DA 2. Gauges and Controls in more detail . 39
DA 2.1. Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DA 2.2. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power shuttle and parking brake lever . . . . . . 40
Powershift pre---programming/pre---programing
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Proline instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Instrument panel indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . 46
Graphical display of the Proline instrument
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fixed displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Displays that can be selected with the
change---over switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Changing the parameters of the Proline
instrument panel graphical display . . . . . . 51
Proline instrument panel graphical display
other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DA 2.3. Right---side panel/arm rest . . . . . . . . . 55
DA 2.3.1. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DA 2.3.2. Linkage/PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
A. Table of Contents
2 DA 2.3.2.1. Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
DA 2.3.2.2. Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3 DA 2.3.2.3. Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DA 2.3.2.4. Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4 DA 2.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
DA 2.3.4. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8 DA 2.3.4.1. Tractor terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DA 2.4. Left---side controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8 DA 2.5. Rear controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Power shuttle and parking brake lever . . . . . . 75
Powershift pre---programming/pre---programing
13 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
18 Reverse driving equipment display . . . . . . . . . 76
18
19 DA 2.6. Overhead panel controls in the front . 78
19 DA 2.7. Overhead panel controls on the right 78
20 DA 2.8. Overhead panel controls on the left . 79
21 DA 2.9. Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
21 DA 2.10. Controls outside the cab . . . . . . . . . . 83
22 DA 2.10.1. Rear mudguard buttons . . . . . . . . 83
23 DA 2.10.2. Front linkage buttons, extra
24 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DB 1. Tractor terminal control buttons . . . . . 85
DB 2. Adjusting the tractor terminal
screen brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DB 3. Shutting down the tractor terminal . . 87
DB 3.1. Setting the shutdown timer . . . . . . . . . 87
DB 4. Display menus (functions)
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
DB 4.1. Setting the functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
DB 4.2. Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
DB 4.3. Functions that can be selected to be
displayed, middle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
DB 4.4. Operations belonging to service . . . . 88
DB 4.5. Implement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
DB 5. Settings of the functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DB 5.1. Front linkage settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DB 5.1.1. Adjusting the lowering speed . . . . . 89
DB 5.1.2. Adjusting the transport height . . . . 89
DB 5.1.3. Working space adjustments . . . . . . 89
DB 5.1.3.1. Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DB 5.1.3.2. Pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
DB 5.1.3.3. Adjusting the implement sensor 91
DB 5.1.4. Adjusting the lifting speed . . . . . . . . 91
DB 5.2. Rear linkage settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
DB 5.2.1. Adjusting the lowering speed . . . . . 92
DB 5.2.2. Adjusting the transport height . . . . 92
DB 5.2.3. Working space adjustments . . . . . . 92
DB 5.2.3.1. Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DB 5.2.3.2. Draft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DB 5.2.3.3. Pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DB 5.2.3.4. Implement sensor control . . . . . 94
DB 5.2.4. Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DB 5.2.5. Drive Balance Control . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DB 5.2.6. Adjusting the lifting speed . . . . . . . . 96
DB 5.3. Settings of the auxiliary hydraulic valve
blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DB 5.3.1. Change---over blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DB 5.3.2. Displaying valve block
basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DB 5.3.2.1. Display valve 6---10 . . . . . . . . . . . 97
---4---
 DB 5.3.2.2. Display valve 1---5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DB 5.3.3. Valve block functions that can be
adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DB 5.3.3.1. Switching a valve block ON/OFF 98
DB 5.3.3.2. Maximum flow adjustment . . . . . 99
DB 5.3.3.3. Progressive output, time of output
increase/decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DB 5.3.4. Valve block functions that can be
activated/adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
DB 5.3.4.1. Activating a valve block function 101
DB 5.3.4.2. Holding time of the position lock 102
DB 5.3.4.3. Position lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
DB 5.3.4.4. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
DB 5.3.4.5. Output as a function
of driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
DB 5.3.4.6. De---activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
DB 6. Other Settings (SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
DB 6.1. Implement width (MACHINE) . . . . . . . 104
DB 6.2. Service code that can be selected t
o be displayed (ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DB 6.3. Resetting the travel distance
(DISTANCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DB 6.4. Resetting the worked area (AREA) . . . 105
DB 6.5. The implement sensor of the front
linkage (FRONT HITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DB 6.6. The implement sensor of the rear
linkage (REAR HITCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
DB 7. Functions that can be selected
to be displayed on the main page
(middle section of the screen) . . . . . . . . . . 106
DB 8. Operations relating to service . . . . . . . 107
DB 8.1. Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DB 8.1.1. Tractor information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DB 8.1.2. Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
DB 8.1.2.1. Calibrations in detail . . . . . . . . . . 108
DB 8.1.2.2. The calibration of the front clutch
pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
DB 8.1.2.3. The calibration of the rear clutch
pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DB 8.1.2.4. The calibration of the front linkage
position control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DB 8.1.2.5. The calibration of the rear linkage
position control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DB 8.1.2.6. The calibration of the
speed sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
DB 8.2. Active service code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
DB 8.2.1. Active code that can be selected
to be displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
DB 8.2.1.1. Service code description . . . . . . 111
DB 8.2.1.2. Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . 111
DB 8.2.1.3. Service code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
DB 8.2.1.4. Other active service codes . . . . . 111
DB 8.3. Service code history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
DB 8.3.1. Service code history on the screen 112
DB 9. Implement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
DB 9.1. Implement setting saving menu . . . . . 113
DB 9.2. Creating a folder (New folder) . . . . . . . 113
DB 9.3. Rename a folder (Rename folder) . . . 114
DB 9.4. Saving the settings (New settings) . . . 114
DB 9.5. Rename the settings (Save settings) . 114
DB 9.6. Quick---loading the settings . . . . . . . . . 115
DB 9.7. Loading settings (Load settings) . . . . 115
DB 9.8. Deleting settings/folders . . . . . . . . . . . 115
DB 9.9. Recycle bin (Recycle bin) . . . . . . . . . . 115
DB 9.9.1. Empty the whole recycle bin . . . . . . 115
DB 9.9.2. Empty or restore settings from the
recycle bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
---5---
E. Starting and driving
the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
E 1. Operating the tractor during
the first 50 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
E 2. Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
E 2.1. Normal start/cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
E 2.3. Using a back---up battery
for engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
E 3. Starting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
E 3.1. Accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
E 4. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
E 4.1. Main gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
E 4.2. Crawler gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
E 4.3. Drive clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
E 4.4. HiShift switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
E 4.5. Power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
E 4.6. Automatic traction control . . . . . . . . . . . 121
E 4.7. Power shift gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
E 4.7.1. Programming/programing the power
shift gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
E 4.7.2. Power shift gear automatics . . . . . . . . 122
E 4.8. Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
E 4.9. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
E 4.9.1. Emergency brake, extra equipment . 123
E 4.10. Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
E 4.11. Four---wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
E 5. Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
E 6. Operational considerations . . . . . . . . . . . 126
E 6.1. The maximum allowed driving inclinations for
the tractor on slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
E 6.2. Using tyre chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
E 6.3. Towing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
F. Working instructions . . . . . . 127
F 1. Power take---off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
F 1.1. Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
F 1.1.1.1. Changing the PTO shaft . . . . . . . . . 130
F 1.2. Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
F 2. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
F 2.1. Trailer’s electrical connection . . . . . . . . . 131
F 2.2. Pressure air brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
F 3. Three---point linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
F 3.1. Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
F 3.1.1. Lifting links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
F 3.1.2. Check links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
The quick---hitch claw balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
F 3.2. Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
F 4. Operating the rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
F 4.1. Lift/stop/lower switch
(the Autocontrol switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
F 4.1.1. Activating the rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . 136
F 4.2. Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
F 4.3. Adjusting the transport height . . . . . . . . 137
F 4.4. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
F 4.5. Draft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
F 4.6. Adjusting the lowering speed . . . . . . . . . 138
F 4.7. Adjusting the raising speed . . . . . . . . . . 138
F 4.8. Autocontrol bypass switch =
forced lowering switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
F 4.9. Drive balance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
F 4.10. Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
F 4.11. Pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
F 4.12. Implement sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
F 5. Using the front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
F 5.1. Lift/stop/lower switch
(the Autocontrol switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
A. Table of Contents
 F 5.1.1. Activating the front linkage . . . . . . . . . 140
F 5.2. Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
F 5.3. Adjusting the transport height . . . . . . . . 141
F 5.4. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
F 5.5. Adjusting the lowering speed . . . . . . . . . 141
F 5.6. Adjusting the raising speed . . . . . . . . . . 141
F 5.7. Autocontrol bypass switch =
forced lowering switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
F 5.8. Pressure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
F 5.9. Implement sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
F 6. Auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
F 6.1. The correspondence between valve block
control levers and the connectors . . . . . . . . . 143
F 6.2. Valve (= valve block) functions . . . . . . . 144
F 6.2.1. Adjustable functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
F 6.2.1.1. Valve block ON/OFF switch . . . . . . 144
F 6.2.1.2. Maximum flow adjustment . . . . . . . 145
F 6.2.1.3. Time of output increase/decrease,
progressive output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Time of output increase/decrease . . . . . . . 145
Progressive output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
F 6.2.2. Functions that can be
activated/adjusted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
F 6.2.2.1. Holding time of the position lock . 146
F 6.2.2.2. Position lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
F 6.2.2.3. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
F 6.2.2.4. Output depending on
driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
F 6.3. Return connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
F 6.4. Using single---action devices . . . . . . . . . 147
F 6.5. Connecting and operating
a hydraulic motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
F 6.6. Operational considerations . . . . . . . . . . 149
F 7. Attaching implements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
F 7.1. Using a universal shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
F 8. Ploughing/plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
F 8.1. Ploughing/plowing with a three---point
hitched plough/plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
F 8.2. Ploughing/plowing with a semi---pull type
plough/plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
F 8.3. Ploughing/plowing with a swing or
reversible plough/plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
F 8.4. Summary of ploughing/plowing . . . . . . 153
G. Lubrication and maintenance
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
G 1. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
G 1.1. Carrying out the maintenance . . . . . . . . 154
G 1.2. Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
G 2. Filling table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
G 2.1. Oil recommendations according to outdoor
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
G 2.2. Quality requirements of engine fuel . . . 156
G 2.2.1. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
G 2.2.2. Fuel storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
G 2.2.3. Filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
G 2.3. Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
G 3. Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
H. Scheduled maintenance . . . 161
H 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
H 1.1. Air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
H 1.2. Front linkage/front PTO
(extra equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
H 1.3. Pressure air brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
A. Table of Contents ---6---
H 1.4. Maintenance position of the
front mudguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
H 2. Daily maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
H 3. Weekly maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
H 4. Maintenance every 500 hours . . . . . . . . 168
H 5. Maintenance every 1000 hours
or yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
H 6. Maintenance every 2000 hours or
every other year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
I. Checks and adjustments . . . 183
I 1. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
I 1.1. Bleeding air from the fuel system . . . . . . 183
I 1.2. Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
I 1.3. Cooling system maintenance . . . . . . . . . 184
I 2. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
I 2.1. Battery checking and maintenance . . . . 185
I 2.2. Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
I 2.3. Precautions when servicing the electrical
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
I 2.4. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
I 2.5. Headlamp adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 3. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
I 3.1. Adjusting the free travel of
the brake pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
I 3.2. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
I 3.3. Bleeding air from the brake system . . . . 190
I 4. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 4.1. Toe---in adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 4.2. Steering angle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 4.3. Track width adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 4.3.1. Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
I 4.3.2. Rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
I 4.3.2.1. Adjusting the continious track width,
bar---axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
I 5. Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
J. Technical specifications . . . 198
J 1. Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
J 2. Maximum allowed weights for the front
and rear axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
J 3. Tyres/tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
J 3.1. Wheel nuts, tightening torque . . . . . . . . 199
J 3.2. Tyre/tire load capacities and
air pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
J 4. Track widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
J 5. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
J 5.1. Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
J 5.2. Fuel system and the air filter . . . . . . . . . . 201
J 5.3. Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
J 6. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
J 7. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
J 7.1. Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
J 7.2. Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
J 7.3. Drive gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
J 7.3.1. Differential lock, rear axle . . . . . . . . . . 203
J 7.4. Speed ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
J 7.5. Power take---off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
J 7.5.1. Rear PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
J 7.5.1.1. Driving speeds at rear PTO nominal
revs (kph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
J 7.5.1.2. PTO maximum power . . . . . . . . . . . 206
J 7.5.2. Front PTO, extra equipment . . . . . . . . 206
J 8. Powered front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
J 9. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
J 10. Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
J 10.1. Turning circle radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
J 11. Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
J 11.1. Electro---hydraulic linkage . . . . . . . . . . 208
J 11.2. Low---pressure circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
 J 11.3. Work hydraulics circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
J 11.3.1. Auxiliary hydraulic valves . . . . . . . . . 209
J 11.3.1.1. Counter pressures in the free return
connectors of the auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . 210
J 11.4. Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
J 11.4.1. Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
J 11.4.1.1. Maximum lifting power in the entire
lifting range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
J 11.4.1.2. Range of movement at the lower link
ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
J 11.4.2. Front linkage, extra equipment . . . . . 211
J 12. Other technical specifications . . . . . . . 211
J 12.1. Cab filter capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
J 12.2. Rim fixing stud spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
K. Extra and Alternative
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
K 1. Extra equipment catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . 212
K 2. Extra and alternative equipment,
operation and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
K 2.4. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
K 2.4.1. Trailer air pressure brakes (press air
compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
K 2.4.1.1. The construction of the air pressure
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
K 2.4.1.2. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . 215
K 2.4.1.3. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
K 2.4.2. Brake valve of the trailer, hydraulic . . 216
K 2.4.2.1. Construction of trailer brake valve 216
K 2.4.2.2. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . 216
K 2.4.2.3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
K 2.8. Working hydraulics and towing devices 217
K 2.8.1. Hydraulic towing device (Euro)
hitch/drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
K 2.8.1.1. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
K 2.8.1.2. Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . 220
1. Adjusting the length of the lifting links
of the linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
2. Checking the wear in the towing hook . . 220
K 2.8.1.3. Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . 221
K 2.8.2. Wagon towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
K 2.8.2.1. Instructions for operating hitch . . . 221
K 2.8.2.2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
K 2.8.2.3. Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . 222
L. Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . 223
Conversion table for common
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
0.

---7--- A. Table of Contents

 B. Safety
B 1. Safety precautions
These general safety precautions are a summary of
the rules and instructions that should be followed
while working with the tractor. These instructions do
not, however, exempt the operator from traffic and
work safety regulations, both statutory and
otherwise.
The safety codes for different workplaces and
regulations based on the road traffic legislation must
be obeyed.
The tractor safety regulations approved by the
National Board of Labour Protection have already
been taken into consideration in the design of the
tractors. The following section concerns general
safety precautions the operator should take into
consideration.
Operator safety was a primary concern in the design
of the tractor. Easy access to the cab was the goal
when steps and handles were positioned. The
tractor features several kinds of safety equipment,
for example: safety belt, covers for belts and pulleys,
etc.
1 Tractor construction --- The tractor construction
must not be changed (f.ex. max. driving speed,
max. power etc.)
The tractor is type approved to comply with con-
struction and use regulations. Any changes to the
tractor may reduce the safety and durability and af-
fect the warranty terms.
2 Brakes --- Always test that the brakes function
before driving. When driving on public roads,
keep the pedals latched together. Extensive
repairs to the brake system should be
undertaken only by Valtra---approved service
personnel.
Please notice when using implements or front
ballast:
--- Maintain sufficient braking capability
--- Use opposite ballast if necessary.
B. Safety
3 Children and the tractor --- Do not allow
children in the cab or in the vicinity of the
tractor unsupervised while it is running.
Implements must always be in the lowered
position when leaving the tractor.
4 Passengers ---A passenger can be taken inside
the cab only if the cab is equipped with a
separate seat. Transporting people in the front
loader is absolutely forbidden.
The S Series features a passenger safety belt.
WARNING!
If the tractor should tip over,
hold on to the steering wheel.
Do not jump!
5 Tipping over --- If the tractor should tip over,
hold on to the steering wheel or the safety
handles on the sides. Do not jump. Keep the
safety belt on.
6 Maintenance --- It is the duty of the operator to
be familiar with the tractor maintenance
instructions of the Operating Manual, and to be
familiar with safety precautions. Implements must
be lowered down and the engine stopped every
time the tractor is being cleaned or maintenance
is performed on it.
7 Lending --- Do not lend the tractor to persons
who are unfamiliar with its operation. You may be
held responsible for any damage the tractor may
cause.
8 Lights --- Keep the lights and reflectors clean
and in a working order. Keep the lights correctly
adjusted.
---8---

SB2
9 Carbon monoxide --- Never run or start the
tractor inside a closed space. Danger of carbon
monoxide poisoning!
10 Downhill --- Do not drive downhill in neutral or
the clutch pedal depressed. Adjust the brakes
regularly. Always downshift before a steep
downhill, and also use the engine in braking. In a
long downhill stretch, do not use the brakes
continuously to prevent overheating. Do not let
the engine go into overdrive, it may damage.
11 Driving speed --- Always adjust the speed
according to visibility or load. Avoid sudden
acceleration and braking and do not drive into a
tight bend at too high a speed. Otherwise there is
a danger of tipping over the tractor or its load
moving or falling off.
CAUTION: Do not alter the maximum speed of
the tractor. The maximum allowed driving
speed forward is 40 kph (50 kph for tractors
used on public roads in some market areas).
For safety reasons, speeds over 20 kph
should not be used when driving in reverse.
12 PTO --- When the PTO is used, it is very
important that proper and undamaged guards
are used on the PTO shafts. Major damage may
be caused by negligence in the use of guards
and proper protection. Also familiarise
yourself with the manufacturer’s instructions.
13 Check links --- When implements are being
transported attached to the three---point linkage,
the check links must be kept locked.
---9---
SB3
14 Emergency exits --- The door is the only exit
from the cab: There is a hammer on the left
side pillar of the cab that can be used to break
the cab windows in an emergency.
15 Trailer load --- Loads should be safely
attached to the tractor trailer. The load should
also not obstruct the operator’s field of vision.
The load should not block the headlights or
reflectors. Loads that project one meter (39 in) or
more from the back of the vehicle should be
visibly marked. During daylight a flag should be
used to mark the load, while red reflectors or
lights should be used during the hours of
darkness.
16 Trailer --- The trailer should only be attached
to the towing hook of the tractor. A loaded towing
hook should always be lowered using the
linkage. Test the operation of the trailer brakes
(with trailers equipped with brakes) and follow
the instructions of the trailer manufacturer.
CAUTION: When a trailer is towed with the
tractor, the use of brakes for steering is
always forbidden (brake pedals must be
latched together).
CAUTION: When using a trailer, always make
sure that the hook is locked behind the latch.
WARNING: When using the trailer always use
the brakes, if the law requires.The trailer
brakes are recommended to use in 50 km/h
models also in those countries, where it is not
required by the law.
17 Front loader --- Keep non---essential
personnel away from the working area of the
loader. When working with a raised loader, be
careful not to tip the tractor over. The loader must
be lowered down when leaving the tractor. Also
familiarise yourself with the loader manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Safety
18 Driving --- Always check that the tractor is in a
condition required by traffic safety before driving.
Before driving, adjust the mirrors so that the area
behind the tractor is clearly visible. When driving
around bends, notice that implements have a
centre of gravity far back from the tractor and
may cause unexpected swings.

19 Differential lock --- The differential lock should

only be used when driving on soft and slippery
surfaces.

SB5

21 Ballast --- When implements are lifted, the

front end of the tractor may lose so much weight
that steering is reduced or lost altogether. For this
reason sufficient ballast weights should be used.
Attach ballast only to fixings reserved for them.

22 Attaching implements --- Caution should be

SB4
20 Notice this sign --- Pay special attention to
those sections of this Operator’s Manual where
the above symbol is seen, because safety issues
will be discussed in them. Disregarding them
may cause a danger of accident. It is therefore
very important that the instructions of this manual
are followed exactly.
The signal words DANGER, WARNING,
CAUTION and NOTE are used in different
situations to protect personnel and the
components of the tractor or the implement as
follows:
DANGER, WARNING: These words
warn of the most serious dangers
that include a possibility of
personal injury.
CAUTION: This warns of a
possibility of damage to the tractor
or the implement, with also a
possibility of causing danger to
personnel.
used when attaching implements, because there
is always a risk of injury if the implement or the
tractor should move. When external linkage
controls are used, keep away from between the
tractor and the implement. Going between the
tractor and the implement is only allowed when
the tractor is prevented from moving by the
parking brake or blocks under the wheels.
23 Damage --- It is the duty of the operator to
repair or have repaired any damage or wear that
may cause a safety hazard.
CAUTION: No welding, drilling, cutting or
grinding should be performed on the cab.
Damaged parts must always be replaced with
new ones.
24 Warning stickers --- Do not remove or cover
warning or instruction stickers. Replace damaged
stickers with new ones. Stickers are available
from your dealer.

NOTE: This general warning is

intended to draw the operator’s
attention to an issue, for example
safety instructions.

B. Safety ---10---
 SB6
25 SMV emblem --- When driving on public
roads, always use the Slow Moving Vehicle
emblem at the back of the tractor (or combination
of vehicles). Also use the flashing beacon when
required by law.
SB7
26 Mobile phones --- Mobile phones may cause
electrical malfunctions. Mobile phones should not
be kept inside the tractor, especially not on the
side panel on the right.
---11---
S B 10
27 Radar --- Do not go under tractors equipped
with a radar (models with the slip control
function, default in the S series) before power is
turned off.
Danger to eyes!
28 Hydraulic/fuel pressure --- Pressurised oil
can easily penetrate through clothes and skin
and cause a serious injury. Never try to locate a
leak in the hydraulic system or close a leak with
your fingers.
29 Implement maintenance --- Implements
attached to the linkage or external hydraulics
must be lowered down for the duration of the
maintenance.
30 Engine noise --- When test running the engine
or working in its vicinity, use hearing protection to
prevent hearing damage.
31 Open flame and smoking --- Handling open
flames and smoking are strictly prohibited in the
vicinity of the fuel tank and the batteries.
32 In case of fire --- If the viton seals of the
engine (such as the lower O---ring of the cylinder
line or the O---ring of the pressure regulating
valve) are subjected to temperatures above
300˚C, for example in a fire, highly corrosive
hydrofluoric acid is formed. Do not touch
overheated viton seals with bare hands. When
cleaning, always use protective gloves and eye
protection. Neutralise concentrates and the
surroundings with a 10 % alkaline solution (lime
etc.). Collect all removed material in a plastic bag
and take it to a hazardous waste collection point.
NOTE: Never dispose of viton seals by
burning!
B. Safety
33 Storage --- Do not let anything lie loose on the
cab floor so as not to get under the pedals during
driving.

SB9

34 Auxiliary hydraulics stop --- Using the switch

on the right---side panel in emergencies stops all
the auxiliary hydraulics operations.

35 Engine stop and restart --- If the engine has

stalled eg. due too heavy loading, turn the
ignition switch to the STOP position. Restart the
engine according to the starting instructions.
Keep an eye on the indicator lights on the
instrument panel.

36 Quick couplings for lower links --- Clean, if

necessary the quick couplings and ball joints for
the lower links before attaching the implement.
DANGER OF THE IMPLEMENT RELEASING!

B. Safety ---12---
 C. General Description
C 1. Introduction, VALTRA S240, S280
These models are high---powered general tractors.
All tractors feature economical and low---emission
four---stroke intercooled and turbocharged direct
injection diesel engines.
The tractor radiators feature Visco fans that engage
only when necessary.
The gearbox is fully synchronised (apart from the
creeper range). Additionally, the tractors feature
electro---hydraulically controlled rear PTO (also front
PTO available as extra equipment), differential locks
at both front and rear, four---step Powershift and a
creeper gear.
Furthermore, the tractors feature hydrostatic
steering, electro---hydraulic linkage (also front
linkage available as extra equipment) and engine
heater.
The tractors feature a powered front axle as a
default, equipped with an electro---hydraulic lock
that can be operated simultaneously with the rear
axle lock. Front axle suspension is available as
alternative equipment.
---13---
SC1
The tractors have many microprocessors that control
and adjust several functions in the tractor, such as
the functions of the gearbox, Powershift gears,
clutch, linkages, PTOs etc. Additionally, the tractors
feature a CAN bus system, where the control units of
the microprocessors can communicate with each
other, conveying data in binary format. This system
has allowed the control functions of various
actuators to be more accurate and versatile.
Additionally, the amount of wiring has been
substantially reduced when compared to a
traditional system.
The tractors feature modern safety cabs equipped
with swivel seats for the operator.
As alternative equipment, the TwinTrac reverse
driving system is available for the tractor. The system
allows the convenient positioning of controls as well
as an excellent visibility to the work area when
driving in the reverse direction.
C. General description
 3

19

16

18

11
13
6
9

15

7
12
4

1 5 2 10
14
8 17

S C 23

Left side of the tractor: 10. Fuel system pre---filter with a water trap at the
bottom
1. Engine oil dipstick
11. Fuel filler
2. Engine oil filler
12. Hydraulic oil dipstick
3. Air filter casing
13. Hydraulics return filter cover
4. Cooling---water pump
14. Fuel filter
5. Cylinder water drain plug
15. Air conditioning compressor
6. Engine heater
16. Generator
7. Engine heater plug (below the cab at the top of
17. Electric power center in engine bulkhead
the step, not visible)
18. Electric preheating of engine induction air
8. Injection pump
19. Hydraulics reservoir breather
9. Fuel system feed pump, electric

C. General description ---14---

 8

4 6

7
10
1

12
11
S C 24

Right side of the tractor: 7. Battery and toolbox under the cover
8. Cooling system header tank
1. Engine oil filter
9. Pressurised air system compressor
2. Thermostat casing
10. Engine oil cooler drain plug
3. Starter motor
11. Quick coupling for pressurised air take---off
4. Brake oil reservoir
12. Windscreen washer reservoir
5. Cooling system bleeder---screw
6. Turbocharger

---15--- C. General description

 5.2 5.1 5.4 3.4 3.3 7
3.2 5.5
3.1

4.R
5.3 4.T

4.P

4.LS
2.2

9 2.1

2.3

1.4

1.5 1.5

1.2 1.2

1.3 1.3

6
8

1.1
S C 25

Picture from the rear: If the pressurised air brakes have a Duo---Matic
coupling, it is in the place of couplings 3.1, 3.2 and
1 Linkage
3.3.
1.1 Lower links
1.2 Levelling screws 4 Couplings for the direct connection of a
1.3 Check links hydraulic motor (Power Beyond, with no valve)
1.4 Top link bracket 4P Hydraulic motor pressure connection P, 3/4”
1.5 Lifting cylinders female quick coupling
2 Quick couplings for auxiliary hydraulics, valve 4T Hydraulic motor free flow or return connection
blocks 1---7: T, 3/4 male quick coupling
2.1 Valve blocks 1---3, in valve block 1, 1/2” quick 4LS Hydraulic motor load sensing = LS
couplings connection, 1/4” female quick coupling
2.2 Valve blocks 4---7, 1/2” quick couplings 4R Hydraulic motor housing leakage connection R,
2.3 Oil drip tanks for the quick couplings 1/2” male coupling, (this connection also acts
3 Pressurised air brake connectors, extra as the return connection for the auxiliary
equipment hydraulics)
3.1 Reservoir line, red cover 5 Other couplings
3.2 Brake line, yellow cover 5.1 PTO emergency stop socket
3.3 One---line system, black cover 5.2 Trailer socket
3.4 Quick coupling for pressurised air take---off

C. General description ---16---

 5.3 Trailer hydraulic brake connection, extra 5.5 Power socket
equipment 6 PTO shaft
5.4 Implement control system connections, extra 7 Hatch for remote control cables
equipment 8 Hydraulic towing hook, extra equipment

1.4 3
2

4.T

4.P 4.R

4.LS 1.2

1.2
8

7
1.1

1.3

5
6

1.1
SC5

Picture from the front: 4LS Hydraulic motor load sensing = LS

connection, 1/4” female quick coupling
1 Front PTO, extra equipment
4R Hydraulic motor housing leakage connection R,
1.1 Lifting links
1/2” male coupling, (this connection also acts
1.2 Lifting cylinders
as the return connection for the auxiliary
1.3 External lift/lower buttons
hydraulics). This connection comes with the
1.4 Top link bracket
front linkage as default equipment.
2 Auxiliary hydraulic quick couplings for valve block
5 PTO shaft, extra equipment
8, when the single---lever control functions in the
6 Front PTO button
arm rest have been switched to the front, extra
7 Pulling point
equipment.
8 Auxiliary hydraulics quick coupling oil drip
3 Auxiliary hydraulic quick couplings for valve block
reservoir
9, when the single---lever control functions on the
arm rest has been switched to the front, extra
equipment.
4 Couplings for the direct connection of a
hydraulic motor (Power Beyond, with no valve),
extra equipment
4P Hydraulic motor pressure connection P, 3/4”
female quick coupling
4T Hydraulic motor free flow or return connection
T, 3/4 male quick coupling

---17--- C. General description

 C 2. Maintenance C 3. Engine
Regular maintenance is one of the most important
requirements for the efficient operation of the tractor.
The operator may perform the daily check---ups and
lubrication required. The dealer will arrange a
training program for each new tractor owner,
providing sufficient instruction in the maintenance of
the tractor.
It is recommended that adjustments or major repairs
that require special tools and expert mechanics
should be done in a workshop. This should be done
by the expert personnel of your tractor dealer. They
are in contact with the manufacturer and receive
constant information from the factory about the
maintenance issues of the tractor.
Before a tractor is released from the factory, it goes
through a strict test run and check---up, when
necessary adjustments are made. For example, the S C 21
transmission/hydraulic oil is filtered during the test
run at the factory so thoroughly that its purity is All tractors feature four---stroke intercooled
equivalent to new oil. For this reason you can be (air---to---air) turbocharged direct injection diesel
sure that the tractor is in impeccable condition. engines.
It is important, however, that during the first running The basic principle of turbocharged engines is that
hours special attention is paid to the operation of the the exhaust gases expelled from the cylinders run
tractor, such as the tightness of the nuts, the turbocharger, which in turn charges the cylinders
adjustments etc. For this reason, your tractor dealer with more intake air. This allows for high engine
will perform a cost---free service inspection after 100 power with low fuel consumption. In the intercooled
hours for each new tractor (excluding oil and filter models, intake air cooling allows the cylinders to be
costs). It is the owners duty to inform the dealer in filled with even more air.
good time when the 250 hours is reached, so that
The engine intake air goes through the air filter and
the inspection may be performed at a suitable time.
the safety filter inside it. The engine air intake system
features an efficient ejector pre---filter system that
utilises exhaust gas flow. It removes the majority of
impurities before the air reaches the air filter. The
safety filter prevents damage to the engine if the
regular filter is damaged.
The new low---emission engines feature even lower
fuel consumption and reduced exhaust emissions.

C. General description ---18---

 C 4. Power transmission

C 4.1. Clutch
The drive clutch is a gearbox---internal oil cooled
hydraulic multi---disc clutch. The clutch is opened by
springs and closed hydraulically, controlled with
electro---hydraulic valves. The tractor does not
feature a traditional dry clutch disc.
The system is controlled by the electronic control
system of the gearbox. This means that the
electronics smoothly adjust both releasing and
engaging pressures of the hydraulic multi---disc
clutch according to the selected program. This
allows for smooth take---offs and changes in driving
direction.
SC8

Additionally, the tractors are equipped with turbine

clutches as a standard feature, allowing for even
smoother power transmission. The turbine clutch
makes traction more even and makes it easier to
start off especially on a slippery surface with a heavy
SC7 load, and evens out the speed difference between
different gears.
Additionally, the system features the HiShift function,
The turbine clutch also protects the power
where a switch in the gear shift lever is used to
transmission from uneven and too high load spikes.
control the operation of the multi---disc clutch when
shifting gears. In this way shifting gears is possible
without using the clutch pedal.
It is, however, possible to use the clutch pedal in the
traditional manner in all situations.

---19--- C. General description

 C 4.2. Gearbox

S C 18

Instead of a traditional forward/reverse gear lever, C 4.3. Powershift gears

the tractor features a power shuttle lever located
next to the steering wheel. Changing direction is
smooth and light: just move the power shuttle lever
forward or back (neutral position in the middle)
without having to touch the clutch pedal. The clutch
pedal can always be used, however, when changing
direction. The parallel operation switch of the power
shuttle is located on the right---side arm rest.
The main gearbox has six synchronised gears that
are controlled with their own lever.
Additionally, the gearbox features a crawler group
that is electrically controlled with a rocker switch.
The gearbox is lubricated by pressurised oil.
Efficiency is achieved by the small amount of oil in
the gearbox, the low moment of inertia in the
multi---disc clutches and the small number of gears
under load.

S C 10

Additionally, there is a separate four---step

Powershift unit inside the front of the gearbox.
The gearbox electronic control system controls the
Powershift gears, based on load, temperature, and
speed, among other things, always ensuring that
gear shifting corresponds to the current driving
situation.
The Powershift gears can be manually controlled
with the buttons on the gear shift lever or the arm
rest. The system is
pre---programmed/pre---programed with automatic
Powershift functions that the operator can select for
different driving situations and changes in direction.

C. General description ---20---


S C 11
There is a digital display panel in the side pillar of
the tractor (also in the rear pillar in tractors equipped
with reverse driving equipment) to keep the operator
up---to---date with the status of various functions,
such as driving direction, Powershift gear currently
engaged, selected automatic functions, outside
temperature, rear PTO operation and driving speed.
The main gearbox has 6 gears forward and
reverse. Combined with the four---step
Powershift, the total number of gears increases
to 24 gears forward and reverse. Additionally, the
tractor features a creeper gear, which adds 16
gears forward and reverse. Therefore, in total there
are 40 gears forward and reverse.
C 4.4. Rear axle
The rear axle is fitted directly to the gearbox. The
differential lock is of a multi---disc friction disc type,
controlled electro---hydraulically. When brakes are
used, the lock is automatically disengaged. When
the lock is engaged, an indicator light is lit in the
instrument panel.
The drive gears operate through twin planetary
gears that transmit the power from the drive shaft to
the drive wheel.
The differential is pressure lubricated and the drive
gears are oil bath lubricated. The drive gears have
their own oil casings.
---21---
C 4.5. Powered front axle
S C 12
The powered front axle is driven by the front end of
the gearbox bevel pinion shaft.
The powered front axle is engaged
electro---hydraulically. When front---wheel drive is
engaged, a spring pushes the discs together and
the drive is engaged. For this reason, front---wheel
drive is always engaged when the tractor is shut
down (no oil pressure). Additionally, front---wheel
drive is always engaged during braking, allowing the
front wheels to take part in engine braking.
The differential lock is an electro---hydraulic lock that
is controlled simultaneously with the rear axle, giving
better traction for the front wheels even on slippery
surfaces.
A suspended front axle is available as alternative
equipment, making driving noticeably smoother.
With front axle suspension, the operator can adjust:
---the height of the tractor’s front end
--- or let the automatics take care of the suspension
--- or lock the suspension, for example in heavy
loading work
C. General description
 C 4.6. PTO mechanism
S C 19
Both rear and front PTO (front PTO available as extra
equipment) are engaged and disengaged
electro---hydraulically with separate switches.
Additionally, there are separate activation switches
for both PTOs to increase safety.
An electronic control device also controls the
operation of the PTO mechanisms. In this way the
PTO is progressively engaged, without causing
undue strain on the implement. If necessary, the
PTO rotation speeds can be displayed on the
displays of the instrument panel and the tractor
terminal.
The nominal speed of the rear and front PTO shafts
is 1000 RPM, with a 20---spline shaft as default.
C. General description ---22---
C 5. Brakes
S C 14
The brakes are oil immersed multi---disc brakes,
located in the drive gear housing. Brakes are
hydraulically operated by the brake pedals. When
both brake pedals are pressed, front wheel drive is
always engaged so that the front wheels also brake.
The pedals can be used either latched together as
drive brakes or separately as steering brakes. The
brakes can be adjusted with the adjustment nuts in
the brake mechanism on top of the rear axles.
The parking brake is electro---hydraulic and
controlled by the power shuttle lever. When the
parking brake is engaged, pressure is released from
the parking brake control cylinder and a powerful
spring locks the brakes on. At the same time the
control unit disengages the power transmission.
Because of this system, the tractor’s brakes are
always engaged when the engine is not running.
Pressurised air brakes for a trailer and a fluid brake
valve are available as extra equipment.
 C 6. Steering system

S C 15

The tractor features a hydrostatic steering system,

which means that steering manoeuvres are
transmitted from the steering wheel to the front axle
steering cylinder via hydraulic oil. For this reason, a
hydrostatic steering system is extremely light to
operate.
If, for some reason, oil pressure is lost from the
steering cylinder or if the engine is shut down,
steering can still be turned manually with the safety
valve acting as a pump.
The hydraulic system has a priority valve that always
guarantees a sufficient amount of oil for the steering
system.
Reverse driving equipment is also available for the
tractor as alternative equipment, giving all required
controls for driving in the reverse direction. The
reverse driving equipment allows for excellent
visibility to the work area.

---23--- C. General description

 C 7. Hydraulics

S C 16

There are both high---pressure and low---pressure --- gearbox and power transmission lubrication
circuits in the tractor hydraulics. Both circuits have --- brake booster
their own pumps. The low---pressure circuit pump
--- parking brake, releasing
has an output of 90 l/min at 2200 RPM. The
high---pressure circuit high---power pump has an The tractor is equipped with an electro---hydraulic
output of 147 l/min at max. RPM with unloading linkage, controlled by an electric potentiometer and
pressure, which makes it possible to use powerful a switch as well as adjustments that can be made on
auxiliary hydraulics, for example. The high---pressure the screen of the tractor terminal.
circuit pump has variable displacement, producing
Adjustments that can be made on the screen of the
only the required amount of oil for each operation. A
tractor terminal are:
variable displacement pump system does not
needlessly circulate the oil, which prevents the oil --- lowering speed
from over heating and saving energy. --- transport height
The high---pressure circuit operates: --- position or draft control
--- steering (prioritised) --- pressure control
--- linkage hydraulics --- implement sensor control
--- auxiliary hydraulics --- lifting speed
--- trailer brake valve (prioritised, extra equipment) --- Drive Balance Control
--- slip control
The low---pressure circuit operates the following
functions: Front linkage is available as extra equipment. Its
--- drive clutch characteristics are similar to the rear linkage apart
from some exceptions.
--- power shuttle
--- Powershift gears The maximum lifting power of the rear linkage is
10,000 kg.
--- powered front axle, disengaging
The maximum lifting power of the front linkage (extra
--- PTO equipment) is 7,500 kg.
--- differential locks

C. General description ---24---

 C 7.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics

S C 20

The tractor as a default features seven electrically There are Push---Pull type quick couplings in the
controlled valves, three of which are controlled with front (extra equipment) and the rear of the tractor.
levers on the right---side arm rest and two with the
There are Power Beyond couplings for a hydraulic
one---lever control on the arm rest. The control levers
motor in the rear of the tractor (also in front as extra
of two valves are on the right---side control panel.
equipment). They make a direct connection without
Additionally there is a separate activation switch for
a valve possible. The couplers provide an output
auxiliary hydraulics to increase safety.
that depends on engine RPMs of 130 l/min at a
There are change---over switches for the one---lever
maximum.
control valves and one of the valves controlled from
the side panel, making it possible to direct their
output to different connectors (one---lever control
output is directed to the front). Additionally, the valve
block properties can be separately adjusted for
different output couplers. Therefore there are a total
of 10 different output coupler pairs (valves) in the
tractor, seven of which can be used simultaneously.
The following valve---specific adjustments can easily
be made to the electrically controlled valves on the
tractor terminal screen:
--- locking of the entire valve
--- smooth adjustment of maximum flow
--- adjust time of output increase and decrease and
the progressiveness of the control lever
--- adjusting the hold time of the position lock, also
continuous hold
---engaging floating position
--- output as a function of driving speed

---25--- C. General description

 DA. Gauges and Controls
Operating instructions for the most common extra and alternative equipment in this chapter. For the
operating instructions for other extra and alternative equipment, see the extra equipment part K at the end of
the guide.

DA 1. Introduction

DA 1.1. Pedals

1 4

2 S DA 1

For more details, see page 39. 3 Brake pedal latch

1 Drive clutch pedal (HiShift switch on page 29, 4 Accelerator pedal
item 4) 5 Steering wheel distance lock
2 Brake pedals

D. Gauges and Controls ---26---

 DA 1.2. Instrument panel

3
12
12.3
12.2
12.5
12.5
12.1 12.4

5
4
12.7

12.7
12.9
10
12.10
9 12.6 12.8 11
8

6
3

1 2
S DA 2,1

For more details, see page 40. 9 Hazard---warning switch

Power shuttle lever (3) and combination switch (6) 10Main power switch
can also be on the other side of the steering wheel. 11 Upper headlights switch (extra equipment)
12 Proline instrument panel, more details on
When the lights are on, the rocker switches are also
page 45
lit up. When the symbol side of the switch is
12.1 Fuel gauge
depressed, the switch light shines brighter.
12.2 Temperature gauge
1 Steering wheel 12.3 Tachometer
2 Steering wheel height adjustment lever 12.4 Speedometer
3 Power shuttle and parking brake lever 12.5 Direction indicator lights
In models equipped with reverse driving 12.6 High beam indicator
equipment, a corresponding lever can also be 12.7 Instrument panel indicator lights
found next to the reverse drive steering wheel 12.8 Proline instrument panel graphical display
(page 34 item 8).
Additionally, the dual switch for the power shuttle Fixed displays = displays that cannot be se-
can be found on the arm rest (page 29 item 12). lected by switch (two functions on the bottom
4 Powershift pre---programming/pre---programing line):
button
5 Display for the power shuttle, powershift, etc. In --- Running hours (hhhh.h)
models equipped with reverse driving position
--- Clock (hh:mm)
equipment, this is also on the rear pillar.
6 Combination switch:
--- anti---dazzle switch Displays selected by a change---over switch
--- direction indicator (12.9)
--- horn Functions on the top/middle row:
--- windscreen wiper switch --- Working time (h:mm)
--- windscreen washer switch
--- light signal --- Cruise control
7 Air pressure system pressure gauge --- Driving speed (km/h / miles/h)
8 Parking and headlamp switch

---27--- D. Gauges and Controls

 --- Average fuel consumption in one hour
--- Wheel slip (%, 0---100)
(l/h, gal/h)
--- Rear PTO speed (r/min)
--- Front PTO speed (extra equipment) --- Fuel consumption (l, gal)
(r/min) --- Position of lower links (%, 0---100)
--- Position of lifting links in front linkage
--- Engine running speed
(%, 0---100) ACF
--- Immediate fuel consumption per area unit
--- Gearbox temperature (C/F)
(l/ha, gal/acre)
--- Travel distance (m, km / miles)
--- Average fuel consumption per area unit
(l/ha, gal/acre) --- Square area (ha, acre)
--- Immediate fuel consumption in one hour 12.9 Proline instrument panel graphical display
(l/h, gal/h) change---over switch
12.10 Proline instrument panel graphical display
setting switch

D. Gauges and Controls ---28---

 DA 1.3. Right---side panel/arm rest, controls

DA 1.3.1. Driving

7 4 3
6

13
10

11

9
2
8

3 16

12 17 15 14 18 19
S DA 109

For more details, see page 55. 12 Power shuttle switch

1 Ignition
2 Gear shift lever
3 Powershift buttons
4 HiShift switch
5 Crawler gear switch
6 Automatic Traction Control switch
7 Powershift switch manual/Auto1/Auto2
8 Front suspension manual setting indicator light
9 Front suspension locking setting indicator light
10 Front suspension switch, manual/auto/locked
11 Front suspension level control
Front suspension as extra equipment
The main lever of the power shuttle is located
next to the steering wheel (page 27 item 3)
In models equipped with reverse driving position
equipment, a corresponding lever can also be
found next to the reverse drive steering wheel
(page 34 item 8).
13 Hand throttle
14 Cruise control selection/setting engine
RPMs/driving speed kph
15 Cruise control speed decrease ---
16 Cruise control speed increase +
17 Disengage cruise control
18 Four---wheel drive automatic switch, 3---position
19 Differential lock automatic switch, 3---position

---29--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 1.3.2. Linkage/PTO

3.4 3.2 3.1 1.1

1.2

4.2

3.3

3.5

2.2 1.4
4.1 2.1

1.3

1.5

S DA 110

Rear linkage 1, more details on page 62. Front linkage 3, extra equipment, more details on
page 65.
1.1 Rear linkage locking indicator light
1.2 Rear linkage lift/lower indicator lights 3.1 Front linkage locking indicator light
1.3 Rear linkage lift/stop/lower switch 3.2 Front linkage lift/lower indicator lights
1.4 Rear linkage position control knob 3.3 Front linkage lift/stop/lower switch
1.5 Rear linkage setting bypass switch 3.4 Front linkage position control knob
The following functions of the rear linkage can be 3.5 Front linkage Autocontrol bypass switch (forced
adjusted on the tractor terminal screen (for operating lowering switch)
instructions see page 92): The following functions of the front linkage can be
--- Lowering speed control adjusted on the tractor terminal screen (for operating
--- Transport height control instructions see page 89):
--- Position control/draft control ---Lowering speed control
--- Pressure control ---Transport height control
--- Implement sensor control ---Pressure/position control
--- Slip control --- Raising speed control
--- Drive balance control Front PTO 4, extra equipment, more details on
--- Raising speed control page 66.

Rear PTO 2, more details on page 64. 4.1 Front PTO activation switch
4.2 Front PTO start/stop button
2.1 Rear PTO activation switch
2.2 Rear PTO start/stop button

D. Gauges and Controls ---30---

 DA 1.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics

14

16

15
9 12
13
6 5
1 7

2
3
4

10 11
S DA 111

Auxiliary hydraulics, more details on page 67.
The properties of the auxiliary hydraulic valves can
be adjusted on the tractor terminal screen (for
operating instructions see page 97).
1 Activation switch for hydraulic valve blocks (1---7)
2 Valve block 1 control lever
3 Valve block 2 control lever
4 Valve block 3 control lever
5 Activation button and indicator light for valve
block 1
6 Activation button and indicator light for valve
block 2
7 Activation button and indicator light for valve
block 3
8 One---lever control for two valve blocks 4 and 5/8
and 9, 8 and 9 operations as extra equipment
9 Change---over switch for valve blocks 4 and 5/8
and 9, extra equipment
10 Activation button and indicator light for valve
blocks 4/8
11 Activation button and indicator light for valve
blocks 5/9
12 Valve block 6/10 control lever
13 Change---over switch for valve blocks 6/10
14 Activation button and indicator light for valve
blocks 6/10
15 Valve block 7 control lever, parallel control
switches on the left rear mudguard
16 Activation button and indicator light for valve
block 7

---31--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 1.3.4. Other controls

1.2 2
1.1 1.5
6 5
1.3
1.4 4

1.6
1.1

3
S DA 112

More details on other controls on page 71.
Tractor terminal 1 all functions described beginning
on page 85.
1.1 Buttons for moving on the screen
1.2 Control knob
1.3 Access lower level/accept button
1.4 Display selected page button
1.5 Access upper level/return button
1.6 Terminal screen
2 Working lights, rotating beacon (parking and
headlamp switch must be on)
3 Fuses
4 Power sockets, 2 units, connector for
maintenance, under the cover
5 Towing hook release switch (extra equipment)
6 Positions for extra functions
7 Storage compartment
8 Emergency brake, extra equipment
9 Bracket for auxiliary implement controls

D. Gauges and Controls ---32---

 DA 1.4. Left---side controls

4
5
6

2
S DA 7

For more details, see page 74. 5 Storage compartment

1 Extra seat 6 Storage space for bottles
2 Safety belt 7 Hammer, for breaking the window in
3 Ashtray emergencies
4 Cigarette lighter (also power outtake)

---33--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 1.5. Rear controls

10
1

9 7
11
13

4
12 8
5
2 6 3
S DA 8,1

For more details, see page 75. 8 Power shuttle and parking brake lever
A corresponding lever can also be found next to
The reverse driving equipment available as extra
the front steering wheel (page 27 item 3).
equipment includes the following controls:
Additionally, the dual switch for the power shuttle
1 Steering wheel can be found on the arm rest (page 29 item 12).
2 Driving clutch pedal 9 Powershift pre---programming/pre---programing
3 Brake pedals button
4 Brake pedal latch 10 Display for the power shuttle, powershift, etc.
5 Accelerator pedal 11 Reverse driving equipment display
6 Steering wheel distance lock 12 Display (11) change---over switch
7 Steering wheel angle lock 13 STOP

D. Gauges and Controls ---34---

 DA 1.6. Overhead panel controls, front

1 1
2
2a
S DA 9

For more details, see page 78. 3 Recirculated air filter behind the grille
1 Air nozzles, also at the sides and the rear
2 Visor down, 2a return up
A corresponding visor can also be found at the
rear

DA 1.7. Overhead panel controls, right

2 3

S DA 10

For more details, see page 78. 3 Rear windscreen washer

1 External mirror control 4 Radio, extra equipment
2 Rear windscreen wiper 5 Control panel lighting

---35--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 1.8. Overhead panel controls, left

3 4
1 2

5 6 7

S DA 11

For more details, see page 79. 5 Temperature control

1 Footwell blower 6 Roof blower control
2 Recirculated air switch 7 External mirror heating
3 Heater/air conditioning main switch 8 Control panel lighting
4 Heater/air conditioning switch 9 Interior light switch

D. Gauges and Controls ---36---

 DA 1.9. Seat

12

11
7
10

8
9
3
6

1 5

4
2

13
S DA 12,1

For more details, see page 81. 8 Right arm rest height and position locking lever.
1 Forward/backward adjustment The arm rest can also be turned sideways as well
2 Lateral movement lock as completely up.
3 Rotation lock lever 9 Right arm rest angle adjustment
4 Height and weight adjustment 10 Safety belt
5 Backrest tilt 11 Seat heater
6 Lumbar support adjustment 12 Backrest, can be adjusted vertically
7 Left arm rest angle adjustment. The arm rest can 13 Storage space
also be turned up.

---37--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 1.10. Controls outside the cab
DA 1.10.1. Rear mudguard buttons Front linkage/front PTO
DA 1.10.2.
buttons, extra equipment

1 1 2 3
S DA 13

For more details, see page 83.

1 Rear linkage lift/lower buttons
2 Rear PTO button
3 Auxiliary hydraulic valve block (block 7) control, 1
for example the top link or hydraulic leveling, only
on the left mudguard.

2
S DA 14

For more details, see page 83.

1 Lifting/lowering buttons for the front linkage
2 Button for front PTO

D. Gauges and Controls ---38---

 DA 2. Gauges and Controls in more detail

DA 2.1. Pedals
DA 2.1.1. Drive clutch pedal (1) DA 2.1.3. Brake pedal latch (3)
The brake pedals can be connected to each other
with this latch.
3
DA 2.1.4. Accelerator pedal (4)
The accelerator pedal can be used to adjust the
running speed and torque of the engine.
Additionally, the tractor features cruise control for
4 constant driving speed and constant RPMs as a
default (instructions on page 60).

DA 2.1.5. Steering wheel distance

5
lock (5)
1 2
S DA 15 The steering wheel can be moved into 8 different
positions once the lock is released.
The clutch pedal is used to separate the connection
between the engine and the gearbox. When shifting, CAUTION: Do not adjust the position of
depress the pedal and release it slowly once the the steering wheel during driving –
gear is engaged. When the drive clutch pedal is there is a risk of an accident.
used, the multi---disc clutch is controlled by the
pedal movement instead of the automatic system.
CAUTION: Do not rest your foot on the pedal or
slip the clutch unnecessarily when moving off.
More details on the use and operation of the HiShift
switch are on page 56.

DA 2.1.2. Brake pedals (2)

WARNING: Always keep the pedals
latched together (3) when driving on
public roads.

When driving in fields or on other work, the pedals

can be used separately for brake steering.
When both pedals are used in braking, traction is
automatically connected to the front axle.
Additionally, the differential lock is always
disengaged when one or both brake pedals are
pressed down.
CAUTION: If there is a failure in the brake
system, immediately stop driving and the
malfunction must be repaired before driving
continues.

---39--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 2.2. Instrument panel
DA 2.2.1. Steering wheel (1) DA 2.2.3. Power shuttle and parking
brake lever (3)

1
2
S DA 16
3
IMPORTANT!
When the front wheels are turned into either full lock,
S DA 17
slightly release the pressure on the steering wheel.
This will prevent unnecessary stress on the safety
valve and over heating of the oil. If the pump stops The power shuttle lever if required can be located on
outputting oil for some reason, the steering will work the other side of the steering wheel.
manually. The safety valve will then work as a pump.
When turning sharply, the steering wheel can be DA 2.2.3.1. Power shuttle
continuously turned manually despite the direction
wheels being locked. Forward position F: Driving direction is forward
Neutral position N: Neutral
CAUTION: If there is a failure in the steering Reverse position R: Driving direction is reverse
system, immediately stop driving and the
malfunction must be repaired before driving
continues.

Steering wheel height

DA 2.2.2.
adjustment lever (2)
When the lever is depressed, the height of the
steering wheel can be smoothly adjusted. Lock the
steering wheel position by pulling the lever up. 3
CAUTION: Do not adjust the position of
the steering wheel during driving –
there is a risk of an accident.
A
S DA 18

There is a dual control switch for the power shuttle

(A) on the right---side arm rest, instructions on
page 60.
One of the parallel direction selectors must
always be disengaged when driving with the
other. If not the system switches to the parking
brake position. Then the activation of all power
shuttle control devices switch off and the parking
brake engages when the speed goes under the limit
(2 kph).

D. Gauges and Controls ---40---

Only one power shuttle control device can be used
(activated) at one time, front lever/arm rest
switch/rear lever (if equipped with reverse driving
equipment).
When the lever is used to control the power shuttle,
the switch on the arm rest (A) must be in the N
position.
The direction selected with the lever is disengaged,
if the switch on the arm rest is simultaneously turned
to a position other than N. The power shuttle must
then be reactivated with both controls in the N
position and additionally the parking brake must be
cycled through the P position.
The clutch pedal need not be used when operating
the power shuttle. The clutch pedal can, however,
always be used in the traditional manner when
changing direction with the power shuttle.
If the clutch pedal is used with the power shuttle,
make sure that the pedal is fully depressed before
operating the power shuttle.
If the tractor is equipped with reverse driving
position equipment, we recommend keeping the
reverse drive power shuttle in the parking brake
position while driving forward.
1. Seat functions with power shuttle
If the tractor is equipped with the reverse driving
position equipment available as alternative
equipment, and the seat is turned to reverse driving
position, the forward drive power shuttle lever will
not function and vice versa. If the seat is crosswise,
neither of the power shuttle levers nor the power
shuttle switch on the arm rest will function. When the
seat is turned to the driving direction, the power
shuttle must be activated by going through the
parking brake position. The parallel control switch
on the arm rest must also be in the N position.
When driving forward, the front power shuttle lever
functions when the seat is turned 30° at a maximum
to either side, or at the extreme lock positions. The
seat features this function even with no reverse
driving position equipment installed.
When driving in the reverse direction, the rear power
shuttle lever functions when the seat is turned 10° at
a maximum to either side, or at the extreme lock
positions.
2. Safety features
--- To ensure safety, the lever must be pulled towards
the steering wheel at the same time as it is moved
either forward or back.
CAUTION: If you must leave the tractor
running with the power shuttle in the
neutral position and you leave the
cabin, switch the gear to neutral as
well.
---41---
--- For safety reasons, the tractors feature an
operator sensor, which prevents the operation
of the power shuttle if the operator is not
seated in the seat. If the power shuttle is
engaged, however, the arrow of the direction in
question starts blinking on the display. The
direction is not engaged until the operator
seats himself or herself in the seat and puts the
power shuttle lever into the parking brake
position and then re---engages the direction.
--- Operation when the speed is under 5km/h:
If the driver leaves the seat for more than two
seconds and the clutch pedal is not pressed for
more than 10% , the shuttle disengages and the
direction arrow flashes. The shuttle is engaged
but not driving until the driver sits on the seat,
stops the tractor and moves the lever to the
parking brake position (P) and then to the
desired direction.
--- Operation when the speed is over 5km/h:
When leaving the seat the shuttle is engaged
Regularly check that the operator sensor
functions in the manner described above. Test
the operation by driving at a slow speed and
avoiding dangerous situations.
--- If the tractor is equipped with reverse driving
position equipment, the reverse driving device
must be kept in the transport position when the
seat is turned forward.
DA 2.2.3.2. Parking brake
S DA 19
Engage the parking brake by pulling the collar on
the power shuttle lever while the lever is in the
neutral position and moving the lever to the lower
position.
This will electro---hydraulically release the springs
that will engage the tractor brakes.
DANGER: When parking the tractor,
ALWAYS engage the parking brake.
When the engine is shut down, the
parking brake is automatically engaged.
When the parking brake is engaged, four---wheel
drive is also engaged, causing all the wheels to
D. Gauges and Controls
brake.
CAUTION: Do not engage the parking
brake while the tractor is moving. For
safety reasons the parking brake does
not engage until the speed falls under
2 kph.
When the parking brake is disengaged, the collar of
the lever must be pulled at the same time as the
lever is moved up to the neutral position.
DA 2.2.4. Powershift
pre---programming/pre---programing
button (4)
3 13
A
4
S DA 20
The desired powershift gear can be
pre---programmed/pre---programed to be engaged
when the power shuttle is used in the following way:
--- depress the clutch pedal (hold it depressed for the
duration of programming/programing)
--- select the desired driving direction (3)
--- select the desired powershift gear (A)
--- press and hold down the
programming/programing button (4) for at least
two seconds. The programmed/programed
direction and the powershift gear are displayed on
the side pillar display.
--- if you so desire, program the other driving
direction in the same way. Different directions may
be programmed/programed differently.
The pre---programming/pre---programing can be
removed by pressing the button (4) for a period of at
least 2 seconds while the power shuttle lever (3) is in
the neutral position. The pre---programming/
pre---programing is also disengaged, if any of the
powershift automatic positions is switched on
(switch DA 2.3.1.3 on page 56). When the
powershift automatics is switched off, the
pre---programming/
pre---programing restores again.
Even if the power is switched off the pre---program-
ming/pre---programing remains.
D. Gauges and Controls ---42---
DA 2.2.5. Display (5)
1
2
3
4
5 6
7 8
9
11
10
12
S DA 21
There is a separate display on the right front pillar of
the tractor for the power shuttle and the powershift. If
the tractor is equipped with reverse driving position
equipment (available as alternative equipment), a
corresponding display can also be found on one of
the rear pillars. The display also works as a display
for the driving speed, outside temperature and the
rear PTO. The display is equipped with a backlight
for working in the dark. It also warms the display in
cold conditions.
The display is divided into three sections:
Power shuttle section (I)
Powershift section (II)
Diagnostics section (III)
DA 2.2.5.1. Power shuttle section (I)
1 The image of the tractor is displayed continuously
when power is on.
2 The forward driving direction arrow is displayed
when forward driving is engaged. The arrow will
blink, if the direction has been changed at a
speed of over 10 kph or the automatic traction
control has disengaged the traction of the
direction in question.
3 The reverse driving direction arrow is displayed
when reverse driving is engaged. The arrow will
blink, if the direction has been changed at a
speed of over 10 kph or the automatic traction
control has disengaged the traction of the
direction in question.
4 Displaying the N---symbol:
--- When the parking brake is engaged, the
N---symbol is displayed continuously.
--- When the parking brake is disengaged, but the
power shuttle lever is in the neutral position, the
N---symbol will blink.
 --- If the automatic traction control is active, the The value which is displayed on the diagnostics
N---symbol will blink in addition to blinking the section the bottom line depends on active
direction arrow when the traction is operations and it is in the following priority:
disengaged. --- Temperature, if nothing else to display
Only one of these symbols (letter N, forward arrow, --- Driving speed replaces the temperature
reverse arrow) can be displayed constant at one
--- PTO speed replaces the driving speed. If the both
time. PTOs are rotating the rear PTO speed is displayed.
5 Forward driving direction (F) and the Powershift --- Setting the shifting RPMs for Powershift mode (on
gear are displayed when a Powershift gear I, II, III
page 58) is the highest priority.
or IIII has been pre---programmed/
pre---programed to powershuttle forward, with F I,
F II, F III or FIIII shown on the display. DA 2.2.6. Combination switch (6)
6 Reverse driving direction (R) and the Powershift
gear are displayed when a Powershift gear I, II, III
or IIII has been pre---programmed/
pre---programed to powershuttle reverse, with R I,
R II, R III or RIIII shown on the display.

DA 2.2.5.2. Powershift section (II)

7 The Automatic Traction Control symbol will blink,
when the Automatic Traction Control is activated.
The symbol is displayed continuously when the
Automatic Traction Control has engaged traction.
8 The number of the engaged Powershift gear is 6
displayed (1, 2, 3 or 4). The engaged gear
number will blink as long as the electronics are
performing the shifting.
9 AUTO 1 is displayed when the automatic
Powershift gear selection programme/program 1
is selected. Correspondingly, AUTO 2 is displayed S DA 22
when the automatic Powershift gear selection
programme/program 2 is selected. When manual Headlight dipper
operation is selected, these displays will be Main beam/Dipped beam will change when pulling
empty. in turn the lever towards the driver.
DA 2.2.5.3. Diagnostics section (III) Direction indicator
Lever up: indicator to the left
10 The PTO symbol is displayed, if the front or rear Lever down: indicator to the right
PTO is rotating (the front PTO is extra
equipment). PTO speed is displayed on the Horn
bottom line. If both the front and rear PTO are Activate by pushing the button at the end of the
rotating simultaneously the rear PTO speed is lever.
displayed. Windscreen wiper
11 In normal situations, with the power on and the Activate by rotating the switch. The wiper has a
tractor standing still, the thermometer is always drizzle setting and two speeds.
displayed and the outside temperature is
displayed on the bottom line with an accuracy of Windscreen washer
plus or minus one degree. The outside Activate by pushing the switch towards the steering
temperature sensor is located at the front part of wheel.
the tractor. The heat of the tractor’s engine may High beam flash signal
raise the temperature reading, especially when Pull the lever back only slightly while low beams are
the tractor is standing still. on.
12 If the tractor is moving, this symbol is displayed
in the place of the thermometer symbol, and the
speed is displayed on the bottom line. The
speed is displayed with an accuracy of plus or
minus one decimal point up to a speed of 10
kph.
13 If the tractor terminal display (on the right---side
control panel) malfunctions, a book symbol is
blinking. Authorised service personnel must then
be contacted.

---43--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 2.2.7. Air pressure system pressure off the buzzer begins to sound.
When the current is off, the parking lights and the
gauge (7) headlights can be switched on without buzzer sound-
ing. This function is useful when leaving the tractor
standing with parking lights on.

DA 2.2.9. Hazard---warning switch (9)

Push the rocker switch to make all direction
indicators blink at the same time.

DA 2.2.10. Main power switch (10)

7
S DA 108
The tractor is equipped with an air pressure system
as standard due the cab suspension. The tractor has
also the quick couplings for pressurised air take---off
(see the introduction figures from right on page 15
and from rear on page 16).
If the tractor is equipped with air brakes as extra
equipment and a trailer engaged to them, it must not
be driven.
WARNING: If the tractor is equipped with air
brakes as extra equipment, the system has to
have full pressure, about 7---8 bar, before starting
to drive with the trailer equipped with air brakes.
DA 2.2.8. Parking and headlamp
switch (8)
Left side depressed =the main power has been
switched on. When pressing the left side, you must
also push the locking clip (10A) to the left at the
same time.
Right side depressed = the main power has been
switched off. When pressing the right side, you must
also push the locking clip (10A) to the left at the
same time. This prevents the main power being
accidentally switched off.
When the main power is switched off, all the circuits
are open except the radio and clock circuits.
The main power should not be switched off
before the ignition switch on the right---side of
the control panel has been turned to the STOP
position.
When the engine has been shut down, the main
power switch indicator light blinks to warn that the
main power must be switched off.
WARNING: Do not switch off main
power while the tractor is moving,
because all wheels will be locked.

DA 2.2.11. Upper headlights switch (11)

10 10A (extra equipment)

11

S DA 23,1

The rocker switch has three positions.

--- Switch right side depressed (the opposite side to
the symbol) = lights off
--- Middle position = the parking lights are on
--- Switch leftt side (the symbol side) depressed =
headlamps on
NOTE: If the lights are left on after turning the current
S DA 24,1
If the tractor is equipped with headlamps attached to
the roof of the cab, they can be turned on with this
switch. When upper headlights are turned on, the
front headlamps are turned off and vice versa.

D. Gauges and Controls ---44---

 DA 2.2.12. Proline instrument panel (12) DA 2.2.12.3. Tachometer (12.3)
The operator receives information from gauges, a The tachometer displays the engine running speed
graphical display, LED warning lights, switches and in hundreds of RPMs.
a buzzer.
DA 2.2.12.4. Speedometer (12.4)
DA 2.2.12.1. Fuel gauge and indicator
The speedometer displays the speed in kilometres
light (12.1)
per hour (mph).

12.2 12.5 12.3 12.5 DA 2.2.12.5. Direction indicator lights (12.5)

12.1 12.4
When the direction indicator is switched on, the
indicator light for the corresponding direction blinks.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly, one of the light
bulbs of the tractor is faulty.

DA 2.2.12.6. High beam indicator light (12.6)

12.1a When the high beams are switched on, the

12.6 corresponding indicator light comes on.

S DA 25,1

The fuel level warning light (12.1a) is lit, when the

fuel gauge is in the red area, with approx. 100 l of
fuel left. It is recommended refilling with fuel
immediately after the warning light comes on at the
latest.

DA 2.2.12.2. Temperature gauge (12.2)

The area between the blue (engine running cold)
and the red is the normal running temperature.
Stop the engine, if the gauge goes to the red area.
When the temperature rises to the red area, also the
Stop light starts blinking (see page 46).

---45--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 2.2.12.7. Instrument panel indicator lights (12.7)
1 2 3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16 17
1 Direction indicator light (green) for the second
trailer (if one of the light bulbs in the combination
is faulty, this light will not come on)
2 Direction indicator light (green) for the first trailer
(if one of the light bulbs in the combination is
faulty, this light will not come on)
3 Coolant level warning light (red). Possible leaks
must be repaired and coolant added.
4 Engine air filter (yellow) becoming blocked, filter
must be serviced.
5 Engine oil pressure (red) too low
6 Lit together with warnings (yellow)
7 STOP (red) blinking
The tractor must be immediately stopped and
the engine shut down. Driving can be
continued for a short period only in an
emergency, for example to move the tractor to
the side of the road.
8 Gearbox oil pressure (red) too low
9 Gearbox oil temperature (red) too high
Oil temperature:
--- In heavy pulling work in a field
continuously = 80°C
short---term = 90˚C
--- Transfer driving at maximum speed
continuously = 100˚C
10 Warning light for the blockage of the auxiliary
hydraulic pressure and return oil filter (red).
--- Change the filter/filters, see maintenance item
20 on page 171.
11 Four---wheel drive (yellow) engaged
12 Front PTO (yellow), extra equipment. Blinks
when front PTO is activated and ready to use.
Comes on continuously when front PTO is
engaged.
13 Cold start glow (yellow) comes on, when the
ignition switch is in position 1 and automatic
glowing is being performed. Blinks when the
engine may be started.
14 Not used
15 Parking brake (red) light comes on when the
power shuttle lever is in the parking brake
position.
D. Gauges and Controls ---46---
7 8 9 10 11 12
18 19 20 21 22
S DA 26
16 Fuel level warning light (yellow) comes on when
approximately 100 liters of fuel are left.
17 Charging (red) comes on when battery charging
is not functioning
18 Rear linkage (yellow) in transport position =
lift/stop/lower switch in the lift position
19 Cruise control (yellow) switched on (constant
driving speed/constant RPM selected)
20 Crawler gear (yellow) engaged
21 Differential lock (yellow) engaged
22 Rear PTO (yellow). Blinks when rear PTO is
activated and ready to use. It comes on
continuously when rear PTO is engaged.
STOP indicator light (7)
The STOP indicator light is controlled by the
following functions, i.e. if one of the following
indicator lights is on, and if the STOP light is also on:
--- engine oil pressure (5) too low
--- gearbox oil pressure (8) too low
---gearbox oil temperature (9) too high
If the STOP light starts blinking on its own, the
engine temperature is too high (also indicated by the
temperature gauge).
CAUTION: If the STOP light comes on, the engine
must be immediately shut down and the
malfunction must be repaired before continuing
driving.
When power is turned on, all indicator lights in use
come on for a moment, with the following indicator
lights remaining on:
--- engine oil pressure (5)
--- STOP light blinking (7)
--- gearbox oil pressure (8)
---four---wheel drive (11)
--- parking brake (15)
--- charging (17)
DA 2.2.12.8. Graphical display of the Proline 2. Displays that can be selected with the
instrument panel (12.8) change---over switch, switch 12.9
When the power is switched on, the display that was
selected last is put on the screen.

2.1. Functions on the top/middle row

12.9
S DA 27

The display has three rows.

Fixed displays: = displays that cannot be

1. S DA 30,1
selected by switches (two functions on the
bottom row) The top row display can be changed by pressing
the right side of the graphical display change---over
1.1. Running hours
switch (12.9).
Move the display change---over switch (12.9)
function to the middle row by pressing its left side.
Move back to the top row functions by pressing the
left side of the switch again.
The middle row has the same functions as the top
row. Different functions can be selected to be
S DA 28 displayed on the top and middle rows at the same
time.
Running hours are displayed with an accuracy of
plus or minus one decimal point when the power is 2.1.1. Working time
on.

1.2. Clock

S DA 31

S DA 29
The clock is displayed on the bottom row, either in
12 or 24 hour display. For more details on changing
the hour display, see page 52.
Setting the correct time, see page 51.
Working time is, for example, the time that has been
devoted to ploughing/plowing a certain area.
Working time is stored in the memory when the
power is switched off from the meter.
The operator can reset the counter. See more details
on page 50.

---47--- D. Gauges and Controls

 2.1.2. Cruise control 2.1.4. Wheel slip (0---100)

S DA 125 S DA 34

This display mode indicates the status of the cruise This display mode shows the percentage wheel slip.
control in connection with the cruise text as follows: The wheel slip percentage is attained by comparing
the speed information from the radar (ground speed)
RPM = constant engine running speed
to the rotation speed of the wheels.
KMH = constant driving speed
The radar starts operating at a speed of 0.3 kph (0.2
The numerical value displays the value of program- mph). Before that, the display shows only dashes.
med/programed constant engine revs/driving speed.
When the constant engine running speed or driving 2.1.5. Rear PTO speed
speed is engaged the corresponding text shows
with white on dark background (constant driving
speed in picture) and also the cruise indicator light
comes on in the instrument panel.
Use the cruise control switch (switch 14 on page 60)
to engage the cruise control.
S DA 35
2.1.3. Driving speed km/h, mph

When the rear PTO is engaged, the symbol is lit up

and the PTO RPMs are displayed next to it.

2.1.6. Front PTO speed (extra equipment)

S DA 33

The driving speed is displayed as follows:

--- When driving speed is under 3 km/h (2 miles/h),
the symbol L is displayed on the screen.
--- Driving speeds of 0---10 km/h (0---10 miles/h) are S DA 36
displayed with an accuracy of plus or minus one
decimal point. When the front PTO (available as extra equipment) is
--- Driving speeds of 10---15 km/h (10---15 miles/h) engaged, the symbol is lit up and the PTO RPMs are
are displayed with an accuracy of plus or minus displayed next to it.
one decimal point in steps of 0.2 units.
--- Driving speeds of over 15 km/h (15 miles/h) are 2.1.7. Engine running speed
displayed without decimals.
You can change the speed unit (km/h / miles/h) by
changing the unit of length, instructions in section
3.7. on page 52.

S DA 37

This display mode shows the engine RPMs (the

gauge with a needle displays the RPMs in hundreds
of RPMs).

D. Gauges and Controls ---48---

2.1.8. Immediate fuel consumption (l/ha, gal/acre)
S DA 136
This display mode shows the immediate fuel con-
sumption on the area worked.
The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by chang-
ing the unit of length, see instructions in section 3.7.
on page 52.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the
unit of volume, see instructions in section 3.8. on
page 53.
2.1.9. Average fuel consumption (l/ha, gal/acre)
S DA 137
This display mode shows the average fuel consump-
tion on the area worked.
The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by chang-
ing the unit of length, see instructions in section, 3.7.
on page 52.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the
unit of volume, see instructions in section 3.8. on
page 53.
The operator can reset the area reading. See section
2.2. on page 50.
2.1.10. Immediate fuel consumption
(l/h, gal/h)
S DA 138
This display mode shows the immediate fuel con-
sumption in an hour.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the
unit of volume, see instructions in section 3.8. on
page 53.
---49---
2.1.11. Average fuel consumption
(l/h, gal/h)
S DA 139
This display mode shows the average fuel consump-
tion in an hour.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the
unit of volume, see instructions in section 3.8. on
page 53.
The operator can reset the area reading. See section
2.2. on page 50.
2.1.12. Fuel consumption (l, gal)
S DA 140
This display mode shows the total fuel consumption.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the
unit of volume, see instructions in section 3.8. on
page 53.
The operator can reset the fuel consumption in-
formation, see instructions in section 2.2. on pa-
ge 50.
2.1.13. Position of lower links %, 0---100 ACR
S DA 129
The AC/R symbol and the position of the lower links
is displayed on the screen as a percentage at a
scale of 0---100 so that position 0 = lower links are
down and 100 = lower links are up. Then, for
example, when the lower links are half---way up, the
display reads 50.
D. Gauges and Controls
2.1.14. Position of lifting links of front linkage %,
0---100 ACF
S DA 130
The display shows symbol AC/F and the position of
the lifting links as a percentage scale 0 --- 100. 0 =
the lifting links are in the lowest position and 100 =
the llifting links are in the top position. When the lift-
ing links are in the middle position, the display
shows the number 50. The front linkage is an extra
equipment.
2.1.15. Gearbox temperature
S DA 39
Temperature is displayed as follows:
--- When the temperature is below +40_C (104_F), lo
is displayed.
--- When the temperature is above +40_C (104_F),
the actual temperature is displayed.
--- When the temperature is above +119_C (246_F),
high is displayed.
If the temperature is continuously over +90_C
(194_F), clean the radiator and check the oil level. In
road driving at maximum speed the oil temperature
can remain continuously at +100_C (212_F).
2.1.16. Travel distance m, km, yard, miles
S DA 40
The travel distance is displayed as follows:
--- Up to 1 km (1 mile) with an accuracy of plus or
minus 1 metre (yard). The display will show the m
(yard) symbol.
D. Gauges and Controls ---50---
--- After one kilometre (mile) the display symbol
changes into km (miles) and displays the distance
in kilometres (miles) with an accuracy of plus or
minus two decimals points up to a distance of 100
km (100 miles).
--- After 100 km (100 miles) the distance is shown
with an accuracy of plus or minus one decimal
point.
---The maximum distance displayed is 999.9 km
(999.9 miles).
You can change the unit of distance (km, miles) by
changing the unit of length. See instructions in
section 3.7. on page 52.
The operator can reset the distance reading. See
section 2.2. on page 50.
2.1.17. Surface area ha, acre
S DA 41
This display shows the area worked. The area
reading increases only when the implement is used
to work the soil (lower links are in the down
position).
The worked area is stored in memory when power is
switched off from the meter.
The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by
changing the unit of length. See instructions in
section 3.7. on page 52.
The operator can reset the area reading. See section
2.2. on page 50.
2.2. Resetting the working time, travel distance
and worked area readings
12.9
12.10
S DA 42,1
--- Select the display to show the working time, travel
distance or the area by pressing the right side (the
symbol side) of the graphical display
change---over switch (12.9) travel distance
featured in the picture).
--- Then press and hold the left side (the opposite --- Press and hold down the right side of the display
side to the symbol) of the display setting switch change---over switch (12.9), the parameter value
(12.10) until the display is reset. will increase continuously.
The working time, travel distance and the area are all
Decreasing a parameter value
reset at the same time from both lines.
--- Press the left side of the display change---over
3. Changing the parameters of the Proline switch (12.9), the parameter value will decrease
instrument panel graphical display one step at a time
--- or
3.1. Setting mode --- Press and hold down the left side of the display
change---over switch (12.9), the parameter value
3.1.1. Activating the setting mode will decrease continuously.
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the
setting mode by pressing and holding down the
right side of the switch for over 3 seconds.

3.3. Setting the clock

12.10
Changing the hour display
S DA 43,1

---Activate the setting mode of the display by

pressing and holding down the right side of the 12.9
display setting switch (12.10) for over 3 seconds.
The display will show the first parameter that can be
changed, the width of the implement. 12.10
--- The rest of the parameters can be displayed by
pressing the left side of the setting switch (12.10). S DA 45,1

3.1.2. Exiting the setting mode Activate the clock in the setting mode (see
--- Exit the setting mode by pressing and holding instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
down the right side of the display setting switch When the hour display is blinking, it can be
(12.10) for over 3 seconds. changed.

3.2. Width of the implement cm, inch Use the display change---over switch (12.9) to
change the parameter value (see instructions in
section 3.2.1. on page 51).

12.9 Changing the minute display

12.9
12.10

S DA 44,1

12.10
Activate the implement width in the setting mode
(see instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
S DA 46,1

3.2.1. Changing a parameter value

Press the right side of the setting switch (12.10), the
minutes start blinking.
Increasing a parameter value
Change minutes in the same way as hours above.
--- Press the right side of the display change---over
switch (12.9), the parameter value will increase Select the next parameter to be changed by
one step at a time pressing the left side of the setting switch (12.10) or
--- or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down
the right side of the switch for over 3 seconds.

---51--- D. Gauges and Controls

 3.4. Clock mode 12/24 3.6. Unit of temperature C, F

12.9 12.9

12.10 12.10

S DA 47,1 S DA 49,1

Activate the clock in the setting mode (see
instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
Choice can be made between 12---hour and
24---hour displays
--- Press either edge of the display change---over
switch (12.9) to change the display to either
12---hour or 24---hour display.
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the
setting mode by pressing and holding down the
right side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
Activate the unit of temperature in the setting mode
(see instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
--- Press either edge of the display change---over
switch (12.9) to change the display to C or F
Select the next parameter to be changed by
pressing the left side of the setting switch (12.10) or
exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down
the right side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
3.7. Unit of length m, yard

3.5. Direction indicator buzzer

12.9 12.9

12.10
12.10

S DA 50,1

Activate the unit of length in the setting mode (see

S DA 48,1
instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
---Press either edge of the display change---over
Activate the direction indicator buzzer in the setting switch (12.9) to change the display to either
mode (see instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51). Metric or Imperial mode.
---Press either edge of the display change---over When the unit of length is changed between Metric /
switch (12.9) to change the display to either on or Imperial, the following units also change according
off. to the table below:
When the function is on (no cross), the buzzer is
Unit Metric Imperial
activated together with the direction indicator or the
hazard warning. Speed km/h mph
Select the next parameter to be changed by Distance km, m miles, yard
pressing the left side of the setting switch (12.10) or Surface area ha acre
exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down
the right side of the switch for over 3 seconds. Implement width cm inch

Select the next changed parameter by pressing the

left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the
setting mode by pressing and holding down the
right side of the switch for over 3 seconds.

D. Gauges and Controls ---52---

 3.8. Unit of volume l, gal (UK, US)
12.9
12.10
S DA 126
Activate the unit of volume in the setting mode (see
instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
--- Press either edge of the display change over
switch (12.9) to change the display to either
Liters, US Gallons or UK Gallons mode.
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the set-
ting mode by pressing and holding down the right
side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
3.9. Front PTO speed display
12.9
12.10
S DA 127
Activate the front PTO speed display in the setting
mode (see instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
--- Press either edge of the display change over
switch (12.9) to activate the front PTO speed dis-
play to either on or off.
The purpose of this function is to activate the front
PTO speed display with this switch if the tractor is
retrofit with the front PTO.
If the tractor equipped with the front PTO has a cross
in this display the front PTO speed will not be disp-
layed (see instructions in section 2.1.6. on page 48).
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the set-
ting mode by pressing and holding down the right
side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
---53---
3.10. Display for lifting link position of the front
linkage
12.9
12.10
S DA 128
Activate the display for lifting link position of front
linkage in the setting mode (see instructions in sec-
tion 3.1.1. on page 51).
--- Press either edge of the display change over
switch (12.9) to activate the display for lifting links
position to either on or off.
The purpose of this function is to activate the display
for the lifting link position of front linkage with this
switch if the tractor is retrofit with the front linkage.
If the tractor equipped with the front linkage has a
cross in this display the display for lifting link posi-
tion of front linkage will not be displayed (see in-
structions in section 2.1.14. on page 50).
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the set-
ting mode by pressing and holding down the right
side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
3.11. Adjusting display contrast
12.9
12.10
S DA 51,1
Activate the display contrast in the setting mode (see
instructions in section 3.1.1. on page 51).
--- Press the left side of the display change---over
switch (12.9) to make the display dimmer
(parameter value is decreased, min. 80) or the
right side to make the display brighter (parameter
value is increased, max. 120).
Select the next parameter to be changed by
pressing the left side of the setting switch (12.10) or
exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down
the right side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
D. Gauges and Controls
4. Proline instrument panel graphical display DA 2.2.12.10. Proline instrument panel
other functions graphical display setting switch (12.10)

4.1. Low fuel pressure 1. Enlarging the middle row display

12.10

S DA 131
12.10

This warning gives information about the pressure

drop of the fuel before running faults appear.
The display is closed by pressing the left side of the
setting switch (12.10). S DA 53,1

Proline instrument panel

DA 2.2.12.9. To enlarge any middle row display to a height of two
graphical display change---over rows press the left side of the switch (12.10). The
switch (12.9) top row display then vanishes. Press the left side of
the switch a second time to return the display to
normal (a two---row display).
12.9
2. Using the setting mode
12.10 Additionally, the switch (12.10) can be used to
change the graphical display into a setting mode for
changing various parameters. See instructions in the
section about changing the graphical display
parameters, 3.1. on page 51.

S DA 52,1

Use the switch to change the displays of the top and

middle row of the graphical display, see instructions
at the graphical display section 2.1.on page 47.

D. Gauges and Controls ---54---

 DA 2.3. Right---side panel/arm rest

DA 2.3.1. Driving WARNING: If there is trouble with the

engine during driving (for example, the
fuel runs out), do not press the clutch
DA 2.3.1.1. Ignition (1) pedal. While the tractor is moving and
the power transmission is engaged, the
engine will turn and there will be
pressure in the system. If the engine
dies, pressure is lost and ALL WHEELS
WILL LOCK.

The STOP position can be used as an

EMERGENCY STOP, meaning that the
tractor and the operation of much of its
equipment can be stopped in case of
malfunction by turning the ignition
1 switch to the STOP position (the engine
will be shut down, brakes are engaged
S DA 113 in all wheels, traction is disengaged
from the power transmission, the
The main power switch in the instrument panel must movement of the linkage stops etc.).
be turned on before the ignition will function.
For more detailed driving instructions, see the
Position functions: section Starting and driving, beginning from
Stop the engine. page 117.
When the ignition switch is turned from
position 1 to the stop position (engine is DA 2.3.1.2. Gear shift lever (2)
shut down), the main power switch
indicator light in the instrument panel
starts blinking until the main power switch
4
has been turned off.
1 Power on (this is the normal position while the
3
engine is running, but it also allows the
operation of electric equipment while the engine
is not running).
When the ignition switch is turned from the stop 2
position to position 1, the main power switch
indicator light in the instrument panel starts
blinking.
S DA 55
In cold conditions, while the engine is cold, the
automatic glowing is turned on and the glow
indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Use this lever to select one of the six synchronised
gears of the main gearbox, with the neutral position
in the middle. All six gears are available for both
Starting. forward and reverse driving.
If automatic glowing is on, the glow
indicator light in the instrument panel There is no need to use the drive clutch pedal when
starts blinking when the engine can be shifting main gears due to the HiShift switch (4) in
started. the head of the lever. The HiShift automatics shift the
If automatic glowing is not used, turn the gears smoothly. The clutch pedal can always be
switch directly to the starting position. used if required.

WARNING: Do not turn the ignition to

the STOP position during driving. If the
power is turned off, the parking brake
will engage and ALL WHEELS WILL
LOCK.

---55--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 2.3.1.3. Powershift buttons (3)
4 makes driving the tractor easier. When shifting
3 3
S DA 56
The Powershift has 4 steps.
The Powershift buttons can be found in both the
head of the gear shift lever and the arm rest.
Increase the speed range by pressing the hare
button and decrease the speed range by pressing
the tortoise button, one step at a time.
S DA 57
The display in the cab pillar shows a number (A) that
indicates which speed range has been selected. The
engaged gear number will blink as long as the
electronics are performing the shifting.
Every time power has been turned on the Powershift
gear is at the lowest speed range, if power has been
turned off for longer than 10 seconds. However, the
automatic system retains any possible Powershift
pre---programming/pre---programing for the power
shuttle.
Powershift speed ranges:
--- Speed range 1: display shows 1
--- Speed range 2: display shows 2
--- Speed range 3: display shows 3
--- Speed range 4: display shows 4
The speed ranges can be selected during driving
without using the drive clutch, and the shifting is
smooth due to the automatic system.
D. Gauges and Controls
DA 2.3.1.4. HiShift switch (4)
The HiShift switch is meant to act as an aid that
gears, the wet multi---disc clutch can be controlled
with a mere touch of your fingertip. The clutch
control button is on the gear shift lever, which means
that there is no need to use the clutch pedal at all.
However, the clutch pedal can always be used, and
is even recommended in some circumstances, such
as when attaching implements.
When using the HiShift switch, depress the button
and only then move the gear shift lever to the
desired position. The button can be released, and
the automatic system will smoothly perform the
shifting.
For more details on the use of the HiShift switch, see
the Shifting part of Starting and driving instructions
on page 120.
DA 2.3.1.5. Crawler gear switch (5)
6
5
S DA 58
The switch has two positions.
The symbol side depressed = crawler gear
engaged (an indicator light will be lit up in the
instrument panel).
The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
crawler gear disengaged.
CAUTION: The crawler gear can be
engaged only when the parking brake
is engaged, the gear shift lever is in the
neutral position and the clutch pedal is
pressed down.
For more details on the use of the crawler gear, see
the Starting and driving instructions on page 120.
---56---
 DA 2.3.1.6. Automatic Traction Control
switch (6)
Automatic Traction Control engages and disengages
traction when the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal is pressed down, depending on the running
speed of the engine and the driving speed. The
switch has two positions.
1. Switching Automatic Traction Control to
ready status
The Automatic Traction Control is switched to ready
status (but not yet into operation) when the
following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
--- the symbol side (6) is depressed
--- the tractor is not moving
--- the running speed of the engine is under 1000
RPM
2 2
1 depressed
S DA 59,1
When the Automatic Traction Control is at ready
status, the Automatic Traction Control symbol (1)
will blink in the powershift section of the display.
After the engine has started, the function must
always be re---engaged, that is, the opposite side to
the symbol must be depressed and the ready status
must be switched on again.
of the clutch pedal.
When the Automatic Traction Control releases
traction, the arrow of the direction in question (2)
blinks on the display.
The power shuttle can be used while traction is
released by the Automatic Traction Control. The
arrow of the selected direction will blink then, but the
selected direction will not be engaged.
While the traction is released by the Automatic
Traction Control, the Automatic Traction Control
switch (DA 2.3.1.6) can also be turned off. The
selected direction will not be engaged, however, and
the direction arrow blinks until the power shuttle
lever has been cycled through the parking brake
position and the direction has been re---selected.
1.2. Engaging traction
Traction is engaged, when the following conditions
are simultaneously fulfilled:
--- a driving direction has been selected
---the brake pedal is not pressed down
---the running speed of the engine is over 1100 RPM
--- the accelerator pedal has been sufficiently
After traction has been engaged, the arrow of the
selected driving direction and the Automatic Traction
Control symbol stop blinking and are continuously
lit.
Driving speed does not have an effect on the traction
engagement.
If the clutch pedal is depressed when traction
engagement begins, traction is engaged according
to the position of the clutch pedal.

1.1. Traction release

When the Automatic Traction Control has been

switched to the ready status, the traction control
engages (= traction disengages) in the following
situations:
--- the running speed of the engine is under 1000
RPM
and
--- the accelerator pedal is almost completely up
or
--- the brake pedal has been pressed down
and
--- the driving speed is under 12 kph.
Traction is always released regardless of the position

---57--- D. Gauges and Controls

 2. Switching Automatic Traction Control out 1. Setting the shifting RPMs for Auto 2
of ready mode Powershift mode:
Depress the opposite side to the symbol (6). --- depress the side of the Powershift symbol (3).
AUTO 2 will be displayed on the side pillar display.
The selected direction will not be engaged, however
(if traction is engaged it is switched to neutral), and
the direction arrow blinks until the power shuttle
lever has been cycled through the parking brake
position and the direction has been re---selected.

Powershift switch,
DA 2.3.1.7.
manual/Auto1/Auto2 (7)
B

S DA 61,1

--- press the Powershift

pre---programming/pre---programing button (A) for
7 one second with neither driving direction selected.
S DA 60

Use this switch to select either manual use of the

Powershift gears or one of two automatic modes.
The switch has three positions.
The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
manual operation of the Powershift gears.
The middle position of the switch = Powershift
automatic mode 1, the Powershift gears are shifted
by the automatic system depending on the load and
the running speed of the engine (installed in the
factory). The display on the right forward pillar (in
tractors equipped with reverse driving equipment it
is also on the rear pillar display) shows the text
AUTO 1.
The symbol side depressed = Powershift
automatic mode 2. The automatic system can be S DA 62,1
programmed/programed to shift to the desired
Powershift gears at selected engine RPMs. The --- after activation, the current limit RPM for shifting
display on the right forward pillar (in tractors down is displayed in the diagnostics section (III),
equipped with reverse driving equipment it is also on and the letter L will blink in the Powershift section
the rear pillar display) shows the text AUTO 2. (II).
--- use the Powershift buttons (B) (hare button to
increase and tortoise button to decrease) to select
the desired RPMs for shifting down.
The RPMs change at steps of 50.
The RPMs can be set between 900 and 2300 RPM.

D. Gauges and Controls ---58---

 DA 2.3.1.8. Front suspension manual setting
indicator light (8)

10

11

S DA 63,1
--- once the downshifting RPM has been set, press
the pre---programming/pre---programing button
(A). Then the RPM for shifting up is displayed in
the diagnostics section (III) and the letter H in the
Powershift section (II) will blink.
--- use the Powershift buttons (B) to set the desired
RPMs for shifting up with an accuracy of 50 RPM.
The RPMs can be set between 1000 and 2400
RPM.
The RPMs for shifting up must be at least 100 RPM
higher than the RPMs for shifting down.
For example, if 1500 RPM has been set as the limit
for shifting down, the limit for shifting up can be set
to 1600---2400 RPM.
--- once the RPMs for shifting up have been set, press
the pre---programming/pre---programing button
(A). The controller will then store the set RPMs and
switches to normal operation.
Attempting to use the power shuttle during the
setting of the RPM limits, will start the arrow of the
selected direction blinking. After this the direction
can be re---engaged only after finishing making the
settings and the power shuttle lever has been cycled
through the parking brake position. After the parking
brake has been engaged, the controller switches to
normal operation.
The RPM limits remain in the memory even after the
power has been cut.
S DA 64
When the manual mode has been selected with the
front suspension selection switch (10), this indicator
light comes on.
DA 2.3.1.9. Front suspension locking setting
indicator light (9)
When the locking mode has been selected with the
front suspension selection switch (10), this indicator
light comes on.
Front suspension selection
DA 2.3.1.10.
switch, manual/auto/locked (10)
The switch has three positions.
Opposite side to the symbol depressed = manual
mode.
The operator can then adjust the height of the front
end with the level control switch (11).
Middle position = automatic mode.
The automatics will keep the front of the tractor in
the middle of the suspension range and ensures
smooth suspension.
Symbol side depressed = suspension is locked.
Used for example when the front linkage is heavily
loaded.

When one of the automatic modes is on: DA 2.3.1.11. Front suspension level
control (11)
--- the tractor ensures that the correct Powershift gear
is engaged. The switch has three positions and is
For more details on the use of the Powershift gear spring---centred.
automatics, see the Starting and driving instructions Press the opposite side to the symbol = the front
on page 122. of the tractor lowers
Press the symbol side = the front of the tractor
rises
Even when moved to extreme positions, some
flexibility remains in the suspension.

---59--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 2.3.1.12. Power shuttle switch (12) There is no need to use the clutch pedal when using
the power shuttle. The clutch pedal can, however,
always be used in the traditional manner when
changing direction with the power shuttle.
If the clutch pedal is used with the power shuttle,
make sure that the pedal is fully depressed before
operating the power shuttle.
WARNING: The power shuttle switch on
the right---side arm rest does not enga-
ge the parking brake in the N position.
A

DA 2.3.1.13. Hand throttle (13)

12 13
S DA 65

Forward position F: Driving direction is forward

Neutral position N: Neutral
Reverse position R: Driving direction is reverse
The power shuttle switch on the arm rest is a parallel
use switch for the power shuttle lever (A) next to the
steering wheel (instructions on page 40).
One of the parallel direction selectors must
always be disengaged when driving with the
other. If not the system switches to the parking
brake position. Then the activation of all power S DA 114
shuttle control devices switch off and the parking
brake engages when the speed goes under the limit The rotating knob (13) (potentiometer) operates as
(2kph). control for the hand throttle lever. Rotate the knob
Only one power shuttle control device can be used clockwise to increase the engine speed.
(activated) at one time, front lever/arm rest When the hand throttle is used, it functions like the
switch/rear lever (if equipped with reverse driving accelerator pedal and controlling the engine revs by
equipment). the one giving the larger value.
1. Activating the power shuttle switch on the DA 2.3.1.14. Cruise control selection/setting
arm rest:
RPM/kph (14)
--- Both the lever and the switch must be in the N
position
--- Depress the clutch pedal when first choosing a
direction
--- Use the switch (12) to choose the desired direction
Now power shuttling works with the switch on the
arm rest.
16 14
1.1. Deactivating the switch:
--- If the power shuttle is set to the N position for over
3 seconds, the control device is deactivated and
must be reactivated.
17
Or
--- If the power shuttle lever is moved away from the
N position, once a direction has been selected
15
with the power shuttle switch. The switch must S DA 123
then be reactivated with both controls in the N
position and additionally the parking brake must
The switch has three positions and is
be cycled through the P position.
spring---centred.

D. Gauges and Controls ---60---

The cruise control does not operate simultaneously
with the automatic traction control.
1. Programming/programing the cruise
control (RPM/kph):
--- Set the driving speed or the PTO speed to the
desired value with the accelerator pedal
--- Press the rpm or kmh side of the cruise control
selection/setting switch for more than three
seconds, then the cruise indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on and the constant
speed is stored in the memory.
Speeds under 2 kph can not be pre---programmed/
pre---programed.
2. Activating a programmed/programed
constant speed:
--- If a programmed/programed constant speed is not
on, press the rpm or kmh side of the cruise control
switch for a while. The last setting stored then
comes into effect.
If a constant driving speed setting is in use, driving
speed can be increased with the accelerator pedal.
Once the accelerator pedal is released, the driving
speed returns to the programmed/programed value.
3. Constant RPMs are turned off when:
--- Shifting to constant driving speed by pressing the
kmh side of cruise control switch (14)
--- If the driving speed is high, over 30 kph
--- Pressing the cruise control OFF switch (17)
4. Constant driving speed (kph) is turned off
when:
--- Shifting to constant engine running speed by
pressing the rpm side of cruise control switch (14)
--- Depressing the clutch pedal
--- Depressing the both brake pedals simultaneously
--- Pressing the HiShift button
---Pressing the cruise control OFF switch (17)
--- Changing the driving direction
DA 2.3.1.15. Decreasing the cruise control
setting (15)
When a programmed/programed cruise control is
on:
--- Press the tortoise button (15) to lower the speed
or engine RPMs, depending on which setting was
selected with the switch (14).
---On stopping pressing, the new setting stays in
effect but is not stored in the memory.
---61---
DA 2.3.1.16. Increasing the cruise control
setting (16)
When a programmed/programed cruise control is
on:
--- Press the hare button (16) to increase the speed
or engine RPMs, depending on which setting was
selected with the switch (14).
--- On stopping pressing, the new setting stays in
effect but is not stored in the memory.
DA 2.3.1.17. Turning cruise control OFF (17)
Press the OFF button to turn off a constant driving
speed (kmh) or engine running speed (rpm) setting
which ever was selected.
When the cruise control (rpm or kmh) is on, the
cruise indicator light in the instrument panel is
illuminated.
When the power is switched off from the tractor the
setting values reset.
DA 2.3.1.18. Four---wheel drive automatic
switch (18)
17 18
S DA 67
The automatic 4WD is controlled by the 3 position
switch (OFF---AUTO---ON). When the 4WD is
engaged the indicator light in the instrument panel is
illuminated.
Opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off):
4WD is disengaged except when:
--- the latched together brake pedals are pressed
--- or
--- the parking brake is engaged
Middle position (Auto): the automatic position:
In the automatic position the 4WD always engages
when needed and disengages at once when 4WD is
not needed. The function is based on the
measurement of the wheel slip.
Symbol side pressed down (On): Manual on
D. Gauges and Controls
position, 4WD is always engaged. DA 2.3.2. Linkage/PTO
The four---wheel drive can be engaged and
disengaged during driving without using the drive DA 2.3.2.1. Rear linkage (1)
clutch.
For more details on using the rear linkage, see the
With this function it is always possible to get the Working instructions beginning on page 133.
maximum traction. This reduces wheel slip by the
rear wheels when working on slippery surfaces.
1. Rear linkage lock indicator light (1.1)
NOTE! If a fault should be noticed in the 4WD
function (switch, sensor...), the 4WD will be
engaged for safety reasons.
1.2
DA 2.3.1.19. Differential lock automatic 1.1
switch (19)
1.2
The differential lock engages both the rear and front
axles electro---hydraulically. The differential lock
switch has three positions (OFF---AUTO--- ON).
When the lock is engaged, an indicator light
in the instrument panel is illuminated.
S DA 68
Opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off):
the lock is always disengaged. The light is lit if the rear linkage has not been
Middle position (Auto): the automatic position: activated.

In the automatic position the lock engages when 1.1. Activating the linkage
needed and disengages at once when it is not
needed. The function is based on the measurement
of the wheel slip. 1.3 1.4

For safety reasons the lock is disengaged when

driving speed rises over 14 km/h or the wheels are
turned more than 15˚ (from the middle position).
Symbol side pressed down (On): the lock is
always engaged except when:
--- one or both brake pedals are depressed (the lock
re---engages when one or both pedals are
released).
The differential lock can be engageded and disen-
gaged during driving.
Use the lock only when necessary to ensure an even
grip for the wheels. If possible, disengage the lock
while driving on public roads.
NOTE! If a fault should be noticed in the lock
function (switch, sensor...), the lock will be
disengaged for safety reasons.
S DA 69
The linkage can be activated by turning the
lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) to either the lift or lower
position. The lock indicator light (1.1) will turn off
and the linkage can be operated with the controls.
The linkage must be activated every time the tractor
has been shut down and the power has been turned
off.
2. Rear linkage lift/lower indicator lights (1.2)
Lift indicator light (arrow up) comes on when the
lifting links are being raised. Lower indicator light
(arrow down) comes on when the lifting links are
being lowered. When the lifting links are in the set
position, the indicator lights are not lit up.

D. Gauges and Controls ---62---

 3. Rear linkage lift/stop/lower switch (1.3)
The lift/stop/lower switch has three positions:
--- The symbol side depressed the linkage is
lowering = Autocontrol position
--- Middle position is the stop position
--- The opposite side to the symbol depressed the
linkage is lifting = transport position (an indicator
light is lit in the instrument panel)
Use this switch to lift the implement to the transport
position by pressing the switch to the lift position,
and lower it again to the correct depth (selected with
the position control knob 1.4) by pressing the switch
to the lower position.
The movement of the linkage can be stopped by
pressing the lift/stop/lower switch to the middle
position.
The lift indicator light (1.2) (arrow up, on the
right---side control panel) is lit up while the lifting
links are raising. The lower indicator light (1.2)
(arrow down, in the right---side control panel) comes
on while the lifting links are lowering. When the lifting
links are in the set position, the indicator lights are
not lit up.
4. Rear linkage position control knob (1.4)
1.3 1.4
1.5
S DA 70
Turn the knob clockwise to lift the linkage and turn it
counter---clockwise to lower the linkage. The
position of the lower links can be set gradually with
the knob. This knob determines the position of the
lower links when the lower position of the
lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is used, when the position
control P is selected on (instructions on page 92).
---63---
5. Rear linkage Autocontrol bypass
switch (1.5)
5.1. Forced lowering
The forced lowering of the switch functions only
when the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is in the lower =
Autocontrol position. When the switch is pressed
down, the lower links are lowered below the height
set with the position control knob (1.4). After the
switch is released, the lower links are moved to the
height set by the position control knob. When the
forced lowering switch is used, the lowering speed is
the same as the speed that was set with the lowering
speed control.
5.2. Lifting function
The lifting function of the switch functions only when
the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is in the lift position.
When the switch is pressed down, the lower links
are lifted approx. 2 % above the transport height
value set with the tractor terminal. If the Drive
Balance Control is active, the lower links are lifted
approx. 4 % above the set value. After the switch is
released, the lower links are moved to the set height.
The lifting function can be used for example when
locking a hydraulic towing hook.
The following functions of the rear linkage can be
adjusted on the tractor terminal screen (for operating
instructions see page 92):
--- Lowering speed (on page 92)
--- Transport height (on page 92)
--- Position control/draft control (on page 92)
--- Pressure control (on page 93)
--- Implement sensor control (on page 94)
--- Slip control (on page 95)
--- Drive Balance Control (on page 95)
--- Lifting speed (on page 96)
D. Gauges and Controls
 DA 2.3.2.2. Rear PTO (2)
For more details on using the rear PTO, see the
Working instructions beginning on page 129.
1. Rear PTO activation switch (2.1)
2.1
S DA 71
The switch has two positions.
2.2
S DA 72
--- The opposite side to the symbol (2.1)
depressed = rear PTO is not activated and will
not be engaged when the start button (2.2) is
pressed down.
--- The symbol side (2.1) depressed = rear PTO is
activated to ready mode. In the instrument panel
and in the activation switch the indicator
lights blink.
NOTE: When the rear PTO is engaged, it can be
stopped by depressing the opposite side to the
symbol.
After power has been shut off, the rear PTO must be
re---activated.
D. Gauges and Controls
2. Rear PTO start/stop button (2.2)
2.1. Starting
Once the rear PTO has been activated with the
switch (2.1) to the ready mode, the rear PTO can be
engaged by pressing the button.
Once rear PTO is engaged, the indicator light in the
instrument panel is continuously lit up.
2.2. Stopping
Stop the rear PTO by pressing the switch (2.1) a
second time.
With this button, PTO can be disengaged only
temporarily.
NOTE: When the PTO is not required, keep the
lower side of the activation switch (2.1)
depressed = not activated. Always do this when
leaving the cab, except when using the external
PTO buttons at the rear.
2.3. Rear PTO external buttons
B
S DA 73
There are rear PTO buttons (B) in both of the rear
mudguards of the tractor for external operation.
In order for the buttons to function, the rear PTO
must have been switched to ready mode with
switch (2.1).
The rear PTO is engaged when either of the rear
start buttons is pressed down for at least 3
seconds continuously (engaging begins after 0.5
seconds). If the pressing the button is stopped
during the 3 secs, the PTO stops.
The PTO can be stopped by pressing the rear start
button (B) for a second time. After this the button
will work as the start button again, when it is pressed
for a period of over 3 seconds.
---64---
 2.4. Rear PTO display
S DA 35
If necessary, the rear PTO speed (RPM) can be
displayed on the Proline instrument panel display
(see Rear PTO speed on page 48).
When the rear PTO is engaged, the rear PTO symbol
and below that the PTO speed are also displayed on
the side pillar display.
An electronic controller will engage the PTO
smoothly.
2.5. Emergency stop
A
2 lights (3.2)
S DA 141
There is an emergency stop socket (A) on the
connector panel at the rear of the tractor with a
connected plug. When the plug is removed, the PTO
stops.
The external PTO emergency stop can be set to
work in two different methods:
Method 1: Attach a cord from the operating position
to the emergency stop socket plug.
Method 2: Open the socket and remove the wire
loop from the connectors, replacing it with a longer
loop, with one end at the operating position.
Connect a switch at the operating position with
which the circuit can be opened.
For details on using PTO, see Working instructions
on page 129.
---65---
DA 2.3.2.3. Front linkage (3), extra equipment
For more details on using the front linkage, see the
Working instructions beginning on page 140.
1. Front linkage lock indicator light (3.1)
3.4 3.2 3.1
3.3 3.5
S DA 75
The light is lit if the front linkage has not been
activated.
1.1. Activating the linkage
The linkage can be activated by turning the
lift/stop/lower switch (3.3) to either the lift or lower
position. The lock indicator light (3.1) will then turn
off and the linkage can be operated with the
controls. The linkage must be activated every time
the tractor has been shut down and the power has
been turned off.
2. Front linkage lift/lower indicator
The lift indicator light (arrow up) comes on when the
lifting links are being raised. The lower indicator light
(arrow down) comes on when the lifting links are
being lowered. When the lifting links are in place, the
indicator lights are not lit.
Additionally there are buttons at the front for
attaching and detaching implements, see page 83.
3. Front linkage lift/stop/lower switch (3.3)
The lift/stop/lower switch has three positions:
--- The symbol side depressed the linkage is
lowering = Autocontrol position
--- Middle position is the stop position
--- The opposite side to the symbol depressed the
linkage is lifting = transport position
Use this switch to lift the implement to the transport
position by pressing the switch to the lift position,
and lower it again to the correct depth (selected by
the position control knob (3.4) by pressing down the
switch to the lower position.
The movement of the front linkage can be stopped
by pressing down the lift/stop/lower switch to the
middle position.
D. Gauges and Controls
 4. Front linkage position control knob (3.4)
Turn the knob clockwise to lift the front linkage and
turn it counter---clockwise to lower the front linkage.
The position of the lifting links can be set gradually
with the knob. This knob determines the position of
the lifting links when the lower position of the
lift/stop/lower switch (3.3) is used.
5.The front linkage Autocontrol bypass
switch = forced lowering switch (3.5)
When the switch is pressed, the lifting links are
lowered below the height set with the position
control knob (3.4). After the switch is released, the
lifting links are moved to the height set by the
position control knob. The forced lowering switch
functions only when the lift/stop/lower switch (3.3) is
in the lower position = Autocontrol position. When
the forced lowering switch is used, the lowering
speed is the same as the speed that was set with the
lowering speed control.
The following functions of the front linkage can be
adjusted on the tractor terminal screen (for operating
instructions see page 89):
--- Lowering speed (on page 89)
--- Transport height (on page 89)
--- Pressure/position control (on page 89)
--- Lifting speed (on page 91)
DA 2.3.2.4. Front PTO (4), extra equipment
For more details on using the front PTO, see the
Working instructions beginning on page 130.
---The symbol side depressed = front PTO is
activated to ready mode. In the instrument panel
and in the activation switch the indicator
lights blink.
NOTE: The front PTO can be stopped by
depressing the opposite side to the symbol.
After power has been shut off, front PTO must be
re---activated.
2. Front PTO start/stop button (4.2)
2.1. Starting
Once the front PTO has been activated (with the
switch 4.1) to ready mode, the front PTO can be
engaged by pressing the button.
Once front PTO is engaged, the indicator light in the
instrument panel is continuously lit.
2.2. Stopping
Stop the front PTO by pressing the switch a second
time.
With this button, the PTO can be disengaged only
temporarily.
NOTE: When the PTO is not required, keep the
activation switch opposite side to the symbol
(4.1) depressed = not activated. Always do this
when leaving the cab, except when using the
external button of the front PTO.

1. Front PTO activation switch (4.1)

4.2

4.1
S DA 76

The switch has two positions.

--- The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
front PTO is not activated and will not be engaged
when the start button (4.2) is pressed.

D. Gauges and Controls ---66---

 2.3. Front PTO external button
B
S DA 77
There is front PTO button (B) on the left side of the
front of the tractor for external operation.
In order for the button to function, the front PTO
must have been switched to ready mode with
(switch 4.1).
Front PTO is engaged when the front start button
is pressed for a period of at least 3 seconds
continuously (engaging begins after 0.5 seconds). If
the pressing the button is stopped during the 3 secs,
the PTO stops.
The PTO can be stopped by pressing the front start
button (B) for a second time. After this the button
will work as the start button again, when it is pressed
for a period of over 3 seconds.
2.4. Front PTO speed display
S DA 36
If necessary, the front PTO speed (B) (RPM) can be
displayed in the Proline instrument panel display
(see section 2.1.6. on page 48).
When the front PTO is engaged, the PTO symbol
and below that the PTO speed are also displayed on
the side pillar display. If the rear PTO is engaged
simultaneously, the rear PTO speed is displayed on
the bottom line.
---67---
For details on using PTO, see Working instructions
on page 130.
DA 2.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics
The number of the corresponding valve block and
the port colours corresponding to the lever
movements (green = --- and blue = +) have been
marked down next to the hydraulics control lever.
The corresponding valve block numbers and colours
can also be found from the connectors at the rear of
the tractor. The corresponding valve block numbers
and colours can also be found on the tractor
terminal screen.
DA 2.3.3.1. Adjusting valve block (=valve)
properties
The properties of the auxiliary hydraulics valve
blocks can be adjusted on the tractor terminal
screen (for instructions see page 97.
1. Valve block properties that can be
adjusted:
Properties that can be adjusted are always in effect
when the valve blocks are used.
1.1. Switching valve blocks ON and OFF, see page
99.
A valve block can be switched ON or OFF. In OFF
mode a valve will not function even if the control
lever is moved.
1.2. Maximum flow adjustment, see page 99.
Gradual adjustment of the maximum flow of the
valve block as a percentage between 1 and 100 is
possible.
1.3. Time of output increase/decrease,
progression, see page 100.
It is possible to adjust a valve block’s time of output
increase, decrease and the lever movement in
relation to output (progression).
2. Valve block functions that can be
activated/adjusted
The functions that can be activated/adjusted can
only be used when they have been activated.
2.1. Position lock hold time, see page 102.
--- The valve block function can be set to be held for
a desired time.
2.2. Position lock, see page 102.
---A valve block function can be set to remain on
continuously.
D. Gauges and Controls
 2.3. Floating position, see page 103. DA 2.3.3.3. Valve block 1 control lever (2)
--- The valve block allows an implement to move
freely, for example following the ground level. 3 2
4
2.4. Output as a function of driving speed, see
page 103.
--- The operation of the valve block can be seen to
depend on the driving speed.

Activation switch (1) for

DA 2.3.3.2.
hydraulic valve blocks (1---7)

S DA 79

The right control lever is for valve block 1.

In order for the valve block to function, the hydraulic
valve blocks must have been activated by the switch
(1).

DA 2.3.3.4. Valve block 2 control lever (3)

The middle control lever is for valve block 2.
1 In order for the valve block to function, the hydraulic
S DA 78
valve blocks must have been activated by the switch
The switch has two positions. (1).
--- The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
auxiliary hydraulics control levers and switches will DA 2.3.3.5. Valve block 3 control lever (4)
not function. The left control lever is for valve block 3.
---The symbol side depressed = all auxiliary
hydraulics valves (1---7) are activated and function In order for the valve block to function, the hydraulic
when their control levers and switches are valve blocks must have been activated by the switch
operated. A valve block can be in the OFF mode, (1).
set on the tractor terminal.
DA 2.3.3.6. Activation button and indicator
NOTE: All functions of the auxiliary hydraulics
light for valve block 1 (5)
can be stopped by depressing the opposite side
to the symbol.
7 6 5
If power has been shut off, the valve blocks must be
re---activated.

NOTE: The activation switch must be turned off

during driving on the road to avoid inadvertent 2
actuator movements. 3
4

S DA 80

Several different functions can be set for a valve

block with the Tractor terminal. They can be
activated and deactivated (ON/OFF) as necessary,
see instructions beginning at section DB 5.3.4. on
page 101.

D. Gauges and Controls ---68---

 1. Activating blocks 4 and 5, directing the one---lever control
output to the connectors at the rear, or valve blocks
--- Move the lever of the valve block in question at 8 and 9, directing the output to the connectors at the
least 75 % of the range of movement to the front.
direction of the set colour Valve blocks 4 and 8 are the same, and valve blocks
and 5 and 9 are the same, but the change---over switch
--- simultaneously press the corresponding activation (9) directs the outputs to different connectors and
button. the tractor terminal can be used to adjust valve
properties, see instructions beginning on page 97.
The button indicator light comes on.
If the tractor is equipped with a front linkage,
2. Deactivating available as extra equipment, the connectors for
valve blocks 8 and 9 are located on a bracket
--- Move the control lever of the valve block in connected to the front linkage beam.
question If the tractor is equipped with a front loader but not
or with a front linkage, valve blocks 8 and 9 are
--- Press the activation button of the valve block in connected directly to the front loader.
question Movements in a direction parallel to the seat control
The button indicator light turns off. valve block 4 or 8, while movements in a direction
transverse to the seat control valve block 5 or 9.
DA 2.3.3.7. Activation button and indicator In order for the valve block to function, the hydraulic
light for valve block 2 (6) valve blocks must have been activated with switch
(1).
The functions are the same as the valve block 1
activation button (5). NOTE: In models equipped with reverse driving
equipment, turning the seat does not affect the
DA 2.3.3.8. Activation button and indicator operation of the switch.
light for valve block 3 (7)
DA 2.3.3.10. Change---over switch for valve
The functions are the same as the valve block 1 blocks 4 and 5/8 and 9 (9), extra equipment
activation button (5).
Use this switch (9) to change the auxiliary hydraulics
DA 2.3.3.9. One---lever control for two valve one---lever control (8) functions on the arm rest
either to the quick connectors (available as extra
blocks 4 and 5/8 and 9 (8) equipment) at the rear (valve blocks 4 and 5) or at
the front (valve blocks 8 and 9).
The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
valve blocks 4 and 5 activated and output directed
to the quick connectors at the rear.
The symbol side depressed = valve blocks 8 and 9
activated and output directed to the quick
connectors at the front (if front linkage is installed,
otherwise to a front loader, for example).

9
1

S DA 115

Functions of the valves 8 are 9 as extra equipment.

The change---over switch (9, extra equipment) can
be used in the side panel to activate either valve

---69--- D. Gauges and Controls

DA 2.3.3.11. Activation button and indicator DA 2.3.3.14. Change---over switch for valve
light for valve blocks 4/8 (10) blocks 6/10 (13)
The switch has two positions.
The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
valve block 6 (lever 12) functions directed to the
couplings at the rear of the tractor.
The symbol side depressed = the functions of the
auxiliary hydraulics (valve block 6, lever 12) are
changed over to the other output coupling. If the
tractor is equipped with a hydraulics towing hook,
this switch position can be used to control its lateral
movement with the valve block 6 control lever (12).
In other cases, other devices can be connected to
the change---over couplings. The couplings under
the tractor will be plugged in this case. If necessary,
contact authorised service personnel.

10 For more detailed instructions, see the Working

11 instructions on page 143.
S DA 82

The functions are the same as the valve block 1 DA 2.3.3.15.Activation button and indicator
activation button (5 on page 68). light for valve blocks 6/10 (14)

DA 2.3.3.12. Activation button and indicator

light for valve blocks 5/9 (11)
16
The functions are the same as the valve block 1
activation button (5 on page 68).
14
DA 2.3.3.13. Valve block 6/10 control
lever (12)

15
12
13
S DA 117

The functions are the same as the valve block 1

activation button (5 on page 68).

DA 2.3.3.16. Valve block 7 control lever (15)

The lever has three positions and both extreme
12 positions are spring---controlled.
13
S DA 116 In order for the switch to function, the hydraulic valve
blocks must have been activated (with switch 1).
The lever has three positions and both extreme
positions are spring---centred.
The change---over switch (13) next to it can be used
to activate either valve block 6 or 10, directing the
output to different couplings.
In order for the switch to function, the hydraulic valve
blocks must have been activated (with switch 1).
The properties of the auxiliary hydraulics valve
blocks can be adjusted on the tractor terminal
screen (for operating instructions see page 97).

D. Gauges and Controls ---70---

The properties of the auxiliary hydraulics valve DA 2.3.4. Other controls
blocks can be adjusted on the tractor terminal
screen (for operating instructions see page 97).
DA 2.3.4.1. Tractor terminal (1)

A
1

S DA 85

There are parallel---use buttons (A) on the left rear

mudguard, controlling the same valve. When, for
example, a hydraulic top link or levelling device is
connected to the connectors of this valve block, the S DA 87
buttons in the mudguard can be used when
attaching or detaching the implement.
When the buttons are used, output is only 30% of Instructions on the use of the tractor terminal can be
the flow that has been set. found at the end of this section, beginning on page
85.
DA 2.3.3.17. Activation button and indicator
light for valve block 7 (16) DA 2.3.4.2. Working lights, rotating
beacon (2)

16

15

S DA 118

The functions are the same as the valve block 1

activation button (5 on page 68).

S DA 88,1

The parking and headlamp switch in the instrument

panel must be at least in the parking light position in
order for working light switches to function.

---71--- D. Gauges and Controls

 1. Working lights and the rotating beacon
individually:
--- Turn on by pressing the symbol of the desired
light. When the lights are on, an indicator light is lit
in the corresponding symbol.
--- Turn off by pressing the symbol a second time.
the rear working lights are turned off.
Turning off the reverse mode
--- Press and hold down the one---dot rear working
light button (A) until a light is lit up on the button to
turn off the reverse mode.

With the rear working lights, pressing the symbol If the voltage drops the light switch panel
with one dot turns on the two innermost working automatically turns off the working lights in order.
lights, and pressing the symbol with two dots turns Only single working lights to the front and rear
off the four outermost working lights. The front remain lit.
working lights are connected in the opposite way.
DA 2.3.4.3. Fuses (3)
2. All working lights at once:
--- Turn on by pressing the ALL symbol. All working
lights and the rotating beacon will be lit one after
another
--- Turn off by pressing the OFF symbol.

3. OFF switch
--- All working lights that are on are turned off at once
by pressing the OFF symbol.

4. Memory function (M): 3

Storing in memory
--- First, turn on the desired lights and then press and
hold the M symbol until a red light comes on in the S DA 89
button and the setting is stored in the memory. The
lights stored in the memory remain turned on. The fuses are located behind the cover in the electric
power centre. The fuse amperages and functions
Using the memory are written on the inside of the cover. For more
--- The lights are turned off by pressing the OFF details on fuses, see the Checks and Adjustments
symbol section on page 186.
--- The lights stored in the memory are turned on by
pressing the M symbol for a short period. Indicator
DA 2.3.4.4. Power sockets, 2 units (4)
lights are lit up on the symbols for the lights turned
on and the M symbol.
A
Resetting the memory
--- Reset the memory by pressing and holding the M B
symbol with all lights turned off, until the setting is
stored in the memory.

5. Reverse mode of the innermost rear

working lights (A)

Turning on the reverse mode

--- Press and hold down the one---dot rear working
light button (A) until a light comes on in the button
(however the inner working lights do not
illuminate). The reverse mode is now on. If the
button is released quickly (under 2 seconds), the 4.1
rear working lights and the button symbol come 4.2
on. S DA 119
When the reverse driving direction is engaged, the
innermost rear working lights are also turned on. There are 2 power sockets behind the cover for
When the reverse driving direction is disengaged, various actuators, implements etc. Additionally, there

D. Gauges and Controls ---72---

is a computer connection under the cover for system DA 2.3.4.6. Positions for extra functions (6)
checks and adjustment (only for authorised service
personnel).
6

6
S DA 122
7
S DA 142

One of the power sockets (4.1) is of the following These positions are reserved for extra equipment
type. A similar power socket is also located at the functions.
rear of the tractor (C):
---3---pin power socket (type ISO/TR 12369)
DA 2.3.4.7. Storage compartment (7)
--- Pin A provides DC (5A) through the ignition switch A storage compartment for small items.
--- Pin B provides DC (25A) directly from the battery
--- The part number of the male connector is DA 2.3.4.8. Emergency brake (8), (extra
33615500 equipment)
The other power socket (4.2) is of the following type:
--- Round two---pin power socket. The socket
provides 12 V DC, max 10 A.
9
DA 2.3.4.5. Towing hook release switch (5)
(extra equipment)

8
S DA 93

If the tractor’s brake pedal malfunctions for some

reason, the emergency brakes can be operated by
pulling the hand lever. This will manually engage the
brakes on all wheels.

DA 2.3.4.9. Bracket (9)

S DA 121
Attachment point for the controls of auxiliary
implements. There is a hatch at the rear of the cab
The towing hook lock can be released with this
through which control cables can be fed.
switch when the linkage is at its highest position (for
operating instructions, see the Extra equipment
section in Chapter K on page 217).

---73--- D. Gauges and Controls

 1. Side pillar mounting holes mounting extra equipment and brackets. There are
two mounting holes at the front side of the pillar (A)
and two mounting holes (B) at the rear.

A B

A B

S DA 94

There are 4 plugged holes with 8---mm threads for

DA 2.4. Left---side controls

DA 2.4.1. Extra seat (1) DA 2.4.2. Safety belt (2)
There is a recoil safety belt for the passenger.
Check, that the safety belt does not get caught in the
door.
7

DA 2.4.3. Ashtray (3)

4
6 The ashtray can be removed for emptying.

5 DA 2.4.4. Cigarette lighter (4)

2 This can also be used as a power socket.

DA 2.4.5. Storage compartment (5)

When the cab is cooled by the air conditioning, the
storage compartment is also cooled.

DA 2.4.6. Storage space for bottles (6)

3
When the cab is cooled by the air conditioning, the
bottle storage space is also cooled. Regular
1/2---liter bottles fit in the holes.
2
1
S DA 95 Hammer, for breaking the
DA 2.4.7.
window in emergencies (7)
While the tractor is being driven, any passenger
must sit in the extra seat provided. The door must In an emergency, if exiting through the door is
without exception be closed. impossible, the hammer can be used to break the
The front of this seat can be turned down when it is window.
not in use.

D. Gauges and Controls ---74---

 DA 2.5. Rear controls
Reverse driving equipment DA 2.5.3. Brake pedals (3)
Reverse driving equipment is extra equipment. The same instructions apply to the reverse driving
equipment brake pedals as to the forward driving
The reverse driving equipment will not work when
brake pedals (see page 39).
driving forward and neither vice versa, because
there is a cut---off switch in the swivel seat. If the
cut---off switch does not work, check the fuse. DA 2.5.4. Brake pedal latch (4)
NOTE: Always make sure that the steering and The brake pedals can be connected to each other
brakes (also other controls) function perfectly with this latch.
when changing working direction.
DA 2.5.5. Accelerator pedal (5)
When the seat is turned 180° to the reverse driving
position, the right---side arm rest and its controls turn The same instructions apply to the reverse driving
with the seat. equipment accelerator pedal as to the forward
NOTE: The reverse driving equipment must be driving accelerator pedal (see page 39).
kept in the transport position when the seat is
turned forward. DA 2.5.6. Steering wheel distance
CAUTION: Driving on the road is not permitted lock (6)
when using the reverse driving equipment. The
maximum allowed driving speed with the reverse Press down the lock to adjust the position of the
driving equipment is 20 kph. entire steering column.

DA 2.5.1. Steering wheel (1) DA 2.5.7. Steering wheel angle lock (7)
Pull the lever to adjust the angle of the steering
1 wheel.
CAUTION: Do not adjust the position of
the steering wheel during driving –
there is a risk of an accident.
7

DA 2.5.8. Power shuttle and parking

brake lever (8)
4

8
5
8
2 6 3
S DA 96

The same instructions apply to the reverse steering

wheel as to the forward steering wheel (see
page 40).
The steering wheel for the reverse driving equipment 9
does not work when driving forward and vice versa
S DA 97
due to a cut---off switch. If the cut---off switch does
not work, check the fuse.
The lever functions in the same way as the
corresponding lever at the front, see section 3 on
DA 2.5.2. Drive clutch pedal (2) page 40.
The same instructions apply to the reverse driving
equipment clutch pedal as to the forward driving
clutch pedal (see page 39).

---75--- D. Gauges and Controls

NOTE: Using the rear controls: Before turning the DA 2.5.11. Reverse driving equipment
seat to the backwards position the front shuttle
lever has always to be moved to the parking
display (11)
brake position (position P). After this the seat can The display is located on the right side of the reverse
be turned and the rear controls can be activated steering wheel in the cab pillar.
using the rear shuttle lever by moving the
parking brake on and off. If the parking brake DA 2.5.11.1. Fixed displays
lever was already in the on position it must be
released.

Using the front controls: Before turning the seat

to the forwards position the rear shuttle lever has
always to be moved to the parking brake position
(position P). After this the seat can be turned and
the front controls can be activated using the front
shuttle lever by moving the parking brake on and
off. If the parking brake lever was already in the
on position it must be released.
If the front shuttle lever is in the F position, the
parking brake can not be engaged with the other 11.1 S DA 99 11.2
lever.

1. Fuel gauge 11.1

DA 2.5.9. Powershift
pre---programming/pre---programing The dashes in the vertical beam indicate the fuel
switch (9) level.

The switch functions in the same way as the 2. Temperature gauge 11.2
corresponding switch at the front, see section 4 on
page 42. The dashes in the vertical beam indicate the engine
temperature.

DA 2.5.10. Display (10) The light N area is the normal running temperature
range.
Stop the engine if the temperature rises into the
dark area. The Stop light will also then start blinking
(see section 11.4).
10
3. Driving direction and power shuttle
display 11.3

11.3 11.4
S DA 98

The rear pillar display for the reverse driving

equipment has the same functions as the front pillar
display, see section 5 on page 42.

S DA 100

The functions of the tractor symbol, driving direction

arrows and the neutral N symbol are the same as in
the power shuttle section of the side pillar display on
page 42.

D. Gauges and Controls ---76---

 4. STOP 11.4 DA 2.5.12. Display change---over
If the STOP symbol starts blinking, the tractor switch (12)
must immediately be stopped and the engine
must be shut down. Driving can be continued for
a short period only in an emergency, for example
to move the tractor to the side of the road. 13 12

The function of the STOP symbol is the same as the

Stop indicator light on the front instrument panel on
page 46.

5. Engine running speed 11.5

S DA 102,1

Press the symbol side of the display change---over

switch to display one of the following in the middle
section of the reverse driving display:
---engine running speed symbol
---rear PTO speed symbol
--- driving speed symbol

11.5 11.6 11.7 The numerical value of the selected function is

12
S DA 101
Select the engine running speed symbol on the
display by pressing the symbol side of the display
change---over switch (12). The engine running
speed is then displayed in the middle section of the
display when the engine is running.
displayed in the middle of the display.
DA 2.5.13. STOP (13)
If the STOP symbol starts blinking, the tractor
must immediately be stopped and the engine
must be shut down. Driving can be continued for
a short period only in an emergency, for example
to move the tractor to the side of the road.
The function of the STOP symbol is the same as the
Stop indicator light on the front instrument panel on
page 46.

6. Rear PTO speed 11.6

Select the rear PTO speed symbol on the display by
pressing the symbol side of the display
change---over switch (12). The rear PTO speed is
then displayed in the middle section of the display
when the shaft is rotating.

7. Driving speed 11.7

Select the driving speed symbol on the display by
pressing the symbol side of the display
change---over switch (12). The driving speed is then
displayed in the middle section of the display when
the tractor is moving.

---77--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DA 2.6. Overhead panel controls in the front
DA 2.6.1. Air nozzles (1) desired directions. Turning the air flow to the window
surfaces improves defrosting and dehumidification
of the windows. Additionally, there are two fixed air
3 nozzles for both the front and rear windscreens.

DA 2.6.2. Visor (2)

1 1 Pull the visor down to protect from glare, pull the
cord (2a) to return it back up. A corresponding visor
can also be found for the rear windscreen.

DA 2.6.3. Recirculated air filter (3)

2
behind the grille
2a
S DA 103
When the air inside the cab is recirculated, it is
There are a total of 6 adjustable air nozzles in the filtered through the filter behind the grille.
upper part of the cab. These can be turned to the

DA 2.7. Overhead panel controls on the right

DA 2.7.1. External mirror control (1) DA 2.7.2. Rear windscreen wiper (2)
The switch has three positions.
The opposite side to the symbol depressed:
Windscreen wiper off.
4 Middle position: Dizzle setting
2 3 The symbol side depressed: Windscreen wiper on.

1
DA 2.7.3. Rear windscreen washer (3)
The switch has two positions and is
spring---controlled.
When depressing the spring---controlled side of the
5 symbol the windscreen washer is on.
Simultaneously the windscreen wiper is working, but
stops with delay, when the switch is released.

DA 2.7.4. Radio (4) (extra equipment)

The radio has a separate user’s guide.

DA 2.7.5. Control panel lighting (5)

1
S DA 104 When either the parking lights or the headlamps are
turned on, the control panel lighting is also turned
When the knob is turned to the left, the knob will on.
control the left mirror, and when the knob is turned
to the right it controls the right mirror.
Adjust the mirrors by pushing the knob to the
directions pointed by the arrows.

D. Gauges and Controls ---78---

 DA 2.8. Overhead panel controls on the left
DA 2.8.1. Footwell blower (1)
(two speeds)
1 6
2 3 4 5
S DA 105
Use the blower to blow air into the footwell.
DA 2.8.2. Re---circulated air switch (2)
Use this switch to recirculate the air inside the cab.
However, some of the air is drawn in from the
outside.
The symbol side depressed = re---circulation is
on. This has the following benefits:
--- The cab warms faster when the heater is on
--- The air is warmed faster when the heater is on
--- The air is cooled faster when the air conditioning is
on
The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
re---circulation is off. This has the following
benefits:
--- Better window dehumidification (reduces
humidity/frosting on the windows)
--- Higher pressure in the cab (reduces the amount of
dust)
DA 2.8.3. Heater/air conditioning main
switch (3)
This switch is the main switch of the heater and air
conditioning. The switch can be used to turn the
devices on and off at once.
The symbol side depressed = main switch on, the
heater and the air conditioning can be used.
The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
main switch off.
---79---
DA 2.8.4. Heater/air conditioning
switch (4)
4 5 6 7
S DA 106
The switch has four positions. It has the following
functions:
Heater/air conditioning automatic position.
When the switch is in this position, the
heater and the air conditioning work
automatically to maintain the temperature
set by the temperature control (5).
This position controls the system function as follows:
Footwell blower (1)
ON, if the outside temperature is under 8˚C
OFF, if the outside temperature is over 10˚C
Roof blower (6) --- the rotation speed is in accor-
dance with the control
Temperature control (5) --- is in accordance with the
control position
Air conditioning
ON, if the roof blower (6) is on and the outside
temperature is over 10˚C
OFF, if the roof blower (6) is off or the outside tem-
perature is under 8˚C or turned off by the defros-
ting (on, if the matrix temperature is over 0˚C and
off, if the temperature is under ---2˚C).
Air conditioning manual control position.
This position controls the system function as follows:
Footwell blower (1) --- OFF
Roof blower (6) --- the rotation speed is in accor-
dance with the control
Temperature control (5) --- closed
Air conditioning
ON, if the inside temperature is at least 2˚C over
the temperature set, the roof blower is on and the
outside temperature is over 10˚C
OFF, if the inside temperature is at least 2˚C un-
der the temperature set, the roof blower is off or
the outside temperature is under 8˚C or turned off
by the defrosting (on, if the matrix temperature is
over 0˚C and off, if the temperature is un-
der---2˚C).
D. Gauges and Controls
 Heater manual control position. DA 2.8.7. External mirror heating (7)
The switch has two positions.
This position controls the system function as follows: The symbol side depressed = External mirror
Footwell blower (1) --- ON heating is on.
Roof blower (6) --- the rotation speed is in accor- The opposite side to the symbol depressed =
dance with the control External mirror heating is off.
Temperature control (5) --- is in accordance with the
control position
Air conditioning --- OFF
DA 2.8.8. Control panel lighting (8)

Defrosting position.

This position controls the system function as follows: 9

Footwell blower (1) --- OFF
Roof blower (6) --- with MAX speed
Temperature control (5) ---wide open
Air conditioning --- ON or OFF in accordance with
the defrosting of the matrix and outside tempera-
ture.
DA 2.8.5. Temperature control (5)
Use the gradual temperature control to select the
desired temperature. Maximum cooling and
maximum heating form the extremes of the
adjustment range.
DA 2.8.6. Roof blower control (6)
Use the roof blower to control the air flow gradually
by the overhead air nozzles.
8
S DA 107
When the parking lights and the headlamps are
turned on, the control panel lighting is also turned
on.
DA 2.8.9. Cab lighting (9)
The interior light switch on the left has three
positions. The switch has the following positions:
--- Left position = lights off
--- Middle position = door position. In the door
position the lighting for the step is also on. This
position has also a delay time, when the lights will
illuminate for a while after closing the door.
---Right position = light on

D. Gauges and Controls ---80---

 DA 2.9. Seat

12

11
7
10

8
9
3
6

1 5

4
2

13
S DA 12,1

CAUTION: Do not adjust the seat during driving. an upright position.

There is a risk of an accident!
The seat can be adjusted as follows: Height and weight
DA 2.9.4.
adjustment (4)
DA 2.9.1.Forward/backward
adjustment (1) Adjusting the suspension according to
the operator’s weight
Lift the seat lever and move the seat forward or
backward. Touch the adjustment lever lightly, and when the
compressor starts, release the lever (do not pull
DA 2.9.2. Lateral movement lock (2) continuously). The compressor will run until the
suspension has been adjusted to fit the operator’s
Lateral movement on = lever in the forward position weight. If the operator weights less than the previous
operator who sat on the seat, the compressor will
Lateral movement off = lever in the back position run only for a short while, as excess pressure is
released from the suspension and the seat is slightly
DA 2.9.3. Rotation lock lever (3) lowered.

Pull the lever up to release the lock, allowing the
seat to be turned 190° to the left and 90° to the right
as necessary. The seat has intermediate positions
that can be locked, in the forward driving position at
10°, 20° and 30° to both left and right, and in the
reverse driving position at 10° to both left and right.
The suspension adjustment according to the
operator’s weight remains in the ”memory” of the
seat even if the power is turned off from the tractor.
This is easy to test by touching the lever lightly after
the power has been turned on, making the seat
readjust itself to the middle point of the height range.

NOTE: Turn the seat carefully, because at some
settings, the arm rest may come into contact with
the side panel, the gear shift lever or the steering
wheel. If necessary, the arm rest can be lifted to
The suspension travel of the seat is 100 mm (± 50
mm) regardless of its height position. The
suspension travel is limited to 100 mm for safety
reasons. Longer travel might make controlling the
tractor more difficult (feet might not reach the

---81--- D. Gauges and Controls

pedals). DA 2.9.7. Left arm rest angle
adjustment (7)
Height adjustment is 80 mm
Adjust the angle of the arm rest by turning the
The seat features a smooth 80 mm height handwheel. The arm rest can also be turned up.
adjustment (±40 mm from the middle point of the
seat height range). Adjust the seat by pulling the
height adjustment lever until the desired height is Right arm rest height and
DA 2.9.8.
reached (the compressor will run all the time). position locking lever (8)
Immediately the lever is released, the compressor
stops and the seat remains at that height. However, Open the locking to adjust the arm rest height to two
if the seat has been lifted ”over the top”, meaning different levels, or gradually adjust the arm rest
that there is no longer a minimum of 50 mm upward position forward or backward. The arm rest can also
“play”, the seat will automatically drop to the highest be turned sideways and lifted completely up.
possible position.
Push the same lever down to lower the seat. If an DA 2.9.9. Right arm rest angle
attempt is made to adjust the seat below the lower adjustment (9)
limit (less than 50 mm downward “play”), the seat
rises to the lower limit the next time the lever is Turn the adjuster to change the arm rest angle.
touched (the compressor starts and runs
automatically until the seat has risen to the lower DA 2.9.10. Safety belt (10)
limit).
The seat features a lap safety belt.
If the operator has sat very still during adjustment, it
may sometimes happen that the previous height
position has remained in the memory and the seat DA 2.9.11. Seat heater (11)
rises to the previous position.
The seat heater switch is located on the left side of
When the seat is locked to a new height, a small the backrest.
click can be heard to indicate it, especially if there is
movement on the seat.
DA 2.9.12. Backrest (12)
DA 2.9.5. Backrest tilt (5) The height of the upper part of the backrest can be
adjusted. If necessary it can be removed completely.
Pull the handle to tilt the backrest.
DA 2.9.13. Storage space (13)
DA 2.9.6. Lumbar support adjustment (6)
There is storage space under the seat, for example
Turn the knob to adjust the lumbar support. for the user’s guide.

D. Gauges and Controls ---82---

 DA 2.10. Controls outside the cab
DA 2.10.1. Rear mudguard buttons Auxiliary hydraulics valve block (valve
block 7) control (3)
Rear linkage lift/lower buttons (1) Only on the left mudguard.
There are parallel buttons (3) for valve block 7 on the
rear mudguards. The valve block can also be
controlled by the switch on the right---side control
panel in the cab (switch DA 2.3.3.15 on page 70 ).
When, for example, a hydraulic top link or levelling
device is connected to the coupling of this valve
3 block, the buttons on the mudguard can be used
when attaching or detaching the implement.

DA 2.10.2. Front linkage buttons, extra

equipment

1 1 2 3 Front linkage lift/lower buttons (1) extra

S DA 13 equipment

There are push buttons on the rear mudguards that

can be used to lift and lower the lower links, for
example when attaching an implement. The lower
links rise and lower as long as the buttons are
pushed.
After the push buttons have been used, the position
control must be activated with the lift/stop/lower
switch (see instructions on page 62).
CAUTION: The lifting height adjustment does not
limit lifting when the push buttons are used.
The position sensor located on the lower link axle
will not limit the lifting height. Instead, the pistons
move to their extreme positions when the buttons
are pushed.

Rear PTO button (2)

The PTO buttons in the mudguards work, if the rear
PTO activation switch (switch 2.1 on page 64) on the 1
right---side control panel is in the “on” position:

Starting
--- The PTO starts when the push button is pressed
for a period of at least 3 seconds before releasing
(engaging begins after 0.5 seconds). If pressing
the button is stopped during the 3 secs, the PTO
stops.
Stopping
--- Press the push button a second time.
For more details on using the push buttons in the
mudguards, see page 64 and the internal PTO
switch instructions.
2
S DA 14
There are buttons at the front of the tractor that can
be used to lift and lower the lifting links, for example
when attaching an implement.
NOTE: The lifting links rise and lower only about
10 cm at a time for safety reasons.
After the push buttons have been used, the position
control must be activated with the lift/stop/lower
switch (see instructions on page 65).
CAUTION: Lifting height adjustment does not
limit lifting when the push buttons are used.

---83--- D. Gauges and Controls

 Front PTO button (2) extra equipment
The PTO button at the front works, if the front PTO
activation switch (switch 4.1 on page 66) on the
right---side control panel in the cab is in the “on”
position:

Starting
--- The PTO starts when the push button is pressed
for a period of at least 3 seconds before releasing
(engaging begins after 0.5 seconds). If pressing
the button is stopped during the 3 secs, the PTO
stops.

Stopping
---Press the push button a second time.

D. Gauges and Controls ---84---

 DB. Tractor terminal
S DB 1
Although the tractor features a great many more
functions, with the redesign of the tractor terminal it
has been possible to significantly reduce the
number of control buttons in the tractor.
Because the tractor terminal has a clear display and
only a couple of control buttons, it is easy to adjust
and visualise the functions of the tractor.
Additionally, because of the adjustment to the
electrics, there are a lot of new features in the
adjustment of the hydraulic valves, making it
possible for operators to adjust the valve operations
to suit all applications.
If the tractor terminal is out of use due to a malfunc-
tion and the power is shut off, all valve block flow
settings and the lifting and lowering speeds of the
linkages are at their maximum. This must be taken
into account when operating the actuators until the
malfunction is repaired.

DB 1. Tractor terminal control buttons

Control knob (2)
2 Once the desired menu has been selected
1
with the arrow buttons (1), the value can be
adjusted by turning the control knob.
Also in the list on the display you can move
up and down by turning the control knob.
When writing In the implement settings the
4 numbers and letters can be selected by
5 turning the control knob.
1 3
Accept/access next level
downwards button (3)
Use this button to access the next level
6 downwards in the menu.
In some functions, this button can be used
to turn a function on (accept) or off.
S DB 2
Quick search (display selected
page) (4)
Arrow buttons for moving on the
This button can be used to open the desired
screen (1) menu direct from the basic page (the menus
The arrow buttons can be used to move to where the adjustments and settings can be
the desired menu. done). The previous display can be returned
to by, pressing the Quick search button a
second time.
The saving is done by opening the desired
menu and pressing the Quick search button
until the text QUICK PAGE STORED is
displayed on the screen.

---85--- D. Gauges and Controls

The following menus can be saved to open with Implement settings
quick search:

Return to next level upwards

Basic page button (5)
The button in question stores five earlier
screens. After which, by pressing this button
Front linkage the screen brightness and shutdown timer
setting can be reset.

Rear linkage Terminal screen (6)

All necessary functions are displayed and adjusted
Auxiliary hydraulics using the screen. When the tractor is started after
power has been turned off, the screen resets back
to the basic mode.
Settings If the battery voltage decreases under 10 V or inc-
reases over 15,5 V the display does not operate
correctly any more.
Service menu

DB 2. Adjusting the tractor terminal screen brightness

S DB 57 S DB 58

Press the Return to Upper Level button until the When the AUTOMATIC selection is on, the display
screen brightness and shutdown timer setting is brightness returns to the value adjusted in the fac-
displayed on the screen. tory when pressing the buttons. When the buttons
are not pressed for approximately 10 seconds the
Use the arrow keys to select the screen brightness
display dims to the adjusted value.
setting and use he Accept button to select either
MANUAL or AUTOMATIC.
The desired screen brightness can be adjusted with
the control knob by selecting MANUAL. The bright-
ness stays constant.

D. Gauges and Controls ---86---

 DB 3. Shutting down the tractor terminal
When power is turned off from the tractor, the
tractor terminal is also shut down.
DB 3.1. Setting the shutdown timer
S DB 3
Press the Return to Upper Level button until the
screen brightness and shutdown timer setting is
displayed on the screen.
Use the arrow keys to select the shutdown timer
setting = SHUTDOWN and set the screen shut-
down timer.
The shutdown timer can be set from 1 seconds to
7 days. The timing intervals are smaller at the
beginning and greater later.
When power is turned off, the terminal screen is
turned off even though the terminal itself remains
on.
When the shutdown time is so short that also the
terminal shuts down there is a delay time (ca. 20 s)
in restart e.g. the linkages do not start to operate.
To avoid this delay it is recommended to set the
terminal shutdown timer e.g. to 1 day (1 DAY), then
the short breaks during the working day do not cau-
se operation delay when starting. Longer shutdown
times (several days) discharge the battery slightly.
Please, note this, especially when starting in cold
weather.
When shutting down the tractor terminal a short
beep can be heard.
The basic display can be returned to, by
pressing the Return to Upper Level button.
NOTE: If the battery cables are disconnected
from the tractor, the tractor terminal must be
shutdown (1 s = SHUTDOWN 1 SEC), before
disconnecting the cables.

DB 4. Display menus (functions) introduction

1 The operator can adjust the functions of the
2 following actuators to their liking:
4
Front linkage (more details beginning on
page 89), extra equipment

Rear linkage (more details beginning on

page 92)

Auxiliary hydraulics (more details

3
beginning on page 97)

DB 4.2. Other settings (2)

From the setting menu the operator can
make the following settings, more details beginning
5 4 on page 104.:
S DB 4,1
---Implement width
The terminal starts up when power is turned on. A ---Service code appearing on the screen, on/off
couple of seconds after power has been turned on, ---Travel distance resetting
the display enters a basic mode. It displays the
following function symbols: ---Worked area resetting
---Activating /deactivating the front linkage imple-
ment sensor (= external sensor, implemented)
DB 4.1. Setting the functions (1) ---Activating /deactivating the rear linkage imple-
ment sensor (= external sensor, implemented)
More details beginning on page 89.

---87--- D. Gauges and Controls

 Functions that can be selected
DB 4.3.
to be displayed, middle section (3)
More details beginning on page 106.
4 different functions can be displayed
simultaneously in the middle section of the screen.
The adjustments and the operation of the tractor
can be monitored with them.
Selection can be made from the following functions:
---Engine running speed display
---Engine torque
---Engine cooling system temperature
---Driving speed, km/h
---Driving speed, miles/h
---Working speed ha/h
---Transmission oil temperature
---Front linkage status (if installed)
---Rear linkage status
---Hydraulic oil temperature
---Auxiliary hydraulics blocks adjustments
---Running speed display front PTO (if installed)
---Running speed display rear PTO
---Travel distance km, resetting travel distance in
“Settings” on page 105
---Travel distance mile, resetting travel distance in
“Settings” on page 105
---Worked surface area, ha/acre, resetting surface
area in “Settings” on page 105
---Wheel slip percentage display
---Outside temperature
---Battery voltage
DB 4.4. Operations belonging to
service (4)
More details beginning on page 107.
Service menu
The following devices can be calibrated:
---Clutch pedals
---Control levers for auxiliary hydraulics valve blocks
---Linkages position control knobs
---Accelerator pedals
---Speed sensors
More details beginning on page 108.
Active service code
From this menu the active (on) service co-
des in the tractor can be seen, more details
beginning on page 110.
Service code history
All in tractor service codes with contents can
be seen from the service code history. This
function is meant mainly for authorised ser-
vice personnel use. More details beginning
on page 112.
DB 4.5. Implement settings (5)
More details beginning on page 113.
Implement settings functions
---creating folders, renaming folders and deleting
folders
---saving settings, introduction, renaming, deleting
files, comments
---recycle bin
DEFAULT The name of the settings in
use

The service menu has the following operations:

Tractor information, see page 107

Calibrations, see the page 108

Calibrations, more details, see the

page 108

D. Gauges and Controls ---88---

 DB 5. Settings of the functions

DB 5.1. Front linkage settings

The front linkage is available as extra equipment. If
the front linkage is not implemented, the menu will
be empty.
The adjustable range is 1---10. The selected lower-
ing speed value is displayed at the bottom of the
bar. When heavy implements are used, a slow
lowering speed should be used. The lowering
speed is independent of load.

DB 5.1.2. Adjusting the transport height

S DB 5

Set the display to the basic mode: and select the

settings of the front linkage, press the Accept
button.
S DB 8

Activate the transport height of the front

linkage settings.
Adjust the suitable transport height.
The adjustable range is 1---10. The selected
transport height value is displayed at the bottom of
the bar.
This setting limits the lifting height when either the
position control knob or the lift/stop/lower switch is
used for lifting. The lifting height can be limited if,
S DB 6
for example, there is a danger of the implement
coming into contact with the front of the tractor, etc.
The Front linkage settings are displayed.
CAUTION: The setting will not limit the lifting
height when the buttons at the front of the tractor
DB 5.1.1. Adjusting the lowering speed are used.

DB 5.1.3. Working space adjustments

Activate the lowering speed
kage settings.
Adjust the suitable lowering speed.
In the working space (lower position) the front
linkage can be adjusted as follows:
---position control
---mixing control (mixed) pressure---/position control
(extra equipment)
---mixing control (mixed) implement
sensor---/position control
Position control (P) can be activated even if any of
S DB 7 the above settings are selected and seen in screen.
If there are no sensors as extra equippemnt, the
of the front lin- front linkage is equipped only with position control.
Only one of the adjustment functions above can be
activated./selected.

---89--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DB 5.1.3.1. Position control
S DB 9
Activate the working space adjustments of
the front linkage setting.
S DB 10
Use the control knob to adjust the bar height to 0.
The letter P = position control will then be
displayed at the bottom of the adjustment range.
S DB 189
If the tractor is not equipped with implement pres-
sure sensors or they are not in use, the tractor is
equipped only with position control (control bar is
missing).
The front linkage equipped with the position control
follows the position control knob position set in the
lift/stop/lower switch lower position.
D. Gauges and Controls
DB 5.1.3.2. Pressure control
S DB 11
The pressure control is available as extra
equipment. The function must be activated and the
pressure sensor adjusted by the authorizied Service
Agent, before its menu is displayed.
Activate the working space adjustments of
the front linkage setting.
Press the Accept button, until the symbol
of the pressure control in the second highest block
appears.
The lowest value P is also in the adjustment of the
pressure control sensor, only the position control or
the linkage height follows the position control knob
position set in the lift/stop/lower switch lower
position.
Adjust the pressure control bar value to 1-- 10 =
pressure control range. The value is displayed at
the bottom of the bar.
In the pressure control range the front linkage lifting
links pressure is reduced according to the mixing
ratio of the linkage position and pressure control
as follows:
1 = linkage position has large effect and pressure
small effect
.
.
.
4 = linkage position has small effect and pressure
large effect
5 = linkage position has no effect at all, pressure
has full effect
5 > 10 the influence on pressure change is
intensified
10 = the pressure influence increases the sensitivity
of the position control
If the linkage is jerking, reduce the pressure control
value.
---90---
DB 5.1.3.3. Adjusting the implement sensor
If the implement has been fitted or will be fitted
afterwards with a suitable sensor, this knowledge
can be used when adjusting the linkage. E.g. the
implement can be adjusted to move to the desired
height even in jerky circumstances
The implement sensor (extra equipment) will be
selected from SET menu (see page 105), before the
menu will be seen on screen. NOTE: The
implement sensor must be connected.
S DB 190
Activate the working space adjustments of
the front linkage settings
Press the Accept button, until the symbol
of the implement sensor adjustment in the second
highest block appears.
NOTE: In case the adjustment of the implement
sensor will be introduced without connecting the
sensor, the linkage will be locked. The linkage
control assumes that the sensor is broken and
the error code will appear. (With position control
this is not happening (mixing ratio = P)).
The lowest value P is also in the adjustment of the
implement sensor, only the position control or the
linkage height follows the position control knob
position set in the lift/stop/lower switch lower
position.
Adjust the implement sensor bar value 1-- 10 =
implement sensor, The value is displayed at the
bottom of the bar.
---91---
The working depth of the linkage affects to the
mixing ratio of the linkage position and implement
sensor adjustment as follows:
1 = linkage position has large effect, implement
sensor adjustment small effect
.
.
.
9 = linkage position has small effect, implement
sensor adjustment large effect
10 = implement sensor adjustment effect 100 %
The implement sensor part number is 34321900 or
33082900.
DB 5.1.4. Adjusting the lifting speed
S DB 14
Activate the lifting speed adjustment of the
front linkage setting.
Adjust the suitable lifting speed (eg. 5).
The adjustable range is 1---10. The selected lifting
speed value is displayed at the bottom of the bar.
When heavy implements are used, a slow lifting
speed should be used. The slow lifting speed
makes the implement attaching easier when using
the inner controls.
Do not use unnecessarily high lifting speed,so that
in extra heavy conditions there will be enough
output/take off for other hydraulics, not too low
either, to avoid creeping.
D. Gauges and Controls
 DB 5.2.
Set the display to the basic mode and select the
settings of the rear linkage and press the Accept
button.
S DB 16
The Rear linkage settings are displayed.
DB 5.2.1. Adjusting the lowering speed
Activate the lowering speed adjustment
the rear linkage settings.
Adjust the suitable lowering speed.
The adjustable range is 1---10. The selected
lowering speed value is displayed at the bottom of
D. Gauges and Controls
Rear linkage settings
the bar. When heavy implements are used, a slow
lowering speed should be used. The lowering
speed is independent of load.
DB 5.2.2. Adjusting the transport height
S DB 15
S DB 18
Activate the transport height adjustment of
the rear linkage adjustments.
Adjust the suitable transport height.
The adjustable range is 1---10. The selected
transport height value is displayed at the bottom of
the bar.
This setting limits the lifting height when either the
position control knob or the lift/stop/lower switch is
used for lifting. The lifting height can be limited if,
for example, there is a danger of the implement
coming into contact with the cab of the tractor, etc.
CAUTION: The setting will not limit the lifting
height when the buttons on the rear mudguards
of the tractor are used.
DB 5.2.3. Working space adjustments
In the working space (lower position) the front
linkage can be adjusted as follows:
---position control
---mixing control (mixed) draft control/position
control
---mixing control (mixed) pressure---/position control
S DB 17
(extra equipment)
---mixing control (mixed) implement
sensor---/position control
of
Position control (P) can be activated even if any of
the above settings are selected and seen in screen.
Only one of the adjustment functions above can be
activated./selected.
---92---
 DB 5.2.3.1. Position control the rear linkage settings.

Press the Accept button, until the symbol of

the draft control in the second highest block appe-
ars.
Use the control knob to adjust the control bar value
to 1-- 10 = draft control, the value is displayed at
the bottom of the bar.
The lowest value P is also in draft control, only the
position control or the linkage height follows the
position control knob position set in the lift/stop/
lower switch lower position.

S DB 19 The working depth of the linkage in the draft control

range affects to the mixing ratio of the position
and draft control as follows:
Activate the working space adjustments of
1 = linkage position has large effect and draft small
the rear linkage settings.
effect
Under the mixing control symbol there is always
.
either the draft control, pressure control (extra
.
equipment) or Implement sensor control (extra
.
equipment) symbol. When one of these is selected,
only the position control (P) can be set to on. 9 = linkage position has small effect and draft cont-
rol large effect
10 = draft effect 100 %
Always use the control knob to adjust the real
setting.
In the full draft control (mixing 10) the linkage will
lift if the the draft increases, and will lower if the
draft decreases.The higher draft will be reached by
turning the control knob lower (the linkage will
lower). When the mixing ratio will be decreased, the
linkage operates like position control and the draft
effect decreases.
S DB 20
DB 5.2.3.3. Pressure control
Use the control knob to adjust the bar height to 0.
The letter P = position control will then be dis- The pressure control sensor is available as extra
played at the bottom of the adjustment range. equipment.
The position control keeps the rear linkage in the Pressure control can be selected instead of draft or
lift/stop/lower switch lower position. implement sensor control.

DB 5.2.3.2. Draft control

S DB 23

S DB 21 Activate the working space adjustments of

the rear linkage.
Activate the working space adjustments of Press the Accept button, until in the second upper

---93--- D. Gauges and Controls

segment the symbol of pressure contol
appears.
Use the control knob to adjust the control bar value
to 1-- 10 = pressure control. The value is dis-
played at the bottom of the bar.
The lowest value P is also in pressure control, only
the position control or the linkage height follows the
position control knob position set in the lift/stop/
lower switch lower position.
Pressure control can be used to reduce the
pressure on the lower links of the linkage. This
reduces the ground pressure caused by the
implement.
In the pressure control range the rear linkage lifting
links pressure is reduced according to the mixing
ratio of the position control and pressure control
as follows:
1 = linkage position has large effect and pressure
small effect
. segment the symbol
.
. control appears.
4 = linkage position has small effect and pressure
large effect
5 = linkage position has no effect at all, pressure
has full effect
5 > 10 the influence on pressure change is intensi-
fied
10 = the pressure influence increases the sensitivity
of the position control
In the full pressure control (mixing 10) the linkage
will lift, if the pressure decreases in the lift cylinders
and will lower, if the pressure increases. Use the
control knob to adjust the accessible relief
pressure. When the pressure is set high, the
linkage will lift.
When the mixing ratio is decreased, the pressure
sensitivity control starts to decrease. If the mixing
ratio is still decreased the linkage operates
gradually like position control and the pressure
effect decreases.
If the linkage is in the pressure control jerking, re-
duce the mixing ratio.
just menu appears. NOTE: The implement sensor
has to be connected.
Implement sensor control can be selected instead
of draft or pressure control.
S DB 25
Activate the working space adjustments of
the rear linkage.
Press the Accept button, until in the second upper
of implement sensor
NOTE: When the implement sensor control will
be introduced without connecting the sensor, the
linkage will be locked. The linkage control will
interpret that the senosr is out of order and also
the error code will appear. (in position control
this will not happen (mixing ratio = P)).
The lowest value P is also in the implement sensor
control, only the position control or the linkage
height follows the position control knob position set
in the lift/stop/lower switch lower position.
Use the control knob to adjust the control bar value
to 1 -- 10 = implement sensor control, the value is
displayed at the bottom of the bar.
The implement sensor control affects the mixing
ratio of the linkage position and implement
sensor control as follows:
1 = linkage position has large effect and implement
sensor control small effect
.
.
.

DB 5.2.3.4. Implement sensor control 9 = linkage position has small effect and implement
sensor control large effect
The implement sensor is available as extra equip- 10 = implement sensor control effect 100 %
ment.
The implement sensor part number is 34321900 or
If the implement sensor has been fitted or will be 33082900.
fitted afterwards with a suitable sensor, this
knowledge can be used when adjusting the
linkage. E.g. the implement can be adjusted to
move to a desired height even in jerky
circumstances.
The implement sensor has to be introduced from
SET menu (more details page 106), before its ad-

D. Gauges and Controls ---94---

 DB 5.2.4. Slip control
The slip control operates only with the draft control.
The slip control affects only to the linkage function if
the wheel slip exceeds the set slip limit. If the wheel
slip is smaller than adjusted the linkage operates as
with ordinary draft control. The slip increase lifts the
linkage similarly as draft increase and the slip
decrease lowers the implement.
The slip control operates best at work by speed
over ca. 5km/h.
S DB 26
Activate the slip control adjustment of the
rear linkage.
S DB 27
Press the Accept button to get ON in the screen.
The adjustment range below is then displayed.
Use the control knob to set the desired slip limit (=
height of the adjustment bar), displayed at the
bottom of the bar. The adjustment range is 3---60 %.
Adjust first the linkage only with the draft control in
the dry part of the field. After that adjust the slip
control ca. 35 %. Switch the slip control on.If the
linkage vibrates, reduce the mixing ratio from 10.
The recommended mixing ratio with the slip contol
is 6---10 and the recommended slip control at least
20 %.
In very slippery circumstances or with small slip li-
mits the slip control orders the working depth. The
wheel slip stays adjusted and the implement is as
deep as it is possible without causing further slip-
ping. If the slip does not reduce under the selected
area, the linkage will lift the lifting arms finally all the
---95---
way up. Reducing of the mixing ratio from 10 dec-
reases the slip control effect.
Slip control is off when OFF is selected or position
control, pressure control or implement sensor
control is on (slip control menu is grey).
DB 5.2.4.1. Radar
S DB 193
The tractors equipped with the slip control have a
radar (under the cab on the right side), because
when all the wheels slip the real speed can only be
measured from the ground speed with the radar.
DANGER: DO NOT go under a tractor
equipped with a radar (slip control
models) until the ignition switch is
turned off. -- Danger to eyes.
The radar has an influence:
---on the slip control, by transferring the load signal
from the linkage to the wheels
---on the function of the automatics for the
differential locks
---on the function of the 4WD automatics
---on the calibration of the speed sensors (after
tyre/tire change)
If you doubt that the slip and 4WD automatics are
not working correctly, drive straight forward on the
firm ground. Then the instrumentation has to show
0---3 % slip.
DB 5.2.5. Drive Balance Control
Drive Balance Control is used to stabilise the driving
of the tractor when a heavy implement is attached
to three---point linkage. Driving the tractor will be
smoother and the load will cause less stress to the
tractor. The system operates only in the transport
position, when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lift
position.
Drive Balance Control is activated when a pre---set
limit speed is exceeded (can be set). The linkage
will then lower the lower links automatically approx.
4 % (indicated by the lowering indicator light). This
leaves sufficient play for the linkage in both
D. Gauges and Controls
directions. In order to have sufficient play, the
linkage must be lifted high enough.
When driving speed falls approx. 25 % below the
set value, Drive Balance Control is inactivated and
the linkage will lift the lower links to the starting
position (indicated by the lifting indicator light).
Activate Drive Balance Control in the following way:
S DB 28
Activate the drive balance control of the rear
linkage settings.
S DB 29
Press the Accept button to get ON in the screen.
The adjustment range below is then displayed.
Adjust a suitable limit speed for the Drive Balance
Control.
The setting range is 0---25 kph.
When the selected limit speed is exceeded with the
Drive Balance Control on, the Drive Balance Control
is activated.
If the limit speed is set to 0 kph, the Drive Balance
Control is activated immediately.
D. Gauges and Controls
DB 5.2.6. Adjusting the lifting speed
S DB 30
Select rear linkage settings on the display.
Part of the rear linkage adjustments is on the
following page. The arrow on the right down corner
indicates this.
Select the right hand display area and press further
the arrow to the right.
S DB 31
A new page is displayed. The lifting speed setting is
selected.
Use the control knob to select a suitable lifting
speed.
The adjustable range is 1---10. The selected lifting
speed value is displayed at the bottom of the bar.
When heavy implements are used, a slow lifting
speed should be used. Lifting speed is independent
of load. The slow lifting speed makes the implement
attaching easier when using the inner controls.
Do not use unnecessarily high lifting speed,so that
in extra heavy conditions there will be enough
output/take off for other hydraulics, not too low
either, to avoid creeping.
---96---
Returning other rear linkage settings to Press the left arrow key.
the screen

S DB 30

S DB 31
The page with the other rear linkage settings is
displayed.
Correspondingly the arrow on the left hand corner
is the sign, that the other adjustments are on the
former page.

DB 5.3. Settings of the auxiliary hydraulic valve blocks

Settings are made for all valve blocks in the same DB 5.3.1.2. Change ---over blocks 6 and 10
way.
Memory tips: --- port is away from the driver and +
port to the driver. The same rule concerns the ports
on terminal display in the valve settings.

DB 5.3.1. Change--- over blocks

DB 5.3.1.1. One ---lever control change ---over

blocks (4/8 and 5/9)

D C
S DB 35

In the same way, there is a control switch (C) for

valve block 6 on the right ---side control panel. The
change---over switch (D) can be used to change its
operation to the other output pair of couplings,
changing it to valve block 10.
If the tractor is equipped with towing hook with
A B hydraulic longitudinal movement then the output 10
S DB 34 is used for longitudinal movement.

The one-- lever control (A) on the right---side arm

rest is used to control valve blocks 4 and 5, the
output of which is directed to the rear connectors.
Use the change-- over switch (B) on the right---side
control panel to direct the output to the front
connectors (as extra equipment). The properties of
the same valve blocks can be adjusted individually,
which means that two additional valve blocks are
gained, valve blocks 8 and 9. Depending on the
selection, either valve blocks 4 and 5 (couplings at
the rear) or valve blocks 8 and 9 (couplings at the
front) are used.

---97--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DB 5.3.2. Displaying valve block basic
settings
S DB 36
Set the display to the basic mode and select the
settings for the auxiliary hydraulic and press the
Accept button.
S DB 37
The symbols of valve blocks 1-- 5 of the auxiliary
hydraulics are displayed at the top of the screen.
DB 5.3.2.1. Display valve 6---10
S DB 38
The adjustments of the valve blocks 6---10 are on
the second page. The arrow on the right hand
corner indicates this.
Use the arrow keys to select the right hand display
area (any block) and press further the arrow to the
right.
D. Gauges and Controls
S DB 39
The symbols of the 6---10 valve block are displayed
at the top of the screen.
The change---over switch D (see instructions at
section DB 5.3.1.2. on page 97) has been used to
select valve block 6 as active, which means that
valve block 10 is not in use and it is displayed as
grey.
In the same way, the change---over switch B (see
instructions at section DB 5.3.1.1. on page 97) has
been used to select valve blocks 4 and 5 as active
(they are displayed on the previous hydraulic
display page). Then the valve blocks 8 and 9 are
not in use and they are displayed as grey.
DB 5.3.2.2. Display valve 1---5
S DB 40
Use the arrow keys to select the left hand area (any
block) and press further the arrow to the left.
S DB 38
The symbols of the 1---5 valve block are displayed
at the top of the screen.
---98---
 DB 5.3.3. Valve block functions that can DB 5.3.3.2. Maximum flow adjustment
be adjusted
Properties that can be adjusted are always in effect
when the valve is used.

DB 5.3.3.1. Switching a valve block ON/OFF

Select the valve block basic settings on the
screen, (see instructions at section DB 5.3.2. on
page 98).

S DB 44

Select the valve block basic settings on the

S DB 42
Use the arrow keys to select the second uppermost
area under the valve block, which is required to be
switched ON or OFF (valve block 2 in the figure).
Use the Accept button to select either
= locked or
screen, (see instructions at section DB 5.3.2. on
page 98).
Both directions (= for both ports) of each valve
block control lever are marked with green ( -- ) and
blue (+). The corresponding colours and ---/+
marks are also shown on the screen in the bars
indicating maximum flow for both ports of the valve
blocks.
Use the arrow keys to select the flow bar of the
desired port of the desired valve block (green (---)
port of valve block 3 in the figure).

= valve available.

If a valve block is available, the flow adjustment

ranges of the valve block in question are displayed
beneath it and the valve block is available for use.

S DB 45

Use the control knob to select the desired flow

percentage (= bar height) of the maximum flow
(100 %). The flow rate can be selected between 1
and 100. The selected flow rate percentage is
displayed beside the bar.
The maximum flow of all ports of all valve blocks
S DB 43 can be adjusted in the same way.

If a valve is locked, there is nothing on the screen

below the valve block in question, and the valve
block is not available for use.

---99--- D. Gauges and Controls

 Progressive output, time of
DB 5.3.3.3.
output increase/decrease
S DB 46
Select the valve block basic settings on the
screen, (see instructions at section DB 5.3.2. on
page 98) and select the desired valve block and
press the Accept button.
S DB 47
The progressive adjustment of the display appears.
On the left upper corner the progressive symbol is
illuminated.
D. Gauges and Controls
1. Progressive output
S DB 49
Use the arrow keys to move to the desired port
(lever movement) adjustment of the progressive
output (in the figure green (---) port).
S DB 49,1
Use the control knob to adjust the curve, selecting
a numerical value between 1...16.
When the curve is linear (value 1), the output
increases linearly in relation to the lever movement.
When the curve is curved (values 2...16), the output
increases progressively in relation to the lever
movement.
The more curved the curve is, the less the output
increases with small lever movements. This is a
useful function when very accurate movements are
required. Correspondingly at the end of the lever
movement area the output increase is quick.
---100---
 2. Time of output increase/decrease DB 5.3.4. Valve block functions that can
be activated/adjusted
The functions that can be activated/adjusted can
only be used when they have been activated.

S DB 136

Use the arrow keys to select the symbol of time

output increase/decrease and the display of the
adjusting times will be opened. S DB 50

Select the valve block basic settings on the

screen, see instructions at section DB 5.3.2. on
page 98.
10 8
Use the arrow keys to select the desired valve block
function required to be activated, the area either at
the top of the green area or at the bottom of the
blue area (in the figure the green activating area of
the 2nd. valve block = ---port).
25 23 Use the control knob to select the function required
to be activated:

S DB 135
---Holding time of the position lock 1...60
---Position lock
Use the arrow keys to select the desired adjustment ---Output as a function of driving speed Q=f(v)
time of output increase/decrease. The adjustments
for time of output decrease for both ports are on the ---Floating position
left and for increase on the right side. ---Activation off
Use the control knob to select the suitable times of
the output increase/decrease.
The adjustment range of the time of output increa-
DB 5.3.4.1. Activating a valve block function
se/decrease is a percent between 0---4 seconds.
By adjusting the increase/decrease time e.g the 3a 2a 1a
speed changes of the working cylinder piston will
be smooth.
In working cylinder use the suitable adjusting times
are usually lower than 0,5 seconds. 1
In hydraulic motor use the adjustment times can be
in maximum = 4 seconds. In that case the rotation 3 2
of the hydraulic motor starts and stops smoothly.
WARNING: Do not use long
decreasing times. If a long decreasing
time has been selected for the valve,
the output cannot be stopped other
S DB 51
than by switching the ignation key into
the off -- position. NOTE: in that case
The selected function is activated by moving the
the tractor stops and the parking brake
lever of the valve block in question at least 75 % of
is engaged immediately.
the range of movement towards the set colour (=
port) and simultaneously pressing the
corresponding activation button.

---101--- D. Gauges and Controls

The figure displays the control levers of valve blocks
1, 2 and 3, and their activation buttons 1a, 2a
and 3a.
The activated function can be stopped by moving
the control lever in question or by pressing the
activation button again.
WARNING: During the automatic
function the position of the controls
does not implicate the state of action.
Always follow the behaviour of the
implement and ensure the S DB 52,1
disconnection of automation e.g. by
switching the hydraulics on/off switch
Use the control knob to adjust the holding time
in off -- position.
between 1 --- 60 seconds and press the Accept
When the automatic position is on, a small light at button.
the top of the activation button is lit. NOTE: All the
buttons are not as visible.

DB 5.3.4.2. Holding time of the position lock

S DB 52,2

When a function is activated (for instructions see

section DB 5.3.4.1. on page 101), the output stops
S DB 50 after the selected time (in the figure the 2nd. valve
block (---) port).
Select the clock symbol at the desired valve DB 5.3.4.3. Position lock
block port (for instructions see section DB 5.3.4. on
page 101) and press the Accept button.

S DB 53

S DB 52
Select the position lock symbol at the desired
Holding time of the position lock adjustment is valve block port (section DB 5.3.4. on page 101) =
displayed. holding time is unlimited.
When a function is activated (section DB 5.3.4.1. on
page 101), the valve block function will be
continuously on. This feature is useful for example
when using a hydraulic motor.

D. Gauges and Controls ---102---

 DB 5.3.4.4. Floating position
S DB 54
The floating position can only be selected on the
--- port of a valve block = the upper green ports on
the screen.
Select the floating position symbol at the
return side of the desired valve block (section
DB 5.3.4. on page 101).
When the function is activated (section DB 5.3.4.1.
on page 101), for example the piston rod can move
freely inside a cylinder, allowing for example an
implement to follow the ground level.
DB 5.3.4.5. Output as a function of driving
speed
S DB 55
Select the function symbol Q=f(v) at the desired
valve block port (section DB 5.3.4. on page 101)
and press the Accept button.
---103---
S DB 56
The output curve as a function of the driving speed
is displayed. The curve has four points, which can
be adjusted separately.
On the left upper corner of the adjusting display is
displayed the valve block number and the port --- or
+.
Further on the display there are the following
symbols, through which the curve form can be
adjusted:
P The adjusted point number from left to right 1...4
Q The output in question point 0---100% of
maximum output, which is set to the block port
in question
V The driving speed in question point as
percentage from 0---40 kph (0---25 mile/h)
Use the arrow keys to move up/down between
P/Q/V and change the values in points with the
control knob.
When driving speed adjustments are made, the
driving speed cannot be set below the speed of the
previous point or above the speed of the next point.
If this is attempted, the driving speeds of the points
in question begin tracking the driving speed point
being adjusted.
S DB 62
In the above figure, the green port output begins at
a speed of 3 kph.
After the last point (25 kph) the output stays at the
D. Gauges and Controls
same level though the driving speed increases. DB 5.3.4.6. De ---activating
When the function is activated (section DB 5.3.4.1.
on page 101), the output of the valve block port in
question depends on the driving speed according
to the curve. This function is useful for example
when a gritter operated with a hydraulic motor is
used.
WARNING: When this function is used
ensure when driving starts that the
automatic function is not on or not in
required settings.

Press the Accept button to reset to the main menu S DB 50

of auxiliary hydraulics.
Select the clock symbol to the desired valve
port (section DB 5.3.4. on page 101) and adjust the
holding time to 0 (section DB 5.3.4.2. on page 102).
The valve block port in question cannot then be
activated (section DB 5.3.4.1. on page 101).

DB 6. Other Settings (SET)

down the in Settings menu.
When setting use the arrow key to move always first
to right so that adjustable area will be changed to
yellow. After adjustments use the arrow keys to
return to left side settings menu.

DB 6.1. Implement width (MACHINE)

S DB 105

Set the display to the basic mode and select the

settings symbol , confirm the selection.

S DB 186

The implement width can be selected with this

S DB 155
The Settings (SET) menu is displayed.
Use the arrow keys or control knob to move up and
function. The area is measured by the tractor
terminal according to the width of the implement.
Select from SET menu MACHINE and adjust a
suitable implement width.
On the display:
IMPLEMENT MACHINE = implement machine
WIDTH = width

D. Gauges and Controls ---104---

 Service code that can be
DB 6.2.
selected to be displayed (ERROR)
S DB 156
The new service code can be selected with this
function to be shown or not on the display.
Select from SET menu ERROR and press the
Accept button to get either:
ACTIVE (active),the new service code will be disp-
layed
or
NOT ACTIVE (not activate), the new service code
will not be displayed.
The active service code, see page 110.
DB 6.3. Resetting the travel distance
(DISTANCE)
S DB 157
With this function the travel distance can be reset.
Select from SET menu DISTANCE and by pressing
the Accept button the travel distance is reset.
---105---
DB 6.4. Resetting the worked area
(AREA)
S DB 158
With this function the worked area can be reset.
Select from the SET menu AREA and by pressing
the Accept button the work area is reset.
DB 6.5. The implement sensor of the
front linkage (FRONT HITCH)
S DB 185
With this function the implement sensor of the front
linkage can be activated/deactivated.
Select from the SET menu FRONT HITCH (front
linkage) and press the Accept button to display on
the screen either:
IMPLEMENTED (implemented), and the implement
sensor is activated
or
NOT IMPLEMENTED (not implemented), and the
implement sensor is not activated
EXTERNAL SENSOR = external sensor
D. Gauges and Controls
 DB 6.6. The implement sensor of the
rear linkage (REAR HITCH)
linkage can be activated/deactivated.
Select from the SET menu REAR HITCH (rear
linkage)and press the Accept button to display on
the screen either IMPLEMENTED (implemented) or
NOT IMPLEMENTED (not implemented) similar to
the implement sensor of the front linkage above.

S DB 159

With this function the implement sensor of the rear

DB 7. Functions that can be selected to be displayed on the main

page (middle section of the screen)
4 different functions can be selected to be
displayed simultaneously in the middle section of
the screen. The desired settings and operations of
the tractor can be monitored with them.
Set the display to the basic mode:
Press the button on the right (the Return to
Upper Level button) until the display resets
to the basic mode. After power has been
turned on, the display will automatically
reset to the basic mode.
S DB 172

The following symbol menu will be displayed in the

middle of the screen with six menus at a time:

Engine running speed display

Engine torque

Engine cooling system temperature

Driving speed, kph

S DB 70
Driving speed, miles/h
Use the arrow keys to move one of the four display
areas of the middle section of the screen and con- Working speed ha/h
firm the selection.
Transmission oil temperature

Front linkage status (if mounted)

D. Gauges and Controls ---106---

 Rear linkage status Battery voltage

Hydraulic oil temperature Use the arrow keys to move to the desired space.
Select the space desired and confirm the selection.
Auxiliary
hydraulics
blocks
settings

per block

Running speed display front PTO, rpm

Running speed display rear PTO, rpm

Travel distance, km
S DB 192
Travel distance, mile
The selected function is moved to the selected area
Worked surface area, ha/acre
of the middle section of the screen.
Wheel slip percentage display If the function in question has already been
selected for some other area, nothing happens
Outside temperature when the Accept button is pressed. Another
function must then be selected to display.

DB 8. Operations relating to service

DB 8.1. Service menu

S DB 113 S DB 173

Set the display to the basic mode and select the The Service menus are displayed.
service menu, confirm the selection.

DB 8.1.1. Tractor information

From this menu will be found the tractor basic

information for authorised service personnel use.

---107--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DB 8.1.2. Calibrations DB 8.1.2.1. Calibrations in detail

S DB 174 S DB 191

Select from the service menu the symbol for the Select the Service menus on the display and select
calibration . from the top of the screen the picture
Then more calibration details will be displayed in
The Calibration menu is displayed. It has the
the screen.
following devices, which can be calibrated:
---F---CLUCTH PEDAL = front clutch pedal DB 8.1.2.2. The calibration of the front
---R---CLUTCH PEDAL = rear clutch pedal clutch pedal
---F---HITCH WHEEL = front linkage wheel (position
control) Select the calibrations from the screen F---CLUCTH
---R---HITCH WHEEL = rear linkage wheel (position PEDAL = the front clutch pedal and accept the
control) choice.
---SPEED SENSORS = speed sensors
The actuators above must be calibrated, if the func-
tion differs from normal.
The speed sensors have to be calibrated from time
to time because of the tyres/tires wearing and al-
ways, when changing tyres/tires.
0V 2.5V 5V
NOTE: Do not calibrate when the engine is
running, except when calibrating the speed
PEDAL: 1.25
sensors, which will be carried out when the
tractor is moving.
S DB 175
If the calibration is not carried out in time, there will
be displayed the text TIMEOUT = the time is out. There will be displayed e.g. the text PRESS
So the calibration must be activated anew by pres- CLUTCH PEDAL = press the clutch pedal.
sing the Accept button. Press down the clutch pedal gently. The setting of
Also if after calibration there will be displayed the the calibration is displayed on the screen bar.
text CALIBRATION FAILED = the calibration has
failed, the calibration must be carried out anew.

D. Gauges and Controls ---108---

 The calibration of the front
DB 8.1.2.4.
linkage position control knob
Select the calibrations from the screen F---HITCH
WHEEL and accept the choice.
CALIBRATION SUCCESSFUL
If the front linkages are not implemented, there will
be displayed the text NOT IMPLEMENTED = not
implemented.

S DB 177

When the calibration is carried out successfully,

there will be displayed the text CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL.

DB 8.1.2.3. The calibration of the rear clutch

pedal 5.95 V

Select the calibrations from the screen R---CLUTCH S DB 178

PEDAL = the rear clutch pedal and accept the
choice.
If the reverse driving equipment are not
implemented, in the screen will be displayed the
text NOT IMPLEMENTED = not implemented.
Turn the position control knob of the front linkage
gently from one extreme position to the other. The
calibration is displayed on the screen bar.
When the calibration is carried out successfully,
there will be displayed the text CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL.
The calibration can be stopped when pressing the
emergency switch (otherwise the calibration will
continue a long time).

The calibration of the rear

DB 8.1.2.5.
0V 2.5V 5V linkage position control knob
Select the calibrations from the calibrations screen
PEDAL: 2.25 R---HITCH WHEEL and accept the choice.

S DB 176

The calibration of the rear clutch pedal is carried out

in the same way as the front clutch pedal above.

S DB 179

The calibration of the rear linkage is carried out at

the same way as the front linkage above.

---109--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DB 8.1.2.6. The calibration of the speed SPEED SENSORS.
sensors The calibration must be carried out on even ground
(approx. 50 m) driving at a speed of approx. 5 kph.
Press the Accept button and the calibration will start
and there will be displayed the text CALIBRATING.
The instruction: start the tractor and move to the
suitable place. Use the arrow keys to move to the
right place for the calibration. Drive the tractor at
5 kph. When the tractor is running smooth, press
the Accept button. Keep up the speed until the
calibration has been carried out. (SUCCESFUL =
successful, FAILED = failed) After calibration
visually check that the driving speed is right
displayed in the speedometer.
S DB 182

NOTE: When calibrating the speed sensors

The speed sensors have to be calibrated from time on the wet asphalt or on the ice, the
to time because of the tyres/tires wearing and al-
ways, when changing tyres/tires.
calibration does not succeed properly. Try to
carry out the calibration on the dry ground.
Select the calibrations from the calibrations screen

DB 8.2. Active service code

When an active service code appears for the first
time, the service code symbol is displayed at
the bottom of the screen and the service code in
question is displayed with information in the middle
of the screen, if the service code opening is not
switched off, see instructions on page 105.
In the poor contact malfunctions the active service
code may disappear after power has been shut off.
When there are no active service codes, neither is
there a symbol visible at the bottom of the screen.
S DB 127
The service code is meant to help to limit the
possibility of mechanical damage to the equipment Set the display to the basic mode and select the
or dangerous situations. In certain cases one
control is removed from service but working can be active service code , confirm the selection.
continued with the other controls. In such cases
take extreme care. Carry out the repair of damaged
equipment without delay.

DB 8.2.1.Active code that can be

selected to be displayed FAULT IN FRONT AXLE SPEED
SENSOR. 4WD AUTO NOT IN
FUNCTION. 4WD WILL BE
When required the active service code (codes) with TURNED ON IN AUTO POSITION.
contents can be displayed as follows:

S DB 152

The active service code screen is displayed.

D. Gauges and Controls ---110---

 DB 8.2.1.1. Service code description DB 8.2.1.3. Service code
Symbol is selected in the opened display
and the malfunction description is displayed as
text. The colour at the top of the screen indicates
the malfunction seriousness from the lightest to the
most serious malfunction as follows:

3056102
1. 2. 3. 4.
S DB 151

S DB 154
The angle of view in which the screen is viewed
affects to the colours. When needed check the
colour by viewing end long to the screen. Select the symbol from the active service
code display and confirm the selection.
1. Service code (does not cause any limits),
warning level 1 The service code is displayed.
The purpose of the service code is to make easier
the co---operation with the authorised service
2. Actuator limits, warning level 2 personnel concerning the possible malfunction
situations.

3. Power/driving speed limited, limited DB 8.2.1.4. Other active service codes

driving state, warning level 3

4. Driving prevented. The whole screen is

red., warning level 4

GREEPER SWITCH IS IN WORNG

DB 8.2.1.2. Operating instructions POSITION COMPARED TO
CREEPER POSITION. CREEPER
NOT IN USE

S DB 132
4WD CAN BE USED IN THE MAN-
UAL AND OFF POSITION
If there are arrows on the active service code
screen the tractor has simultaneously also other
active service codes, which can be scanned.

S DB 153

Select the symbol from the active service

code display and confirm the selection.
The possible operating instructions for the driver
are displayed.

---111--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DB 8.3. Service code history
The service code history is meant mainly for autho-
rised service personnel use.
All previous service codes with contents can be
seen from the service code history. Also those,
1. 2. 3. 4.
which are not active or are off. When the authorised S DB 151
personnel have repaired the malfunction, at same
time they will delete the service code in question The symbol before the service code
from the list. indicates that it is active. The active service
codes can also be displayed through the
DB 8.3.1. Service code history on the menu at the bottom , see
screen instructions in section DB 8.2. on page 110.

The number under the symbol indicates the

number of operating hours, when the
service code appeared for the first time.

The number under the symbol indicates the

number of operating hours, when the
service code appeared for the last time.
The number in the last column indicates the service
code appearing times.
The selected service code line is surrounded with
the line of dots and dashes.
S DB 68

Press the Accept button to move at same

Set the display to the basic mode and select the
way into the submenus as with the active
symbol of the service code history and con- service code, see instructions in section
DB 8.2.1.1. --- DB 8.2.1.3. on page 111.
firm the selection.
If several service codes are on the display, use the
arrow keys to move up and down.

882 895 3
630 682 4
714 714 1

S DB 134

The Service code history is displayed.

The colour before the service code indicates the
malfunction seriousness similarly as with the active
service code from the lightest to the most serious
malfunction as follows:

D. Gauges and Controls ---112---

 DB 9. Implement settings
In the tractor terminal memory can be created fol- DB 9.2. Creating a folder (New folder)
ders (New folder) and settings (New settings) with
names for different implements and tasks. Also, in
the window Comment the comments about the set-
tings, if necessary, can be saved.
When attaching the implement later to the tractor,
the approved and saved settings can easily be acti-
vated from the menu.
In front of the folder name will be +mark (opened ---
mark) In front of the setting name is nothing.

DB 9.1. Implement setting saving

menu
S DB 161

When pressing the Accept button in any space of

the menu, the Comment menu will be displayed (in
this case New settings and New folder). The num-
ber of “Comments” depends on, in which space the
Accept ---button will be pressed.The different menus
will be clarifyed later.
Select New folder (new folder) and confirm the se-
lection.

S DB 73

The implement setting symbol is displayed at

the bottom left corner of the screen. It is displayed
in almost all screen modes.
Select the implement setting symbol and
confirm the selection.

S DB 162

The folders can only be made under the USER

S DB 160
The implement settings basic page is displayed.
Uppermost are the USER SETTINGS (user set-
tings).
Below is the DEFAULT file with factory settings, it
cannot be removed.
In the figure example there is also the PLOUGH
(plough) folder.
Also the RECYCLE BIN (recycle bin).
SETTINGSthat means under the folder no other fol-
ders can be made.
The folder name writing (Folder name) (max 8
characters):
---By turning the control knob clockwise the
numbers 0, 1, 2, 3... will be displayed
---By turning the control knob counter---clockwise
the letters (first the underline character)_, Z, Y, X,
W... will be displayed
---The menus turn around or after the last numbe r
will be the letters ...8, 9, A, B, C... and on the
contrary, start.
---The function can be canceled when pressing the
Accept button from menu X or pressing the return
button.
The folders will be saved by accepting the SAVE
(save) menu.

---113--- D. Gauges and Controls

 DB 9.3. Rename a folder (Rename buttonand select New settings (new settings),
confirm the selection.
folder)

S DB 183
The folder can be renamed as follows:
---Select the folder for renaming and confirm the
selection
---Select Rename folder and confirm the selection
S DB 164
Creating the setting name (Setting name) will be
carried out in the same way as the creating the
folder before . In the example, the figure above,
SOW (sow) the settings will be created in the folder.
The comments for settings can be written in the
space (Comment).
When writing the comment special symbols can
also be used.
The settings will be saved by accepting the SAVE
(save) menu.
Creating the settings can be canceled by
confirming the X selection or by pressing the return
button.

DB 9.5. Rename the settings (Save

S DB 184 settings)

Now the new folder name can be written and

accepted.

DB 9.4. Saving the settings (New

settings)

S DB 169

When changing the settings (in the space setting

S DB 163
The settings can be saved under the folder (the
folder has to be selected ) or under USER
SETTINGS (user settings must be selected) without
the folder.
Create the Command menu with the Accept
introduction DB 9.7. page 115), they can be saved
with a new name as follows:
---Create the Command menu with the Accept
button and select Save settings (save settings),
confirm the selection.
Now name the settings and fill the note as in the
saving space before.

D. Gauges and Controls ---114---

 DB 9.6. Quick---loading the settings
S DB 165
The setting name the tractor uses now is indicated
at the bottom of the screen (at the figure PLOUGH1)
(plough1).
When changing the settings in use they can be
saved (saved by the same name) by pressing a
long the Accept button in the diskette figure space
and confirming the after that displayed YES (yes)
selection.
DB 9.7. Loading settings (Load set-
tings)
The setting name introduced has to be selected.
After this press the Accept button.
S DB 166
From the menu displayed select Load settings
(load settings) and pressed the Accept button. The
setting name will be displayed on the Tractor
Terminal and on the bottom of the screen not until
the setting Command page is left (blue bottom).
The side will be left by pressing the Return---button.
---115---
DB 9.8. Deleting settings/folders
The name of the deleting setting/folder has to be
selected. The folder cannot be deleted, before the
settings under it have been deleted.
After this press the Accept button.
S DB 170
Select Delete settings (delete settings) and press
the Accept button. The settings move to the recycle
bin (RECYCLE BIN). The folders move not to the
recycle bin, they will be deleted totally.
DB 9.9. Recycle bin (Recycle bin)
At the maximum in the display and recycle bin can
be total 50 folders and files. If the system does not
let a new folder or setting be created,the recycle bin
has to be emptied.
DB 9.9.1. Empty the whole recycle bin
S DB 171
---Select the Saving menu on the screen (instruction
DB 9.1.)
---Select from the menu RECYCLE BIN (recycle bin)
and confirm the selection
D. Gauges and Controls
 S DB 167 S DB 188

---Select the displayed Empty recycle bin (empty
recycle bin) and confirm the selection
---Leave the menu by pressing the Return---button
DB 9.9.2. Empty or restore settings from
the recycle bin
---Press the Accept button
When pressing the Delete settings the setting will
be deleted and when pressing the Restore set-
tings the setting will be returned under the USER
SETTINGS.
---Leave the menu by pressing the Return---button.

S DB 187

---Select the Saving menu on the screen (for instruc-

tions, see DB 9.1.)
---Select from the menu RECYCLE BIN (recycle bin)
---Press the right arrow key and the settings in the
recycle bin will appear.
---Select the setting required to delete or return, the
comments (Comment) of the setting desired will
appear open also right in the screen, confirm the
selection.

S DB 168

---Select from the menus displayed Delete settings

delete settingsn) or Restore settings (restore set-
tings).

D. Gauges and Controls ---116---

 E. Starting and driving the tractor
Familiarise yourself with the controls and the
operation of the machine before driving your new
tractor. Familiarise yourself with the instructions on
how to use the controls in this guide. Also read the
safety instructions at the beginning of this guide
and keep them in mind while working with your
tractor.
Always check the condition of the gauges, indicator
E 1. Operating the tractor during the first 50 hours
Smooth operation and varying loads allow the
tractor to be honed to a durable and economical
working machine. We recommend paying special
attention to running in your new tractor, because it
will affect the service life of your tractor.
--- Do not race the engine, and avoid running at
maximum RPMs
E 2. Starting
DANGER:
Never operate the tractor inside a
closed space.
DANGER:
Never start the engine until you are
seated securely within the tractor.
IMPORTANT!
If the engine has not been used for over a month,
remove the pressure oil pipe of the turbocharger and
pour approximately 0.2 l of clean engine oil to the
turbocharger’s bearing housing.
E 2.1. Normal start/cold start
The engine starting process is carried out so that the
emissions are reduced when starting.
The running of the engine when cold, is adjusted by
the temperature (smooth engine running, good
engine starting, minor smoking...).
1. Ensure that the shuttle/parking brake lever is in
the parking brake position.
2. Turn the hand throttle knob to the low idling posi-
tion (counter---clockwise).
---117---
lights and controls before driving the tractor, and
check regularly that they operate properly during
driving.
IMPORTANT!
Always perform daily maintenance in accordance
with the maintenance program before operating the
tractor.
--- Do not pull heavy loads at low engine RPMs
--- Avoid continuous driving in one gear and at a
continuous RPM
NOTE: Check the tightness of screws and nuts
periodically (wheel lugs, exhaust manifold etc.).
3. Turn the ignition switch to start the position 1
---If the glow indicator light on the dashboard does
not light up (= engine is warm enough), turn the
ignition switch to the start position.
---If the glow indicator light on the dashboard lights
up, wait until it turns off and then turn the igni-
tion switch to the start position.
---Release the ignition switch after the engine
starts. Use the accelerator pedal to control the
engine running speed.
After starting the cold engine the glow indicator light
might light on again in cold conditions ( under
+15˚C). This afterglow reduces white smoke and
keeps the cold engine running smooth.
4. Reduce the engine speed as soon as the tractor
has started. Never ”race” a cold engine.
5. If the engine fails to start in 10 seconds, stop start-
ing and try again following instructions at point 3.
---Monitor the oil pressure. The oil pressure must
rise to normal level in 3---4 seconds after start-
ing the engine (especially for the lubrication of
the turbocharger).
When you turn the power on with the ignition, the
indicator lights for the parking brake and four---wheel
drive must light up before the engine can be started.
The indicator lights light up approx. 0.6 seconds
after the power has been switched on. This so---
E. Starting and driving the tractor
called starting delay is a safety feature that allows E 2.3. Using a back---up battery for
the system to perform necessary start---up procedu-
res. engine starting
NOTE: If the starting attempt fails, wait until the When using a back---up battery to assist starting,
engine has fully stopped before trying again. please note the following:
--- Make sure that the back---up battery has the same
voltage as the tractor’s own battery.
E 2.2. Special instructions for cold
--- Open the plugs of both batteries to avoid the risk
starts of explosion.
NOTE: Turn off all unnecessary equipment that ---DANGER: Do not connect a fully
uses electrical power, because their circuits charged battery to an empty battery,
remain closed in the glow and start positions. because the powerful power surge
If the starter motor does not turn immediately when may cause an explosion.
the ignition is turned to the Start position, you must --- Connect the (+) terminal of the auxiliary battery to
stop the attempt to start for a moment and try again. the (+) terminal on the tractor battery. Then
connect the other jump lead from the (---) terminal
Let the engine and the hydraulic system warm up of the auxiliary battery to the e.g. attaching bolt of
for a while at low RPMs. You can speed up the the battery ground cable.
warming of the hydraulic system by turning the
steering wheel. Do not operate auxiliary --- When the engine starts, first disconnect the
hydraulics while the oil is cold. negative cable from the back---up battery and the
frame and only then the positive cable.
If you are starting the engine in below---freezing
temperatures without automatic glowing (device is Start the engine only from the driver’s seat, never by
malfunctioning or has otherwise been disengaged), shorting wires.
let the starter motor turn uninterrupted (but not for After the engine starts, press down the clutch pedal,
longer than 30 seconds at a time) until the engine select the desired gear, release the parking brake
can run on its own. The starter motor will turn the and select the desired direction. Increase the engine
engine as long as the ignition is held in the Start RPMs gradually and slowly release the clutch pedal.
position.
If you are operating your tractor in below---freezing
temperatures, we recommend removing the battery
and storing it in a warm space when the tractor is
not in use.
Never race a cold engine. Instead, let it warm up to
normal running temperature by running it at modest
RPMs.
WARNING! Always use the engine block heater
(included as a standard accessory) in
temperatures under 0°C when possible.
This ensures that the engine will start in cold
conditions and reduces engine wear. 2---3 hours of
heating before starting is sufficient. When the block
heater is plugged to a electrical socket, a sizzling
noise from the resistor indicates that the heater is
on.
NOTE: If you are driving the tractor very short
periods at a time, take care that the battery
charge is sufficient for starting the engine.
WARNING: The use of STARTING
AEROSOLS is absolutely forbidden
(due to the automatic glowing).
DANGER OF EXPLOSION!

E. Starting and driving the tractor ---118---

 E 3.
--- In cold conditions, allow the engine to warm to a
normal running temperature before loading it
heavily. The engine wears faster when running
cold than in the normal temperature.
--- Do not begin driving until there is sufficient
pressure in the power transmission system. If a
trailer with a pressure air brake system is
connected to the tractor, do not begin driving until
the pressure air system is at full pressure.
2
1
Starting off
--- Use the gear shift lever (2) to select the desired
gear.
--- Move the shuttle lever (1) to the desired driving
direction and release the brake pedal. If you are
using the power shuttle switch (3) to control the
starting direction, you must press the clutch pedal
at the same time
In cold weather (temperatures under ---5°C) we
recommend letting the tractor idle for a short time so
that the transmission oil warms up.
E 3.1. Accelerator pedal
If the cruise control or the RPM control is on and you
press the accelerator pedal (clutch or brake pedal or
the HiShift switch), the cruise control or the RPM
control will disengage. The RPMs (speed) can then
be controlled by varying pressure on the accelerator
pedal.

SE2

--- Both the shuttle lever (1) and the power shuttle
switch (3) must be in neutral (in the N position).
Use the brake pedal to hold the tractor in place.

E 4. Driving
Monitor the warning lights and gauges during E 4.1. Main gears
driving.
DANGER! Do not turn the ignition to the
STOP position during driving. If the
power is turned off, the parking brake is
engaged and all wheels will
automatically lock.
WARNING!
1. Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal
2. Do not let the tractor roll downhill SE3
with a gear engaged and the clutch
pedal depressed.
Select a gear that allows optimal fuel consumption
3. When turning an heavy implement at
without overloading the engine and the gearbox.
headlands, allow the engine RPMs Remember that the humidity conditions may be
drop to 1300 RPM. different in different parts of the field. Select a gear
4. If the engine is not running, the that allows the engine to run at approx. 75 % of its
power steering will not function. maximum power.

---119--- E. Starting and driving the tractor

NOTE: When moving the gear shift lever, do not
force it. When using the foot clutch pedal, make
sure that the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
NOTE: Do not hold the tractor in place in on hills
by slipping the clutch, especially with a trailer
attached.
NOTE: When travelling on the road, use the 6
main gears of the main gearbox with the power
shift gear in position one. This way you can later
use the power shift gears to reach the desired
speed depending upon road conditions.
NOTE: When shifting down the main gears, you
can raise the RPMs to reduce the force required
to shift and the wear on the synchronisation
units.
NOTE: When doing heavy front loader work
(hauling soil, sand etc.), you must use only the
1st and 2nd gears of the 6---gear main gearbox.
NOTE: When doing lighter front loader work
(loading farming products), you can also use the
3rd gear of the 6---gear main gearbox.
Heavy pulling is not allowed when driving
backwards! (50 % or more of the maximum
permitted load).
See speed table for the top speeds of individual
gears (page 203).
E 4.2. Crawler gear
SE4
NOTE: Use crawling speeds continuously only for
work using PTO!
Heavy pulling is not permitted!
When engaging the crawling speed, please note
the following:
--- The parking brake has to be engaged
--- The engine must be running at idle
--- Fully depress the clutch pedal, move the gear shift
lever to neutral and engage or disengage the
crawler gear (the 5th and 6th gears are locked
when in crawling mode)
E. Starting and driving the tractor ---120---
E 4.3. Drive clutch
The drive clutch is oil---cooled and can withstand
heavy loading. To avoid overheating in extreme
driving conditions, please note the following:
--- Do not hold the tractor in place in on hills by
slipping the clutch, especially with a trailer
attached.
--- When doing loading work, do not slip the clutch
for long periods of time.
--- After starting, always remove your foot from the
clutch pedal.
A
SE5
---When the axle between the power shift gear and
the main gearbox reaches 3800 RPM, a warning
light (A) is lit. You must then reduce driving speed
until the warning light switches off.
E 4.4. HiShift switch
1
SE6
Shifting while driving can usually be done using the
HiShift button (1) on the gear shift lever. The
automatics take care of smooth shifting.
When the HiShift switch (1) is used, the clutch pedal
will not move. You can move the clutch control to the
foot pedal in all situations, however. Please note that
the automatics will not then engage the
transmission, it must be engaged using the foot
pedal.
WARNING: When using a implement or
in other work requiring precise control,
you must control the clutch with the
foot pedal.
 WARNING: Use the HiShift switch so
that you can use your foot to control the
clutch pedal when necessary.
If you must leave the tractor running
with no operator present, make sure
that no---one can enter the cabin and
cause the tractor to accidentally start
moving. The parking brake must be
engaged.
E 4.5. Power shuttle
1 engage.
If the change of direction is jerky, do the
following:
Speed =< 10 kph
--- Re---select the previous driving direction, depress
the clutch pedal, and driving continues in the
original direction. Perform the direction change
again.
Speed => 10 kph
--- Brake until the driving speed is under 10 kph.
---Depress the clutch pedal fully and slowly release
it. The selected driving direction should now
--- Or, re---select the previous driving direction,
depress the clutch pedal fully, release it slowly,
and driving continues in the original direction.
Perform the direction change again.

E 4.6. Automatic traction control

SE7

You can use the power shuttle (1) also while the
tractor is moving. You do not need to use the clutch
pedal (although you can use it in the traditional
manner if you like). 1
NOTE: Use the power shuttle only when
driving at speeds under 10 kph. When
operating the clutch pedal, release the
pedal slowly.
The automatics engage the power shuttle gear
smoothly when the direction is changed without
using the clutch pedal. The system stops the tractor
SE9
smoothly.
You can engage the shuttle at higher speeds as well,
but the automatic braking system engages only You can utilise the automatic traction control (1) for
when the speed has dropped under 10 kph. example when driving on the road when you need to
If you attempt to use the shuttle while the driving stop at crossings. Then you will not have to release
speed of the tractor is over 10 kph, the arrow traction with the gear shift lever, the shuttle lever or
indicating the selected direction begins blinking and the clutch pedal/HiShift switch, and you can start
the shuttle remains in neutral. When the speed driving again simply by pressing the accelerator
drops under 10 kph, the shuttle engages, and the pedal.
arrow of the selected direction stops blinking and Likewise, in many kinds of work you can use
remains steadily lit. hydraulic implements, for example, at low RPMs
If the shuttle lever is returned to the original direction after the traction release has been engaged, and
when the speed is over 10 km/h, the traction re---engage traction simply by pressing the
engages immediately. accelerator pedal.
We recommend using the power shuttle at lower
speeds to reduce the load on the transmission.

---121--- E. Starting and driving the tractor

 E 4.7. Power shift gear
1
1
2
S E 10
Due to the power shift gears, the tractors have a
total of 24 forward and reverse gears. The power
shift gear buttons are located in the knob of the gear
shift lever (1) and the right---side arm rest (2). You do
not need to use the clutch pedal when selecting
power shift gears.
You can use the power shift hare button to increase
speed and the tortoise button to reduce speed in
every gear.
The display panel on the side pillar of the cabin
always indicates the currently engaged power shift
gear (3). You can rapidly shift the power shift gears
for example 2 gears at a time by double---pressing
the switch. The automatics will then perform the
shifting smoothly through the intermediate gears.
The number of the selected speed range will blink
until the selected speed range has been engaged, at
which point the number stops blinking and remains
steadily lit.
NOTE The automatics prevents the engagement
of the lowest power shift with the high engine
RPMs so that the engine RPMs do not rise too
much.
E. Starting and driving the tractor ---122---
E 4.7.1. Programming/programing the
power shift gear
4 4
3
SE8
If you want, you can pre---program (with button 3)
the desired power shift gear to be automatically
engaged with the shuttle (the
pre---programming/pre---programing (4) is also
displayed in the display panel on the side pillar).
When working with a loader, for example, the power
shift gear 1 can always be engaged when the
forward direction is selected, and power shift gear 4
engaged when the reverse direction is selected.
power shift gears can be manually selected in the
regular manner in the pre---programming/
pre---programing mode while driving. If no
pre---programming/pre---programing is done, the
selected power shift gear remains engaged when
direction is changed.
E 4.7.2. Power shift gear automatics
1
3
2
S E 11
Use the power shift gear switch (1) to select either
AUTO 1 or AUTO 2 automatics. AUTO 1 will
automatically shift the power shift gears based on
load and RPMs, while AUTO 2 will shift based only
upon the RPMs (the selected program is also
displayed in the display panel on the side pillar of
the cabin (2)). The program will then always shift to
the optimal power shift gear. You can program the
AUTO 2 automatics to shift to desired gears
depending upon selected engine RPMs.
When the automatics are in use, the number of the
speed range that will be selected next (3) will blink
on the display before the speed range is changed
automatically. After the speed range has been
engaged, the number stops blinking and remains
steadily lit on the display.
You can move directly from the Auto 1 function to
the Auto 2 function and vice versa.
E 4.8. Cruise control
2 1
4
3
S E 12
The use of cruise control is detailed in section
“Gauges and controls” on page 60.
Use the selection switch (1) to set either a constant
programmed driving speed (kph) or constant RPMs
(RPM) by pressing the relevant side of the switch.
Use the hare button (2) and the tortoise button (3) to
increase or decrease the currently set RPMs/driving
speed.
The tractor will maintain the set RPMs/driving speed,
if the engine can keep the RPMs constant.
When you quick---shift during driving, the set driving
speed remains if it is in the normal RPM range of the
engine, and the engine can maintain the RPMs in
question.
The constant RPMs/driving speed setting is
removed, when the OFF switch is pressed (4).
If the tractor has been shut down and re---started,
the constant speed must be set again.
---123---
E 4.9. Brakes
NOTE: Always check that the brake system has
sufficient power before driving the tractor.
DANGER: The brake pedals must be
locked together with a latch during
driving on the road.
Driving downhill with the clutch pedal
depressed or the HiShift switch (in the
gear shift lever) engaged is not allowed,
and can cause serious damage to the
brakes and the power transmission.
Whenever you brake with both pedals, four---wheel
drive is automatically engaged and all wheels will
brake.
WARNING: If there is a malfunction in
engaging drive to the front axle, braking
distances may be longer.
NOTE: To prevent overheating, do not use the
drive brakes continuously (shift down in time to
increase the effect of engine braking).
NOTE: If a trailer equipped with brakes is
attached to the tractor, always attach the trailer’s
brake connections as well. Test that the brakes
function efficiently before starting driving.
NOTE: To ensure perfect functioning of the wet
multidisc brakes, use only oils approved by the
manufacturer.
DANGER: Do not turn the ignition to the
STOP position during driving. If the
power is turned off, the parking brake
will engage and ALL WHEELS WILL
LOCK.
E 4.9.1. Emergency brake, extra equipment
S E 13
If the tractor’s brake pedal malfunctions for some
reason, you can operate the emergency brakes by
pulling the hand lever. This will manually engage the
brakes in all wheels.
E. Starting and driving the tractor
 E 4.10. Differential lock
S E 14
The differential lock rocker switch for both the front
and rear axles is located in the right---side arm rest.
The rocker switch has three positions. The functions
of the switch are detailed in section ”Gauges and
controls” on page 62.
You can engage and disengage the lock during
driving without depressing the drive clutch pedal.
If a wheel starts to slip, engage the differential lock.
To optimise operation, engage the differential lock
before the wheels start to slip.
Do not engage the differential lock if there is much
wheels slip, but reduce the revolutions before the
lock engagement.
NOTE: Do not use the differential lock during
driving on the road or driving around bends.
NOTE: In heavy pulling work, especially
ploughing, always use the differential lock.
E. Starting and driving the tractor ---124---
E 4.11. Four---wheel drive
S E 15
The functions of the three---position switch are
detailed in section ”Gauges and controls” on
page 61.
You can engage and disengage the four---wheel
drive during driving without depressing the drive
clutch pedal.
Four---wheel drive is also engaged when both brake
pedals are used in braking.
Engage the four---wheel drive only when necessary.
E 4.11.1. Driving on the road
If you do not necessarily need front---wheel drive
during driving on the road, keep it disengaged.
Using four---wheel drive is not allowed at speeds of
over 15 kmph on roads with good traction.
 E 5.
Lower the implement (in cold weather lower the
lower links even if unloaded), turn the gear shift
lever to neutral, engage the parking brake, turn
off the engine and switch off main power.
S E 16
DANGER: When parking the tractor,
ALWAYS engage the parking brake. The
engine will not brake.
WARNING: Do not engage the parking
brake while the tractor is moving. For
safety reasons the parking brake can
be engaged only at speeds under 2
kph.
Stopping
Make sure that the tractor and the trailer attached to
it will stay in place in the following situations:
--- When parking on a slope
--- During repairs
--- During maintenance
When the engine is not running, the parking brake is
automatically engaged, regardless of the position of
the parking brake lever.
When the parking brake is engaged, the four---wheel
drive is also engaged and all wheels brake.
WARNING: Before turning off the
engine, lower the engine RPMs to idle
speed for about a minute to let the heat
of the engine even out. Turn the ignition
to the Stop position and switch off main
power.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of a workday to prevent
moisture from forming inside the tank.
---125--- E. Starting and driving the tractor
 E 6. Operational considerations
E 6.1. The maximum allowed driving When towing with the engine stopped:
inclinations for the tractor on
slopes
To ensure the sufficient engine lubrication on steep
hills make sure that the amount of oil is in the high
mark (with minimum filling the lubrication may be
insufficient).
(In continuous driving considering engine
lubrication):

Lengthwise with the front of the tractor up:

--- S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30˚

Lengthwise with the back of the tractor up:

--- S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35˚

Sideways to right and left:

--- S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45˚

Combined right and left/lengthwise with the front S E 20

up:
When the engine is stopped, the parking brake is
--- S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27˚/27˚ engaged. The parking brake must be released by
turning the adjustment screw behind the cab beside
Combined right and left/lengthwise with the back
the quick---coupling. (key distance 22 mm, in the
up:
tractor tool kit ) turning off (ca. 50 revs).
--- S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35˚/35˚
WARNING: To avoid tipping the tractor over, NOTE: When the parking brake release is
lower values should be observed for safe driving. removed from use, the adjustment screw has to
be unscrewed until it is in tension and does not
swing any more.
E 6.2. Using tyre chains
DANGER: When the parking brake
In four---wheel drive models the use of tyre chains on adjustment screw has been loosened,
the front wheels is allowed, if there are chains on the only the brake pedal will function.
rear wheels as well. Check the tightness of the When the engine is not running, the
chains so that they will not break any covers when brake booster will not function.
the wheel is turned. --- Towing speed, maximum of 10 kph
--- Towing time, maximum of 2 hours
E 6.3. Towing the tractor
WARNING: If these towing instructions
While being towed, the gears must be in the
are not followed, the power
following positions:
transmission may be damaged!
--- Crawler gear disengaged
--- The six---step main gear shift lever in neutral

When towed with the engine running:

--- The transmission system pressure must be at 19.8
bar, and the hydraulic system for implements must
function.
--- Running speed of the engine should be
1200---1300 RPM
--- Towing speed, maximum of 30 kmph
--- Towing time, maximum of 2 hours

E. Starting and driving the tractor ---126---

 F. Working instructions
Working instructions for the most common extra and alternative equipment can be found in this chapter. For
the working instructions for other extra and alternative equipment, see the equipment part K at the end of the
guide.

5.2 5.1 5.4 3.4 3.3 7

3.2 5.5
3.1

4.R
5.3 4.T

4.P

4.LS
2.2

9 2.1

2.3

1.4

1.5 1.5

1.2 1.2

1.3 1.3

6
8

1.1
S F 68

Picture from the rear 3 Pressurised air brake connectors, extra equip-
ment
1 Linkage
3.1 Reservoir line, red cover
1.1 Lower links
3.2 Brake line, yellow cover
1.2 Levelling screws
3.3 One---line system, black cover
1.3 Check links
3.4 Quick coupling for pressurised air take---off
1.4 Top link bracket
1.5 Lifting cylinders If the pressurised air brakes have a Duo---Matic
2 Quick couplings for auxiliary hydraulics, valve coupling, it is in the place of couplings 3.1, 3.2 and
blocks 1---7: 3.3.
2.1 Valve blocks 1---3, 1/2” quick couplings 4 Couplings for the direct connection of a hy-
2.2 Valve blocks 4---7, 1/2” quick couplings draulic motor (Power Beyond, with no valve)
2.3 Oil drip tanks for the quick couplings

---127--- F. Working instructions

 4P Hydraulic motor pressure connection P, 3/4” 5 Other couplings
female quick coupling 5.1 PTO emergency stop socket
4T Hydraulic motor free flow or return connection 5.2 Trailer socket
T, 3/4 male quick coupling 5.3 Trailer hydraulic brake connection, extra equip-
4LS Hydraulic motor load sensing = LS connec- ment
tion, 1/4” female quick coupling 5.4 Implement control system connections, extra
4R Hydraulic motor housing leakage connection R, equipment
1/2” male coupling, (this connection also acts 5.5 Power socket
as the return connection for the auxiliary hy- 6 PTO shaft
draulics) 7 Hatch for remote control cables
8 Hydraulic towing hook, extra equipment

1.4 3
2

4.T

4.P 4.R

4.LS 1.2

1.2
8

7
1.1

1.3

5
6

1.1
SF2

Picture from the front
The front linkage and power take---off featured in the
picture are available as extra equipment. If the
tractor does not have a front linkage, the hydraulic
connections are capped, and can be used to
connect, for example, a front loader.
1 Front PTO, extra equipment
1.1 Lifting links
1.2 Lifting cylinders
1.3 External lift/lower buttons
1.4 Top link bracket
2 Auxiliary hydraulic quick couplings for valve block
8, when the single---lever control functions in the
arm rest have been switched to the front, extra
equipment.
3 Auxiliary hydraulic quick couplings for valve block
9, when the single---lever control functions on the
arm rest has been switched to the front, extra
equipment.
4 Couplings for the direct connection of a hy-
draulic motor (Power Beyond, with no valve),
extra equipment
4P Hydraulic motor pressure connection P, 3/4”
female quick coupling
4T Hydraulic motor free flow or return connection
T, 3/4 male quick coupling

F. Working instructions ---128---

 4LS Hydraulic motor load sensing = LS connec- 5 PTO shaft, extra equipment
tion, 1/4” female quick coupling 6 Front PTO button
4R Hydraulic motor housing leakage connection R, 7 Pulling point
1/2” male coupling, (this connection also acts 8 Auxiliary hydraulics quick coupling oil drip reser-
as the return connection for the auxiliary hy- voir
draulics). This connection comes with the front
linkage as default equipment.

F 1. Power take---off (PTO)

F 1.1. Rear PTO WARNING!
IN AN EMERGENCY USE THE IGNITION
The use of the PTO is described in the chapter SWITCH TO STOP (OBSERVE THE
”Gauges and controls” on page 64. PARKING BRAKE ENGAGEMENT IN
THIS SITUATION).
Always make sure that the implement has been
designed for 1000 RPM before attaching it to the NOTE: When working with PTO---operated
PTO. implements, use mainly the Powershift gears.
The PTO shaft clutch does not have an overload
The PTO nominal speed of 1000 RPM is achieved
protection for implements.
when the engine is running at 2112 RPM.
When oil pressure is low (during winter)
The standard PTO shaft has 20 splines and has a hydraulic pressure builds up slowly, which
diameter of 45 mm. means that the implement will also start up more
slowly. On the other hand, if the PTO oil has
Heavy use overheated, the PTO must be stopped.
--- In heavy use we recommend using the standard
20---spline PTO shaft with a diameter of 1 3/4” (45
mm).
--- When engaging the PTO, wait until the PTO shaft
clutch has fully engaged (approx. 5 seconds),
especially when the oil is cold, before loading the
PTO.

Work instructions
--- Always engage the PTO at low RPMs to protect
the clutch and the operating mechanism. The PTO
will automatically be engaged smoothly.
--- After a cold---weather start let the tractor run for a
couple of minutes before engaging the PTO.
---The PTO is also equipped with a brake that
prevents the PTO shaft from creeping (=rotating)
when the clutch is in neutral.
If the tractor engine dies in the middle of PTO work SF3
due to overload, use the ignition to turn off the
power from the tractor before restarting the engine WARNING: Always disengage the PTO
to prevent the accidental engagement of the PTO. and turn off the engine before removing
WARNING! or attaching any implements or making
ENSURE THAT A SAFE WORKING modifications to it.
AREA IS OBSERVED WHEN Check that nobody is in the working
ATTACHING AND WORKING WITH area of the implement when engaging
IMPLEMENTS. the PTO shaft.

---129--- F. Working instructions

 WARNING: When working with a F 1.1.1.1. Changing the PTO shaft
PTO---operated implement, staying near
the rotating universal shaft is strictly
forbidden. The universal shaft may be
serviced only when the PTO is B
D
disengaged, the engine turned off and
the ignition key removed.
WARNING: After the PTO has been
disengaged, the implement will keep
rotating (regardless of the PTO brake)
for a while, due to the momentum of the
implement.
The implement should not be
approached before it has come to a
complete stop. C
SF5

Removing the shaft:

--- Unfasten the 8 screws (B) of the PTO shaft flange,
remove the flange (C) and the shaft (D)

Replacing the shaft:

--- Install the replacement shaft (D), flange (C) and
the fastening screws (A). Tighten the screws to
135 Nm.

A F 1.2. Front PTO

SF4
Front PTO is extra equipment.
WARNING: When the PTO is not being
When using the front PTO, also pay attention to the
used, keep the PTO shaft cover (A) in
instructions for the rear PTO.
place. Also fit the shaft cover for the
front PTO if it has been installed. WARNING!
ENSURE THAT A SAFE WORKING
Always pay attention to all safety regulations AREA IS OBSERVED WHEN
when using PTO---operated implements.
ATTACHING AND WORKING WITH
IMPLEMENTS.
F 1.1.1. PTO shafts WARNING!
--- 20---spline (standard ISO 500, type 3), shaft IN AN EMERGENCY USE THE IGNITION
diameter 1 3/4” (45 mm), standard SWITCH TO STOP (OBSERVE THE
---21---spline (standard ISO 500 type 2), shaft PARKING BRAKE ENGAGEMENT IN
diameter 1 3/8” (35 mm), extra equipment (spare THIS SITUATION).
parts)
--- 6---spline (standard ISO 500 type 1), shaft
diameter 1 3/8” (35 mm), extra equipment (spare
parts)
SF6

NOTE: The nominal rotating speed of the front

PTO shaft is 1000 RPM and the direction of the
rotation is counter---clockwise seen from the
front. Check before attaching the implement for
the points mentioned earlier.

F. Working instructions ---130---

The front PTO mechanism has a switch that prevents
rotation in the wrong direction.
The front PTO shaft nominal rotating speed of 1000
RPM is achieved when the engine is running at 2071
RPM.
NOTE: When using the front PTO---operated
implements, a moment limit switch with a
maximum of 1345 Nm must be used.
The front PTO engages smoothly piloted by
electronics. If the PTO engages very slowly or very
quickly, the electronics may require adjusting and
authorised service staff should be contacted.

F 2. Trailer
The total weight of the trailer = load + the weight of F 2.1. Trailer’s electrical connection
the trailer when empty.
Whether a trailer can be attached to a tractor,
depends on whether the trailer has brakes, how
much of the trailer’s weight falls on the towing hook,
how effective the tractor’s brakes are and whether
the trailer has one or more axles.
Contact the inspection authorities or the dealer if
necessary.
When putting weight on the towing hook, take care
that at least 20% of the tractor’s own weight stays on
the front wheels.
SF7
Do not exceed the maximum allowed wheel or
towing hook capacity. The wheel capacities are listed in 1. Brake light (red)
the Technical Specifications section (on page 199) and 2. Turn signal, left (yellow)
the towing hook capacity in the Extra and alternative 3. Ground (white)
equipment section (beginning on page 221). 4. Turn signal, right (violet)
WARNING: If the towing hook is worn or 5. Parking light, right (brown)
otherwise damaged, in certain 6. Parking light, left (black)
situations it is possible that the trailer 7. Steady current, max. 15 A. The current feed
could come loose. The towing hook switches off using the main power switch.
must always therefore without question
be replaced. F 2.2. Pressure air brakes
If a trailer equipped with brakes is
attached to the tractor, always attach 1C
1B 2
the trailer’s brake connections as well.
Test that the brakes function efficiently
before starting driving.

S F 69 1A

In a two---line system, the trailer is connected to two

connections. The connections (1) are marked as
follows:
--- Reservoir line (1A) --- red cover

---131--- F. Working instructions

--- Brake line (1B) --- yellow cover
In a one---line system, the trailer is connected to the
(brake line) connector with a black cover (1C) (in
certain markets).
Duo---Matic systems have only one connector to
connect, and it is extra equipment.
If necessary, compressed air can be taken from the
pressure air system for external use, such as filling 4
the tyres/tires (pressure approx. 8 bar), from the
quick connector (2) at the rear of the tractor.

5
S F 11

If the outside temperature is below +5_C, ethanol or

SF9
A corresponding quick connector for compressed
air is located on the right side in front of the cab.
When the trailer brake connectors (1) are not in use,
keep their covers in place.
methanol must be put in the anti---freeze reservoir
(4). The valve lever (5) must then be open (in
position 1).
The reservoir and the valve lever are located under
the right rear corner of the cab.
NOTE: The pressure air system must be fully
charged, approx. 7---8 bar (the system pressure
gauge 8 is located next to the instrument panel),
before starting to drive a tractor with a trailer
equipped with pressure air brakes.

3
S F 10

Compressed air can also be taken from the pressure

regulator connector (3) (located on the right side of
the tractor under the cab, at the front of the top of
pressure air reservoir) by screwing the connector all
the way in. This connector can also be used to fill
the system with external pressure air, for example if
the tractor’s own compressor does not work. In this
kind of situation, the connector should not be
screwed all the way in.

F. Working instructions ---132---

 F 3. Three---point linkage
F 3.1. Rear linkage F 3.1.1. Lifting links

S F 13

The length of the lifting links can be adjusted by

raising the leveling screws and screwing them in the
desired direction. After adjustment, lower the
S F 12 leveling screws back to the locking position.

The rear linkage of the tractor is equipped with

category 3 claw type lower links.
CAUTION: Make sure that the claws close
properly.
The quick---hitch ends can be fastened from the cab.
Cables can be attached via the guides in the
linkage.
There are three alternative mounting points for the
top link in the tractor, allowing suitable lifting
geometries for various implements. When the top
link is in the lowest hole, the implement tilts forward 1
quite considerably, while the highest hole allows for
almost horizontal lifting.
When using a hydraulic top link, make sure that it S F 14
functions properly when attaching an implement.
WARNING! The lifting links can be attached to the lower links at
ENSURE THAT A SAFE WORKING three different points, allowing for different
AREA IS OBSERVED WHEN movement ranges and lifting powers for the lower
ATTACHING AND WORKING WITH links.
IMPLEMENTS. Additionally, the mounting pin (1) can be installed to
the lifting link in two different positions, allowing for a
WARNING! fixed and floating (slightly vertical) position for the
IN AN EMERGENCY USE THE IGNITION lower links.
SWITCH TO STOP (OBSERVE THE
PARKING BRAKE ENGAGEMENT IN
THIS SITUATION).

---133--- F. Working instructions

 F 3.1.2. Check links 1. Floating position

Check links are used to check the sideways

movement of the lower links.

NOTE: Adjust the check links so that they

will not come into contact with the rear
wheels.
5
F 3.1.2.1. Adjusting the check links

1
4

2
2
C

S F 16,1

3 The length of the link’s (2) holding chain (5) (with a

3 spring at its lower end) (4) can be adjusted by
S F 15
--- Unfasten the closure pin (1) and turn up the link
(2) (figure A).
--- Lift up the turning handle (3) (figure B)
---Adjust the length of the check link by turning the
handle (3) (figure C)
--- After completing the adjustment, perform the steps
in the reverse order and finally lock the check link
adjustment with the pin (1).
changing the attachment point so that when the
implement is lowered to the working position, the
link will not lock the check links, but allows the
floating position. But when the implement is lifted up
to the transport position, the check links rise up to
the links and are locked. The check links are then
locked in the transport position. When the
implement is lowered back into the working position,
the links come off the check links and the check
links are again in a floating position.
The amount of float is determined by the length of
the check links.

F. Working instructions ---134---

 F 3.1.3. Quick---hitch claws F 3.2. Front linkage

S F 19

The front linkage is extra equipment.

3 It is equipped with category 3 claw type lower links.
When using the front linkage, also note the
instructions concerning the rear linkage, starting on
page 133.
S F 17
WARNING!
1. Pull the latch to release the locking ENSURE THAT A SAFE WORKING
2. The latch can be locked in the open position by AREA IS OBSERVED WHEN
pulling it forward (for example when unhitching an ATTACHING AND WORKING WITH
implement) IMPLEMENTS.
3. Release the latch by pulling it backwards
WARNING!
The quick---hitch claws can be operated from the IN AN EMERGENCY USE THE IGNITION
cab with cables. SWITCH TO STOP (OBSERVE THE
PARKING BRAKE ENGAGEMENT IN
IMPORTANT: Clean, if necessary the quick THIS SITUATION).
couplings and ball joints for the lower links
before attaching the implement. DANGER OF
THE IMPLEMENT RELEASING!

The quick---hitch claw balls

Cat 3 Cat 3

1 2
S F 20,1

S F 18 The positions of the lifting links:

Work position --- pins in hole 1.
The figure shows the ball options for hitching an
Floating work position --- pins in hole 2.
implement. The order numbers are listed below the
balls. The ball on the left is wing---type to make
hitching an implement easier.

---135--- F. Working instructions

 Always make sure that the closure pins (3) are in
place while the lifting links are attached.
--- Before turning the lifting links up, raise the front
linkage all the way up.
--- When driving on public roads, always lift the front
linkage all the way up either with or without an
implement.
--- When driving on public roads and the implement
3 attached to the linkage blocks the headlamps, the
upper headlamps (extra equipment) must be used.
2 S F 21 ---CAUTION: When driving on public
roads with no implement in the front
Transport position --- lifting links turned up and pins linkage, the lifting links must be turned
in hole 2. up.

F 4. Operating the rear linkage

S F 22

The controls for the rear linkage are located on the F 4.1.1. Activating the rear linkage
right---side arm rest.

F 4.1. Lift/stop/lower switch (the 4

3
Autocontrol switch)
The lift/stop/lower switch (1) has three positions.
4
When the left side of the switch is pressed, the
lower links are lowered to the height set with the
position control potentiometer (2). When the right
side of the switch is pressed, the lower links are
raised to the height set with the tractor terminal.
When the rocker switch is in the middle position,
the lower links stop. S F 23

The position control will not work before the control

system has been activated by pressing the
lift/stop/lower switch (1) to either lift or lower
positions. The lock indicator light (3) in the
right---side panel is switched off and the lower links

F. Working instructions ---136---

move slowly to the position that was set previously. F 4.3. Adjusting the transport height
The rear linkage must be activated every time power
has been switched off from the tractor or the buttons
on the mudguards have been used.

F 4.2. Position control

Position control is used when working with
implements running on the ground (mowers, rakes,
plant protection sprays etc.).

S F 25

Use the transport height that can be set with the

tractor terminal to limit the lifting height of the rear
linkage (see instructions on page 92. Choose from
10 different lifting heights.
When the lift position of the lift/stop/lower switch (1)
or the position control knob (2) is used, the lower
links always rise to the set upper limit. This
S F 24 adjustment does not limit lifting when the buttons on
the rear mudguards are used.
Use the tractor terminal to turn on position control
(see instructions on page 92). The rear linkage will
then retain the chosen position regardless of the F 4.4. Floating position
draft. The position control symbol P is displayed
on the terminal screen. When working with an implement that must follow
the ground, use the so---called float position for
Raise the lower links by turning the position control position control. The position control knob (2) is
knob (2) clockwise, and lower them by turning it turned all the way counter---clockwise and the lower
counter---clockwise. If the position control knob is links can freely move up and down, allowing the
left in a position somewhere in the middle, the lower implement to follow the contour of the ground. The
links are kept at the height corresponding to that symbol for lowering (4) is constantly displayed.
position.
WARNING: When working with imple-
The percentage (0---100) position of the lower links ments, which follow the ground surface,
can be seen on the graphical display (see use the FLOATING position, otherwise
instructions beginning from page 47), as well as on the implement may be damaged.
the tractor terminal (see instructions beginning from
page 106).
NOTE: The implement can be raised, for example
F 4.5. Draft control
at the end of a field, by pressing the
lift/stop/lower switch (1) to the lift position (=
transport position, the upper position set with the
tractor terminal), and lower it back to the same
height it was in (the position control knob
determines the working height) by pressing the
switch to the lower position.
NOTE: The symbols (4) on the right---side panel
indicate whether the lower links are lifting or
lowering.

S F 26

Use the draft control when working with implements

that go below the ground (ploughs/plows, cultivators
etc.). Use the tractor terminal to set (see instructions
on page 92) one of the 10 different feeling positions.
The selected draft value is then displayed.

---137--- F. Working instructions

With the Autocontrol linkage, adjust the effect of the F 4.7. Adjusting the raising speed
draft to the working depth, 1 = small effect ... 10 =
very large effect.
For ploughing/plowing, the normal setting for
sensing is 3---4. If you want the draft to have a larger
effect you may choose setting 5 with the
ploughing/plowing depth still remaining almost the
same.
NOTE: Use the position control knob (2) to set
the ploughing/plowing depth.
The symbols for raising and lowering (4) indicate
how often the draft control is working.
NOTE: The sideways movement the lower links S F 28
allow for the implement affects the amount of
draft. For this reason, the lower links must be The selection of the raising speed of the rear linkage
adjusted to a floating position. depends on the type of implement used. With heavy
NOTE: When draft control is not used, position implements a slow raising speed must be used. Use
control P (the basic setting) must be chosen from the tractor terminal to adjust the raising speed (see
the tractor terminal. instructions on page 96). The raising speed is
independent of load. There is a choice of 10 different
When the draft of the lower links rises (because of raising speeds.
an implement) to a determined value, the draft
control makes the rear linkage raise the implement,
as it tries to keep the draft steady. F 4.8. Autocontrol bypass switch =
The automatic weight transfer works in conjunction forced lowering switch
with the draft control. When the draft increases, the
rear linkage raises the implement, and this causes a
transfer of weight from the implement to the traction 1
wheels. In this way the traction wheels always have
the maximum tractive power.

F 4.6. Adjusting the lowering speed 5

S F 29

Use the Autocontrol bypass switch (5) in work where

S F 27
The selection of the lowering speed of the rear
linkage depends on the type of implement used.
With heavy implements a slow lowering speed must
be used. Use the tractor terminal to adjust the
lowering speed (see instructions on page 92). The
lowering speed is independent of load. You can
choose from 10 different lowering speeds.
it is necessary to momentarily lower the lower links
below the height set with the position control knob.
This function is useful in ploughing/plowing, for
example. When starting ploughing/plowing at a
headland, use the switch to quickly get the
plough/plow to the correct ploughing/plowing depth.
In the same way, the switch can be used to keep the
plough/plow longer at the correct depth when
reaching the headland.

F. Working instructions ---138---

 F 4.9. Drive balance control
S F 30
The biggest benefit of drive balance control is in
transport driving with a heavy implement attached to
the three---point linkage. It can also be used in field
work.
Use the tractor terminal to turn on the drive balance
control (see instructions on page 95). ’ON’ text on
the display indicates that damping has been turned
on. Now, when the lift/stop/lower switch (1) is used
to lift the rear linkage, drive balance control is active
if the activation speed has been exceeded (the
factory setting is 8 kph, and it can be adjusted). The
activation speed must have been set low enough if
damping is to be used in field work (see adjustment
instructions on page 95).
F 4.10. Slip control
A
B
S F 31
When the slip control is turned on with the tractor
terminal (symbol ON, (A), see instructions on
page 95) while the draft control is on (numbers
1---10, (B)), the slip control is active when the
lift/stop/lower switch (1) is in the lower position.
When wheel slip exceeds the set limit, the rear
---139---
linkage lifts the implement. When wheel slip has
dropped back under the limit, the rear linkage
lowers the implement back to the same depth it was
before.
If the drive balance control is also turned on (C) with
the tractor terminal, it will be active when the
lift/stop/lower switch (1) is in the lift position and the
slip control will be active when the lift/stop/lower
switch (1) is in the lower position.
F 4.11. Pressure control
S F 32
The pressure on the lower links can be ’reduced’ by
turning the pressure control on with the tractor
terminal (see instructions on page 93). The amount
of reduction can be chosen between 1 & 10 if
required. This feature is useful when you want to
reduce the ground pressure caused by an
implement.
F 4.12. Implement sensors
S F 33
The linkage can be adjusted using the implement
sensor (e.g. the angle ---, the linear --- or the power
sensor) output signal. The adjustment activation and
its power at a scale 1---10 is made using the tractor
terminal menu (see instructions on page 94).
F. Working instructions
 F 5. Using the front linkage

2 4 3

S F 34

The front linkage is extra equipment. The controls for F 5.2. Position control
the front linkage are located in the right---side control
panel. Position control is used when working with
implements running on the ground (mowers, rakes,
plant protection sprays etc.).
F 5.1. Lift/stop/lower switch (the
Autocontrol switch)
The lift/stop/lower switch (1) has three positions.
When the left side of the switch is pressed, the
lifting links are lowered to the height set with the
position control potentiometer (2). When the right
side of the switch is pressed, the lifting links are
raised to the height set with the tractor terminal.
When the rocker switch is in the middle position,
the lifting links stop.

F 5.1.1. Activating the front linkage S F 35

The position control will not work before the control

system has been activated by pressing the
lift/stop/lower switch (1) to either lift or lower
positions. The lock indicator light (3) will then turn
off, and the lifting links will slowly move to the
position that was first set. The front linkage must be
activated every time power has been switched off
from the tractor or the buttons in the front of the
tractor have been used.
Use the tractor terminal to turn on position control
(see instructions on page 90). The front linkage will
then retain the chosen position regardless of
draft. The position control symbol P is displayed
on the terminal screen.
Raise the lifting links by turning the position control
knob (2) clockwise, and lower them by turning it
counter---clockwise. If the position control knob is
left in a position somewhere in the middle, the lifting
links are kept at the height corresponding to that
position.
NOTE: The implement can be raised, for example
at the end of a field, by pressing the
lift/stop/lower switch (1) to the lift position (=
transport position, the upper position set with the
tractor terminal), and lower it back to the same
height it was (the position control knob
determines the working height) by pressing the

F. Working instructions ---140---

switch to the lower position. F 5.5. Adjusting the lowering speed
NOTE: The symbols (4) on the right---side panel
indicate whether the lifting links are rising or
lowering.

F 5.3. Adjusting the transport height

S F 37

The selection of the lowering speed of the front

linkage depends on the type of implement used.
With heavy implements a slow lowering speed must
be used. Use the tractor terminal to adjust the
S F 36 lowering speed (see instructions on page 89). The
lowering speed is independent of load. There is a
Use the transport height that can be set with the choice of 10 different lowering speeds.
tractor terminal to limit the lifting height of the front
linkage (see instructions on page 89). Choose from
10 different lifting heights. F 5.6. Adjusting the raising speed
When the lift position of the lift/stop/lower switch (1)
or the position control knob (2) is used, the lower
links always rise to the set upper limit. This setting
does not, however, limit lifting when the buttons at
the front of the tractor are used.

F 5.4. Floating position

When working with an implement that must follow
the ground, use the float position for position
control. The position control knob (2) is turned all
the way counter---clockwise and the lifting links can
freely move up and down, allowing the implement to S F 38
move according to the ground level. The symbol for
lowering (4) is constantly displayed. The selection of the raising speed of the front
WARNING: When working with imple- linkage depends on the type of implement used.
ments, which follow the ground surface, With heavy implements a slow raising speed must
use the FLOATING position, otherwise be used. Use the tractor terminal to adjust the
the implement may be damaged or the raising speed (see instructions on page 91). The
raising speed is independent of load. There is a
steering grip of the front wheels may
choice of 10 different raising speeds.
disappear.

---141--- F. Working instructions

 F 5.7. Autocontrol bypass switch = F 5.9. Implement sensors
forced lowering switch

S F 67

5 S F 39 The linkage can be adjusted using the implement

sensor (e.g. the angle ---, the linear --- or the power
sensor) output signal. The adjustment activation and
Use the Autocontrol bypass switch (5) in work where
its power at a scale 1---10 is made using the tractor
it is necessary to momentarily lower the lifting links
terminal menu (see instructions on page 91).
below the height set with the position control knob.
This function is useful when using implements that
go partly into the ground. When starting work at a
headland, the switch allows the implement to quickly
reach the correct working depth. In the same way,
when stopping work at a headland, the switch allows
the implement to remain at the correct working
depth until the end.

F 5.8. Pressure control

S F 40

The pressure on lifting links can be ’reduced’ by

turning the pressure control on with the tractor
terminal (see instructions on page 90). The amount
of reduction can be chosen between 1 and 10. This
feature is useful when it is required to reduce the
ground pressure caused by an implement.

F. Working instructions ---142---

 F 6. Auxiliary hydraulics
A standard tractor has seven valves. The output of be separately programmed with the tractor terminal.
the single---lever control valve blocks at the arm rest Thus, there are 10 available valve blocks in total in
can be directed either front or back with a the tractor, 7 of which can be used at the same time.
change---over switch. In the same way, the functions
The valve blocks are also equipped with push---pull
of one valve block controlled from the side panel
quick connectors, making it easy to connect
can also be directed to a different connector pair
hydraulic hoses even under pressure.
with a change---over switch. The outputs from the
valve blocks in question to different connectors can

F 6.1. The correspondence between valve block control levers and the
connectors

D
B
A

S F 64

The figure shows all valve control levers and the
corresponding connectors with their instruction
labels. See the numbers and +/--- markings of the
labels (also colours +/green and ---/yellow) to
determine the valve block---specific output
connections.
Use the change---over switch A (extra equipment) to
switch the single---lever control (C) (joystick) output
from the rear (valve blocks 4 and 5) to the front
(valve blocks 8 and 9). Front couplings are available
as extra equipment are usually in conjunction with
the front linkage, but a front loader, for example, can
be connected to them.
In the same way, the change---over switch B can be
used to switch the output of the valve block
controlled by lever (D) from the rear (valve block 6)
to the lengthwise control of the hydraulic towing
hook (valve block 10). If the tractor is not equipped
with a hydraulic towing hook (available as extra
equipment), another actuator, such as a hydraulic
leveling device, can be attached to the connectors.

---143--- F. Working instructions

 F 6.2. Valve (= valve block) functions

2
2

2
S F 65

For the valves to function, the activation switch (1) of only be used when they have been activated.
the hydraulic valve blocks must be turned on (top
end depressed). This switch can also be used as an F 6.2.1. Adjustable functions
emergency stop for the hydraulic functions.
The properties of the valves (2) of the auxiliary F 6.2.1.1. Valve block ON/OFF switch
hydraulics can be adjusted and activated
individually in the menus of the tractor terminal
display (3) by using the keys and the control wheel
(4). See the Tractor Terminal part of the Gauges and
Controls section for the properties and their
adjustment, beginning from page 97.
The tractor terminal can be used to adjust all valves
in the same way individually.

The following are adjustable properties:

---Switching a valve block ON/OFF
--- Maximum flow adjustment
S F 44
--- Time of output increase/decrease, progression
The adjustable properties are always used when the If a certain valve is not required, you can switch it to
valve is used (when a valve block is switched OFF, OFF position with the tractor terminal (see
the valve block will not function at all). instructions on page 99), valve block 2 in the figure.
This function is useful for example when a device
The following functions can be that you do not want to use at that time is attached
activated/adjusted: to the valve block connectors.
--- Holding time of position lock
--- Position lock
--- Floating position
--- Output as a function of driving speed
The functions that can be activated/adjusted can

F. Working instructions ---144---

 F 6.2.1.2. Maximum flow adjustment
S F 45
The tractor terminal can be used to adjust the
maximum flow port---specifically (output connector)
from 1 to 100 % (see instructions on page 99). This
feature allows for an easy adjustment of an
implement’s moving speed.
In the figure, the maximum flow of both ports of
valve block 3 has been limited.
The maximum output of valve block 1 is 100 l/min.
The maximum output of valve blocks 2---7 (8---10) is
80 l/min.
F 6.2.1.3. Time of output
increase/decrease, progressive output
1. Time of output increase/decrease
S F 46
The tractor terminal can be used to set a time for a
---145---
valve block, connector---specifically, in which the
output smoothly rises to maximum when a lever is
pulled. In the same way, a time can be set at which
the output smoothly drops to zero when a lever is
returned to neutral (see instructions on page 100).
The adjustment is 1---100 % of the maximum time of
4 seconds. With short times of output increase and
decrease the implement movements start and stop
are easy to control and with longer times the loads
are smaller. Long times of output increase and
decrease are useful when running a hydraulic motor.
In the figure, the time of increase/decrease of the
second output connector of valve block 3 has been
adjusted.
2. Progressive output
S F 47
The tractor terminal can also be used to adjust the
output relative to the movement of the control lever
(see instructions on page 100). With no adjustment,
output increases in a linear manner in relation to the
lever movement.
The output at the beginning of a control lever’s
movement range can be reduced by 1---16 steps in
relation to the lever movement. This is a useful
feature when performing work requiring precise
control, or when the actuators are required to start
their movement slowly.
Correspondingly, the output increases more rapidly
in relation to lever movement at the end of the
control lever’s movement range.
In the figure the progressive output of the second
port of valve block 3 has been adjusted.
F. Working instructions
 F 6.2.2.Functions that can be F 6.2.2.2. Position lock
activated/adjusted

7a
6a

7
6 S F 50
1a
3a 2a You can use the tractor terminal to set holding time
4/5 to infinite (see instructions on page 102) and activate
it. The desired function will remain active indefinitely.

1 In the figure, the position lock has been set for the
3 2 second connector of valve block 1.

F 6.2.2.3. Floating position

4a
5a S F 66

Functions that can be activated/adjusted are only

active when they have been activated with the
activation buttons (1a---7a) next to the control levers
(1---7). The corresponding control lever must be
turned at the same time as the button is pressed.
The function is deactivated by moving the control
lever or pressing the activation button a second
time. S F 51

F 6.2.2.1. Holding time of the position lock The tractor terminal can be used to select the
floating position (see instructions on page 103) and
activate it. This allows for example piston rods to
move freely inside cylinders and the implement can
follow the ground level.
In the figure the second valve has been set to
floating.

S F 49

The tractor terminal can be used to choose a

holding time of between 1 and 60 seconds for the
position lock specifically for a connector (see
instructions on page 102) and activate it. The
desired function will remain active for the set time.
In the figure, a holding time has been set for the
position lock of the second connector of valve
block 2.

F. Working instructions ---146---

 F 6.2.2.4. Output depending on driving F 6.4. Using single---action devices
speed

S F 52

The tractor terminal can be used to set the output to

depend on driving speed specifically for a coupling
(see instructions on page 103). Additionally, you can
set the output to start at a certain speed and to stop
at another speed.
S F 71
These features are useful in many work situations.
In the figure, an output curve as a function of the The valves cannot be made to work single---acting,
driving speed has been set for the second couplings but a single---action device can be connected to the
of the third valve. + connector of the valve. However, the flow setting
of the --- side must then be high enough in order for
F 6.3. Return connector the return of the single---action actuator to work
when the lever is in the --- position.

F 6.5. Connecting and operating a

hydraulic motor

F 6.5.1. Direct connection without a

valve (Power Beyond)
When a hydraulic motor is directly connected to a
variable displacement pump with no control valve,
the output to the hydraulic motor depends directly
on the running speed of the tractor’s engine, and the
motor can rotate in one direction only. The maximum
output to the hydraulic motor, achieved at the
maximum RPMs of the tractor engine, will be 130
l/min.
S F 70

The tractor has a return coupling for the hydraulics

(1/2”) as a standard feature. This also acts as the
leak connector for the hydraulic motor casing (for
back pressures, see the Technical Specifications
section on page 210).
NOTE: When auxiliary hydraulics are used, the
implement’s return coupling (if it has one) must
always without question be connected to the
tractor’s return connector.

---147--- F. Working instructions

 F 6.5.1.1. Connecting a hydraulic motor F 6.5.2. Connecting to an adjustable
valve (first valve)

S F 71

The connector symbols are marked next to the

couplings at the rear of the tractor.
--- The pressure or input coupling of the hydraulic
motor is connected to coupling P = 3/4” female
quick coupler
--- The pressureless or return connector of the
hydraulic motor is connected to coupling T = 3/4”
male quick coupler
--- The load sensing connector of the hydraulic motor
is connected to coupling LS = 1/4” female quick
coupler
--- The leak connector of the hydraulic motor housing
is connected to coupling R = 1/2” male coupling
(this acts also as the return coupling for other
hydraulics)
1---
1+
S F 72
CAUTION: When a hydraulic motor is
connected to the couplings of an
adjustable valve, it must always without
question be connected to the couplings
of the FIRST VALVE (1+ and 1---). If the
hydraulic motor is connected to other
valves, the motor will BREAK, because
the other valves do not have shock
valves.
When the pressure and return couplings of a
hydraulic motor are connected to the coupling pair
1+ and 1---, the flow rate going to the hydraulic
motor can be smoothly adjusted with valve 1 by
using the tractor terminal to adjust the maximum
flow, see the Gauges and Controls section on
page 99.
The maximum flow is 100 l/min.

S F 56

If the tractor is equipped with the Power Beyond

couplings (available as extra equipment) also at the
front, the hydraulic motor can be connected to the
corresponding couplings.

F. Working instructions ---148---


S F 58
--- By setting position locks for both ports of a valve
(see figure), instructions on page 102, the rotation
direction of the hydraulic motor can be changed
by activating the position locks alternately in both
directions.
S F 59
When a hydraulic motor is used, it is recommended
setting the time of the output increase/decrease to
high values, so that rotation starts and stops
smoothly (see instructions on page 100). In the
figure, the time of increase/decrease has been set to
a high value for both ports of the valve.
F 6.5.2.1. Connecting a hydraulic motor
--- Connect the pressure and return connectors of the
hydraulic motor to coupling pair 1
1+ = 1/2” female quick coupling
1--- = 1/2” female quick coupling
--- The load sensing connector of the hydraulic motor
does not necessarily have to be connected, but we
recommend keeping it connected to the LS
coupling (= 1/4” female quick coupler) for the
sake of cleanliness, among other things.
--- Connect the leak connector of the hydraulic motor
housing to the R coupling = 1/2” male coupler
---149---
F 6.6. Operational considerations
WARNING!
ENSURE THAT A SAFE WORKING
AREA IS OBSERVED WHEN
ATTACHING AND WORKING WITH
IMPLEMENTS.
WARNING!
IN AN EMERGENCY USE THE IGNITION
SWITCH TO STOP (OBSERVE THE
PARKING BRAKE ENGAGEMENT IN
THIS SITUATION).
NOTE: Clean the quick couplings before
connecting auxiliary hydraulics. Keep the covers
of the quick couplings in place when auxiliary
hydraulics are not in use.
On the market there are also male connectors, not
according to standards, which do not open correctly
the quick couplings. This may occur e.g as slow
lowering when using the tipping device.
DANGER: When connecting hydraulic
cylinders and motors to auxiliary
hydraulics, make sure that the hoses
are connected in the correct way.
Incorrect connections may reverse the
functions and risk an accident.
WARNING: When on the road, nothing
must be supported by the auxiliary
hydraulics valve of the tractor. Loads,
trailer’s articulated steering etc. must
be fastened in some manner (for
example mechanically) while travelling
on the road.
DANGER: Implements supported by the
linkage or the auxiliary hydraulics must
be lowered down during service.
F. Working instructions
 F 7. Attaching implements
DANGER: Before attaching or detaching For example, an incorrectly adjusted plough/plow
implements, adjust the position control produces bad results, increases fuel consumption
setting P using the tractor terminal. In and wastes power when the wheels slip.
the other positions even a small turn of When using implements attached to the three---point
the position control knob may cause an linkage, always make sure that at least 20% of the
unexpected linkage movement. total weight of the tractor lies on the front wheels. If
When attaching or detaching an necessary, add front weights.
implement using the tractor’s external
buttons, always stand alongside the
implement, away from the tractor. Never F 7.1. Using a universal shaft
stand on top of the implement or
between the tractor and the implement. When running external implements with a universal
shaft, always make sure that the shaft is of the
NOTE: After using the buttons, the position correct length and that it can work in the full lifting
control must be restarted with the lift/stop/lower range. If the shaft is too long, it can damage the PTO
switch. mechanism. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
WARNING: When detaching or attaching an when installing a universal shaft.
implement, the implement must be supported in WARNING: When attaching a universal
such a manner that there is no risk of it toppling shaft, check that its cover is intact.
over. Always fasten the cover to a fixed part
Make sure that the implement is properly attached to of the tractor or the frame of the
the linkage before driving the tractor, and that the implement.
implement is not connecting with the cab or, for front
linkage models, to the front of the tractor. When
implements attached to the rear three---point linkage
are transported, the check links must be locked
down.
Always follow any additional instructions of the
manufacturer of the implement. When using different
implements, such as harrows, cultivators and
ploughs/plows, note that their settings have a
considerable effect on the power required for the
work.

F. Working instructions ---150---

 F 8. Ploughing/plowing
Ploughing/plowing with a
F 8.1.
three---point hitched plough/plow
B
A+(10---15) cm
A they are sufficiently floating, following the
C Additionally, the tractor is subjected to
D directly to the correct depth by using the
S F 60
A = distance between the rear wheels = rear track
--- rear wheel width
B = imaginary pulling point
C = pulling centre of the tractor
D = lateral force
Track: For all types of ploughs/plows, the most
favourable distance between the inner surfaces of
the tractor wheels is three times the width of a furrow
slice, regardless of how many mouldboards the
plough/plow has. The distance between the front
wheels must be approx. 10---15 cm more than with
the rear wheels.
For example, with a 16” plough/plow:
6 x 16” (40 cm) = 96” (240 cm)
Wheel distance rear 120---130 cm
Wheel distance front 130---135 cm
--- Attach the lifting links to the foremost holes of the
lower links in a fixed, not floating, position by
turning the locking plate horizontal.
--- Adjust the lifting link almost to its shortest length.
This gains more lifting height.
---151---
--- See the Examples of Using the Top Link section
(on page 152).
S F 61
--- Adjust the check links to such a position that
instructions on page 134.
CAUTION: If the check links are left in
fixed positions, they may be damaged.
great lateral torsional stresses, fuel
consumption is increased and the end
result is poorer.
--- Select a lowering speed that is suitable for the
plough/plow. Adjust the plough/plow according to
the adjustment instructions.
--- Set the draft control to 3---5 and use the position
control knob to set the ploughing/plowing depth to
the correct value. After this you can lift the
plough/plow to transport height and lower it
lift/stop/lower switch.
--- If slipping increases, caused by moist earth, for
example, set the draft control to a more sensitive
setting (i.e. a larger value). This increases
automatic weight transfer to the rear wheels and
the traction of the rear wheels is improved. When
slipping decreases, reset the draft control to the
original value.
NOTE: When the wheels are slipping, there is no
need to touch the position control knob. The
correction can be made by adjusting the feeling
sensitivity.
HINT: Write down the settings found to be optimal in
the table below or in a note in the tractor terminal for
further use:
Distance between pin centres
--- in the top link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm
--- in the leveling screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm
--- draft control No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
--- lowering speed No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F. Working instructions
F 8.1.1. Considerations in adjusting the
plough/plow
Coulters: Adjust the coulters to approx. 10---15 mm
outside the ground---side line and the same amount
above the breast of the plough/plow (make sure,
however, that the bearing does not drag on the
ground).
Plough/plow beam: Adjust the width of the first
furrow slice by moving the beam sideways. The
width of the furrow slice must correspond with the
plough/plow inch value.
Supporting wheel: Adjust the supporting wheel at
the rear of the plough/plow so that it travels lightly
on the ground, preventing the ploughing/plowing
depth from increasing in softer spots.
Top link: Adjust the length of the top link so that
when the plough is at the desired depth, the frame is
parallel to the ground and the ground---side bottom
of the rearmost board is parallel to the bottom of the
furrow.
Lower links: The lower links must be horizontal or
the front slightly higher than the rear when looked at
from the side.
Leveler: Use the leveler to adjust all the boards to
travel in the same depth. The purpose of these
adjustments is to make the plough/plow travel
straight without slewing in any direction.
For more information, see the implement
manufacturers’ manuals.
F 8.1.2. Examples of using the top link
The lifting height of the plough’s/plow’s rear
When long ploughs/plows are transported on
uneven terrain, over ditches, for example, the
plough’s/plow’s rearmost board may catch the
ground. The rear of the plough/plow can be raised
higher for transport purposes by setting the top link
as upright as possible. The lifting height can be
further increase by shortening the lifting links.
Lifting power
Lifting power at the plough’s/plow’s centre of gravity
is at its greatest when the top link is as horizontal as
possible.
F. Working instructions
Ploughing/plowing depth
When hard ground (clay soil) is ploughed/plowed,
keeping the ploughing/plowing depth even may be
a problem (instead of sinking into the ground, the
plough/plow travels on the surface). The force with
which the three point linkage is lifting the
plough/plow must then be minimised, meaning that
the top link must be adjusted as horizontal as
possible.
The plough/plow will retain the
ploughing/plowing depth also in hard ground,
when the top link is horizontal.
Ploughing/plowing with a
F 8.2.
semi---pull type plough/plow
Instructions that differ from those for a three point
hitched plough/plow:
--- Choose a suitable lowering speed.
--- Adjust the lifting links to the same length.
--- Adjust the rear of the plough/plow to the correct
depth with the rear wheel.
--- Set the lockable limiters in place on the rear wheel
of the plough/plow and set the height of the front
of the plough/plow with the position control knob.
In this way the plough/plow is always lowered to
the correct depth.
NOTE: Let the valve remain in the lower position
until the rear of the plough/plow has lowered to
the correct depth and settled against the
backstop of the rear support wheel.
Ploughing/plowing with a
F 8.3.
swing or reversible plough/plow
Instructions that differ from those for a three point
hitched plough/plow:
--- Select a suitably slow lowering speed (1---3).
--- Adjust both lower links to exactly the same height
before attaching the plough/plow to the tractor
approx. 30 cm below the plough/plow beam.
During ploughing/plowing the leveling screw must
not be used to adjust the leveling.
---152---
 F 8.4. Summary of ploughing/plowing

7 10

5 3 4

8
2

S F 63

Read the above instructions for adjusting and using ---For further adjustments of the ploughing/plowing,
the plough/plow, and follow them when attaching use the position control bypass switch (8).
the plough/plow. Especially when starting ploughing/plowing at
--- Set a suitable lowering speed (1) for the linkage headlands, momentarily using the bypass switch
with the tractor terminal, for example value 4. makes the plough/plow reach the correct depth
faster. In the same way, when stopping
--- Set a suitable raising speed (2) for the linkage with
ploughing/plowing at headlands, the plough/plow
the tractor terminal, for example value 4.
will remain at the correct depth until the end.
--- Set a suitable lifting height (3) for the plough/plow
--- It is recommended keeping the tractor terminal’s
with the tractor terminal, for example value 8.
drive balance control ON (9), and the engaging
--- Set a suitable value for draft control (4) with the speed must be low enough. In the same way, it is
tractor terminal, for example 8. recommended keeping the slip control ON (10).
--- Use the position control potentiometer (5) to When the linkage is raised all the way up at the
choose the correct ploughing/plowing depth, for end of a field, the drive balance control is
example value 4. After these adjustments the engaged, and when the linkage is lowered down,
plough/plow can be raised and lowered at the the slip control will be engaged.
ends of a field simply by pressing the
lift/stop/lower switch (6).
--- If the wheels slip too much, the draft control (4)
can be increased or select the next higher value
with the tractor terminal. When the slipping
decreases, reset the original draft control value.
--- If the lift and lower symbols lights sometimes light
slightly, set a larger value to the draft control (4).
Check the ploughing/plowing depth and adjust if
necessary with the position control
potentiometer (5).

---153--- F. Working instructions

 G. Lubrication and maintenance diagram
G 1. Maintenance
One of the most important requirements for the Lubricating grease fittings
reliability of your tractor is maintenance that is
performed correctly and at the right time. --- Clean the end of the nipples before lubricating.
Maintenance costs are small compared with the --- Pump in grease until the grease which has been
repair costs of malfunctions caused by neglect. The pressed out is clean (unless otherwise instructed).
most important maintenance is the one you yourself ---Wipe off the grease that has been pressed out.
as the operator perform on your tractor. This
--- Lubricate the bearings preferably unloaded while
maintenance includes all lubrication as well as
rotating the bearing in different positions.
inspections and adjustments.
The maintenance schedule provided in this
maintenance section is for normal driving conditions. G 1.2. Scheduled maintenance
For heavier duty, maintenance should be performed
The maintenance schedule begins with the running
on the tractor more often.
hour meter reading 0. This means that maintenance
scheduled at 500 h intervals is performed at meter
G 1.1. Carrying out the maintenance readings 500 h, 1000 h etc., even if the same
procedures were carried out at the daily and weekly
--- Always shut down the engine before carrying out maintenances. At the 1000 h maintenance, for
any maintenance procedures. example, the daily, weekly and 500 hour
--- Engage the parking brake to ensure that the maintenance procedures must also be undertaken.
tractor stays in place. On uneven terrain, put
wedges or similar under the wheels.
--- Clean the tractor before maintenance.
G 1.3. 100 hour service inspection
NOTE: Do not let fluids get into the electrical Your dealer gives a cost---free service inspection
equipment of the tractor when washing the (excluding oil and filter costs) to all new tractors after
machine. 100 hours running. Contact the nearest service
--- Clean the area surrounding the filling holes before agent to get the inspection done.
refueling or filling with oil.
The following procedures will be performed at a
--- Always check the impurities in the old oil when service inspection:
changing the oil and the filter.
A large amount of impurities (for example, a clogged 20 Engine
filter) may indicate a defect that must be repaired
immediately before any more serious damage is --- change oil and filter
caused. --- change fuel pre---filter
--- The tractor must be level when the oil level is --- change fuel filter
checked in order for the dipstick to give the correct
reading.
40 Power transmission
--- We recommend checking the amount of oil in the
morning when the oil is cold and has drained --- change power transmission suction filter
down into the oil sump.
--- Be careful with hot waste oil when changing the 60 Steering system and front axle
oil.
--- change oil in the differential
--- Be careful not to touch the engine’s exhaust
--- change oil in the hubs
manifold, turbocharger or other hot parts.
--- Clean the outside of the engine regularly. This
prevents a possible fire hazard. 90 Hydraulics
--- The fuel, lubricants and coolants used in the --- change hydraulics return and pressure filters
engine cause irritation over the long---term when in
contact with the skin. Other points of inspection
--- After maintenance, replace all covers.
---test drive, during which all gauges and functions
--- Dispose of the waste oil,--- fluids, used filters,
are checked. After the test drive the tractor is
batteries and the like in accordance with the
inspected for possible oil, coolant or fuel leakage.
regulations.

G. Lubrication and maintenance ---154---

diagram
 G 2. Filling table
The volumes include the volume of the filter.
Filling amount,
Location Valtra class SAE class API class when changed
(liters)
Valtra 10W/30: ---20˚C...+30˚C CG---4
Engine
Engine E 15W---40: ---10˚C...+40˚C CH---4 19
Power transmission
--- gearbox Shell Harvella T 10W---30 80
--- drive gears Shell Spirax AX 2 x 12
min 100
Valtra 32: ---30˚C...+30˚C
Hydraulics ISO VG 32 max 115
Hyrdraulic 46: ---10˚C...+40˚C
extra max 130
Front axle with
Front axle suspension 13
Valtra Axle 90 LS
--- differential Front axle without
suspension 12,5
--- hubs Shell Spirax AX 2 x 1,5
Front PTO (extra equipment) Shell Donax TX 3,7
Fuel tank Diesel fuel which conforms to EN 590 norm 620
water mixture + radiator solution (standard ASTM
Cooling system 35
D3306---86a or BS 6580:1985)
Brake oil reservoir Shell LHM S 0,5
Windscreen washing fluid
washing liquid---water mixture 3
reservoir
WARNING: To ensure perfect
functioning of the wet multidisc brakes,
use only oils approved by the
manufacturer.

G 2.1. Oil recommendations according to outdoor temperature

When starting the tractor in a warm garage, oil meant for warmer areas may be used.

10W---30

15W---40 / Hydraulic 46

Valtra Hydraulic 32

80W---90

---30˚C ---20˚C ---10˚C 0˚C +10˚C +20˚C +30˚C +40˚C

S G 1,1

---155--- G. Lubrication and maintenance

diagram
 G 2.2. Quality requirements of engine fuel
Property
Specific weight +15˚C, ISO 12185
Viscosity +40˚C, 445, ISO 31041
Sulphur content
Cetane number 4737
Water content
The fuel must conform to the EN 590 standard.
G 2.2.1. Fuel
--- The properties of light fuel oil that is only intended
for warming use do not meet the requirements of
modern diesel engines and cannot be used as
fuel.
--- In particular, distributor---type injector pumps re-
quire the fuel to have sufficient lubricity, because
they do not have oil lubrication in the same way as
typical multi---element pumps. Adding oil to diesel
fuel is not recommended, because it causes car-
bon build---up, and if oil is mixed with even a small
amount of water it will clog the filter.
--- Additionally, various fuel quality requirements im-
posed by taxation and seasonal changes have to
be taken into consideration.
G 2.2.2. Fuel storage
--- Storing and distributing fuel must be arranged in
conditions where no water or impurities can enter
the storage tanks. The storage tanks must be in-
stalled in a slanted position, so that water and
impurities are collected at the opposite end from
the suction pipe of the pump. The suction pipe of
the pump should not reach the bottom of the tank.
--- Water must be periodically drained from the tank
in order to prevent problems. Refueling at the
same time the tank is being refilled must be
avoided without exception.
--- When the tank is filled with winter---quality fuel in
good time, the engine is guaranteed to run flaw-
lessly during the cold season.
G. Lubrication and maintenance ---156---
diagram
Requirement Test standard
0,82...0,86 kg/liter ASTM D 4052, EN
1,2...4,5 mm2/s ASTM D
max. 0,2 p---% ASTM D 4294, ISO 8754
min. 51 ASTM D
max. 200 mg/kg ASTM D 1744
G 2.2.3. Filter system
--- The engine’s standard filter system gives sufficient
protection for the injection system from impurities
that can be present in well---tended distribution
systems.
--- The control of distributor---type injection pumps is
based on internal pressure, which will drop if the
fuel system is clogged. If the pilot pressure drops
too low, engine power is reduced, smoke in-
creased and starting becomes more difficult. Addi-
tionally, water in the injection system will destroy it
in a very short time. For this reason, the water
trap and the filters must always be serviced ac-
cording to the specified amount of running
hours.
--- It is also important always to use original Valtra (or
Sisu Diesel) fuel filters. They guarantee sufficient
filtration, preventing impurities from damaging the
fuel system. There are many cheap filter kits (so---
called pirates) on the market, with lower quality
and performance in order to minimise the cost.
Among other things, the quality and amount of
filter paper are often insufficient. There are also
often dangerous defects in the basic structure that
may cause expensive damage even in a short
period of time.
 G 2.3. Grease
Always use the following greases in Valtra tractors. based universal grease for vehicle use. It is
Each point requires it own type of grease. recommended for greasing chassis, water pumps,
pins etc.The grease is adhesive, protects against
Valtra Grease corrosion and resists water and varying
temperatures. Temperature range is ---20˚ ... +60˚C.
Universal grease

Lithium---based universal grease. Is suitable for

greasing all heavy machines.
---30˚ ... +130˚C
Universal grease of high quality, lithium based
grease for vehicle use. It is recommended for
greasing wheel bearings, chassis water pumps,
catepillar rollers etc. The grease is adhesive,
protects against corrosion and resists water and
varying temperatures. Temperature range is ---30˚ ...
+130˚C.
Valtra Calsium LF
Calsium Grease LF
Is suitable for greasing all heavy machines. Long
fibre grease. Colour red.
---20˚ ... +60˚C
Valtra Grease Moly
Moly Grease
Is suitable for greasing all heavy machines.
Lithium---based universal grease.
---30˚ ... +130˚C
Universal grease of high quality, lithium based
grease for vehicle use. It is recommended for
greasing wheel bearings, chassis water pumps,
catepillar rollers etc. The grease is adhesive,
protects against corrosion and resists water and
varying temperatures. Temperature range is ---30˚ ...
+130˚C.
Avoid repeating skin contact.
Protect nature and take care of empty packages.

Calsium LF is of long fibre, high quality and calsium

G 3. Maintenance schedule
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE---schedule
(according to operator’s manual) is recommended
for all tractors and specially for tractors, which have
more than 1000 running hours in one year. The
periodical maintenances from 50 hours onwards can
also be ordered from the authorized workshop. In
that case the periodical maintenance is carried out
by Valtra authorized and trained service personnel.
YEARLY MAINTENANCE---schedule should be
carried out by an authorized workshop, but for
tractors which have under 1000 running hours in one
year the operator has to carry out the normal service
routines according to the following table (like daily
and weekly periodic maintenance).
Observe when doing the services that if the tractor is
equipped with extra equipment like towing device,
air condition, air pressure brakes etc. the periodical
maintenances and checks for them must be carried
out. The extra equipment which needs servicing is
given in the end of this manual in section ”K”.

---157--- G. Lubrication and maintenance

diagram
Maintenance items are numbered starting from G 3.2. Weekly maintenance
number 1. The corresponding numbering is also
used later on in the detailed descriptions of the 5. Lubricate the three---point linkage and towing
scheduled maintenance, enclosed in parentheses device (towing devices are available as extra
after each maintenance item. equipment) 164
6. Lubricate the front axle assembly: 164
---Drive links 164
G 3.1. Daily maintenance ---Axle bearings of front axle without
Details suspension 165
on page ---Cylinder of front axle with suspension 165
1. Check the oil level in the engine 163 7. Check the oil level in the hydraulics 165
2. Check the coolant level, radiator grilles and 8. Check the tightness of belts (replace belts if
the front grilles of the engine cover 163 necessary) 166
3. Check for oil and fluid leaks 163 9. Check the fuel pre---filter 167
4. Empty the pressure air reservoir of water 164 10. Check the electrolyte level 167
11. Check tyre/tire pressures 167

5 11 7 9 1 8 6 11 6

11

11

5 4 11 10 2 11 6 2

SG7

G. Lubrication and maintenance ---158---

diagram
 G 3.3. Maintenance at 500---hour 19. Check the free travel of the brake pedals 171
intervals 20. Change the hydraulic pressure filter and return
oil filter (or if the filter indicator light is on) 171
Details 21. Check the oil level in the front axle and the
on page hubs 172
12. Check the oil level in the gearbox and the drive 22. Change the front PTO housing oil and wash
gear. Change the oil and the suction filter of the the filter (front PTO available as extra
transmission and drive gears first time after 500 equipment) 173
running hours and next at 1000 hours intervals. 23. Check the rubber clutches of the front PTO
After that change always at 1000--- hour (available as extra equipment) 173
interval. 168
The first front axle oil changes after 500 hours, see
13. Check the brake oil level 169
maintenance item 26.
14. Clean the cab air filters (more often if
needed) 169
NOTE: When carrying out maintenance, also
15. Check wheel nuts tightness 169
perform the procedures of earlier maintenance
16. Lubricate the front linkage (available as extra cycles. For example, when carrying out the 500
equipment) 169 hour maintenance you must also undertake the
17. Lubricate the pressure air brake (extra weekly and daily maintenance.
equipment) quick connectors 170
18. Change the engine oil and filter (or yearly), in
extremely dusty conditions at 250---hour
intervals 170

15 12 14 20 18 15 21 22

12

17

15 12 14 20 19 13 18 15 21 23 16

SG5

---159--- G. Lubrication and maintenance

diagram
 G 3.4. Maintenance at 1000---hour 34. Change the breather of the hydraulics
intervals or yearly housing 179
35. Tighten the fastening screws and lugs of the
24. Change the gearbox and drive gears oil and frame 179
the suction filter 174
25. Change the hydraulic oil 175
26. Change the oil in the front axle differential
Maintenance at 2000---hour
G 3.5.

and the hubs 176 intervals or every other year

27. Change the cab air filters and the 36. Change the coolant in the cooling system 180
re---circulation filter 177 37. Change the brake oil 181
28. Change the fuel filter and the pre---filter 177 38. Check the fuel system injectors 182
29. Change the engine air filter and the safety
NOTE: When carrying out maintenance, also per-
filter 178 form the procedures of earlier maintenance cycles.
30. Lubricate the teeth of the flywheel 178 For example, when undertaking the 2000 hour
31. Check and adjust the toe---in of the wheels 178 maintenance, you must also carry out the 1000
32. Clean the fuel tanks 179 hour, 500 hour, 250 hour, weekly and daily mainte-
33. Adjust the valves 179 nance.

24 27 32 24 25 30 34 28 29 31 26 36

24
25

24

24 27 32 37 36 33 31 26
38
SG6

G. Lubrication and maintenance ---160---

diagram
 H. Scheduled maintenance
H 1.
The maintenance instructions for the most common
extra and alternative equipment (the front linkage,
the front power take---off, the pressure ir brakes) can
be found in this chapter. For the maintenance
instructions for other extra and alternative
equipment, see the extra equipment part K at the
end of the guide.
NOTE: When washing the tractor it is forbidden
to use the pressure washer.
H 1.1. Air filters
1 tightness of the ejector pipe (1).
2
SH1
Change the main air filter (1):
--- at least once per year
--- after every 1000 operating hours
--- after 5 cleanings or after the warning light for the
air filter has been lit 5 times
Change the safety filter (2):
--- at least once per year
--- after every 1000 operating hours
Do not open the air filter housing unless
necessary. Open it only when performing
maintenance work described above. When
performing maintenance, check that the air filter
housing, pipes and connections are in a good
condition.
General
A
1
SH2
A low---pressure indicator and a warning light have
been connected to the air filter. When the indicator
light (A) on the instrument panel is lit, the filter must
be cleaned. If the indicator light is lit soon after
cleaning, even in dusty conditions, check the
Cleaning
Stop the engine while cleaning takes place. A
blocked filter causes a change in the engine beat or
increases smoke in the exhaust (which means loss
in power).
--- Check the filter housing and the suction inlet. If dirt
is found there, the filter is damaged or not fitted
correctly.
--- Clean the filter element either with a vacuum
cleaner or by blowing compressed air from the
inside, not straight on but at an angle, at a
maximum pressure of 500 kPa (5 bar).
NOTE: The filter can be cleaned for up to five
times, after which it must be replaced.
Alternatively it must be replaced at the latest after
every 1000 operating hours, when the safety filter
is replaced.
--- Check the cleaned filter element by holding it up to
the light (or shine a flashlight inside the filter).
--- If there is a hole in the filter, it must be immediately
replaced.
For installing the filter, see maintenance item 29 on
page 178.
---161--- H. Scheduled maintenance
 H 1.2. Front linkage/front PTO (extra the pressure regulator (1). It must be
cleaned/changed periodically (depending on the
equipment) operating conditions). The filter can be removed by
first detaching the tyre/tire inflation adapter (2).
1 The pressure regulator is equipped with an inbuilt
pressure relief valve that opens if the pressure rises
to 12---14 bar. This can be caused by, for example, a
damaged pressure relief valve, freezing or filter
blocked.

H 1.4. Maintenance position of the

front mudguards

SH3

Front PTO is equipped with a pump and an oil

cooler (1) inside the housing to prevent overheating.
The cooling system is also equipped with a relief
valve inside the housing for cold conditions.
1. Tighten the fastening screws after the first 15---25
operating hours. Regularly check the tightness of
the fastening screws and the tightness of the
hydraulic system. Contact the service department
if leaks are found.
2. When necessary the oil cooler (1) must be
cleaned to prevent the front PTO machinery from SH5
overheating.
The front mudguards can be turned to the side to
ease maintenance work. When turned back, the
H 1.3. Pressure air brakes mudguards snap into the holders for the driving
position.

SH4

There is a filter in the pressure air system, located in

H. Scheduled maintenance ---162---

 H 2. Daily maintenance
H 2.1. Check the engine oil level (1) H 2.2.1. Freezing point of the coolant
Check the freezing point of the coolant before the
start of the cold season. If the freezing point is too
high, remove some of the old coolant and add new.
Mix the fluid by running the engine and check the
freezing point again.
It is recommended changing the coolant every other
year.
2 CAUTION: Do not use just water as coolant.
1
H 2.2.2. Also check the radiator grilles
and clean if necessary

S H 74

The oil level must be between the marks on the

dipstick (1). If you must put in oil, pour it through the
filling hole (2) until the oil level reaches the high
mark. Before checking the oil, stop the engine and
let it stand still for a couple of minutes so that the oil
has time to drain down to the oil sump.
For oil grades see Filling table on page 155. 1

Check the coolant level,

H 2.2.
radiator grille and the front grille of
the engine cover (2)

2 1

S H 75

--- Remove the air guides from the sides of the radia-
tors. There is a gearbox oil radiator fastened in to
the right side air guide, remove also its closure
pin.
--- After this pull the gearbox radiator (1) to the side to
clean the radiator. To clean the other radiator side,
the gearbox radiator (1) has to be moved to the
SH7
other side.

There is a fluid level mark (1) in the other side of the
expansion tank where the fluid level should be when
cold. When hot, the fluid level is higher.
CAUTION: There is a drain hole under the water
pump. It should not be blocked. If fluid is
dripping from the hole, the seal is damaged and
must be replaced. In a new machine some
leakage may be possible until the pump settles
in.
Clean the radiators with compressed air, water spray
(do not use a pressure cleaner) or a soft brush (be
careful not to damage the radiator core). Spray in
the opposite direction to the air flow.
H 2.3. Check for oil and fluid
leakages (3)
Check that there are no leakages.

---163--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 Removing water from the
H 2.4. system daily by pulling the ring (1) on the right drive
gear, draining instuction sticker (2) is beside.
pressure air reservoir (4)

S H 85

Water must be removed from the pressure air

H 3. Weekly maintenance
Grease the three---point
H 3.1. Extra equipment
linkage and towing device (extra There are grease nipples in some towing devices as
equipment) (5) well. The various types of towing devices with their
maintenance instructions are described beginning
from page 217.

H 3.2. Lubricate the front axle

1 1
2 2 assembly (6)
Use Valtra Grease Universal.

H 3.2.1. Drive links

2 2

S H 10,1

Use Valtra Grease Universal.

Three---point linkage:
--- 1 top pins of the lifting cylinders, 2 nipples. S H 11
--- 2 levelling screws, 4 nipples. The lowest nipples
are under the levelling screws. 2 nipples in both links. Turn the wheels as far as they

H. Scheduled maintenance ---164---

will go when lubricating. H 3.3. Check the hydraulic oil
level (7)
H 3.2.2. Axle bearings of front axle
without suspension

S H 14

The same oil is used in the steering and the

S H 12 hydraulics.
The dipstick is located next to the cover of the
1 nipple in both bearings. hydraulics suction filter. The oil level must be
between the marks on the dipstick (1).
H 3.2.3. Cylinder of front axle with
suspension
2

S H 13
3 3
There is a nipple at the bottom end of the S H 81
suspension cylinder.
If oil is needed, connect a pump to the free return
connector (2) and pump oil into the system
(standard 1/2” male quick connector). In this way
the purity of the oil is ensured.
Check the oil level also after filling.
See the filling table (oil grades) on page 155.
Periodically drain the quick connector leakage
reservoirs (3).

---165--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 Check the tightness of the
H 3.4. H 3.4.2. Changing the belts
engine belts (change the belts if
necessary) (8) 4
There are two belts in the engine:
--- The fan and pressure air system compressor belt, 5
a wide multi---grooved belt with an automatic belt
tensioner.
--- The generator and air conditioner compressor
belt, with adjustable belt tension.

Adjusting the generator and air

H 3.4.1.
conditioning compressor belt
6
S H 17
1
3 When changing belts, remove the finger guards.
Additionally, the Visco fan (4) must be uncoupled
from the pulley (5) by opening the flange joint (6)
and the belts must be replaced from between them.
2

S H 16

The belt tension is suitable with a deflection of

7
approx. 10---15 mm.
--- Remove the left---side finger guard
--- Adjust the tightness of the belt by changing the
position of the air conditioning compressor (1)
S H 18
--- Loosen the compressor adjustment/attachment
locking nut (2)
When changing the multi---grooved fan belt loosen
--- Use the adjustment screw (3) to adjust the belt to the belt by turning the automatic belt tensioner (7)
a suitable tightness with a 1/2” wrench.
--- Tighten the locking nut (2)
--- Fasten the finger guard

H. Scheduled maintenance ---166---

 H 3.4.2.1. Models with front PTO
S H 19
For tractors equipped with front PTO, the flange (1)
between the power transmission axle and the belt
pulley must be removed to make sufficient room to
change the belt.
H 3.5. Check the fuel pre---filter (9)
2 some time after water has been added. Otherwise
1 with the battery acid before freezing.
S H 76
Drain the fuel pre---filter and empty into a container,
NOT ON THE GROUND, by slightly opening the
drain cock (1) at the bottom of the pre---filter.
Close the drain cock (1) when the filter is empty.
When necessary, drain water also from the fuel filter
by opening the drain cock (2) below it.
The fuel system bleeds air automatically due to the
electric feed pump. Air is bled from the fuel system,
if the ignition switch is held in 1--- position, when the
fuel pump is rotating for one minute at a time. If the
engine fails to start, move the ignition switch back to
the STOP position, bleed again in the position 1 and
start the engine.
If necessary, drain the water traps more often.
---167---
H 3.6. Check the electrolyte level (10)
S H 21
Open the battery case cover on the right side of the
cab. Remove the toolbox and turn the toolbox
bracket on top of the battery upright for the duration
of maintenance.
--- the electrolyte level should be 5---10 mm above
the cell plates
--- if necessary, add purified battery water
--- in no case add battery acid
--- do not use an open flame when checking the
battery
NOTE: Unusually high evaporation of the
electrolyte may be caused by the charging
voltage being too high. Keep the surface of the
battery clean and dry. Protect the battery and
cable terminals with grease.
During winter it is important that the tractor is run for
there is a danger of the water not having time to mix
WARNING:
Beware the electrolyte --- danger of
corrosion.
Also check the cleanliness of the cable and battery
terminals and clean them if necessary.
H 3.7. Check the air pressure in the
tyres/tires (11)
NOTE: Regularly check the tyre/tire pressures
and the tightness of the wheel nuts (also the
wheel disc/rim bolts, if the rims are adjustable).
See the pressures in the Technical Specifications
section on page 199).
H. Scheduled maintenance
 WARNING: If the tyres/tires are filled to When putting a tyre/tire back on a rim, use a
too high a pressure, there is a danger pressure limit of 250 kPa. This pressure should be
of explosion. enough to put the tyre/tire on the rim. If you do not
succeed in fitting the tyre/tire, remove it and find out
the cause. Once the tyre/tire is fitted onto the rim
We recommend that a tyre/tire shop specialising in correctly, fill it to the correct pressure.
handling heavy tyres/tires change the tyres/tires.
DANGER!
When welding the rims, the tyre/tire
must always be removed from the rim,
DANGER OF EXPLOSION!

H 4. Maintenance every 500 hours

Check the oil levels in the
H 4.1.
gearbox and the drive gears (12)
The first change of oil and the suction filter should
be performed after 500 hours. After that change
them after every 1000 hours, see service item 24 on
page 174.

S H 23

--- If necessary, fill oil by opening the plug at the rear

2 of the tractor on the right side of the power
1 take---off housing.
--- Let the tractor run for some time and check the oil
level again.

H 4.1.2. Drive gears

S H 22

H 4.1.1. Gearbox
--- Remove the dipstick (1) by rotating it
counter---clockwise and clean it.
--- Replace the dipstick in the hole, tighten it and
remove it again.
--- The oil level should be between the markings on
the dipstick (2). 4

S H 24

--- Remove the plugs (4) from both sides.

H. Scheduled maintenance ---168---

--- The oil level should be at the level of the lower damaged filter must always be replaced.
edge of the inspection hole.
NOTE: The air filter does not protect from
--- Fill with oil if necessary. chemicals.
--- Tighten the plugs (4).
Check the windscreen washing fluid levels in the
See the filling table on page 155. reservoirs (for both the front and rear windscreens).
Maintain an anti---freeze mixture during the cold
season.
H 4.2. Check the brake oil level (13)
H 4.4. Check the tightening torque of
the wheels (15)
NOTE: Regularly check the tightness of the
wheels (also the wheel disc/rim bolts. See the
Technical Specifications section on page 199).

H 4.5. Lubricating the front

linkage (16)
The front linkage is extra equipment.

S H 25 1
1

Check that the oil level is between the minimum and

maximum lines. Add oil if necessary, see the filling
table on page 155.
The brake oil level should be checked regularly. Use 2
only approved brake oil.
NOTE: Oil is used as brake fluid, see the filling 1 2
table on page 155.
1

H 4.3. Clean the cab air filters (14)

S H 27

Lubricate with Valtra Grease Universal:

--- 1 the lifting cylinder pins, 4 nipples.
--- 2 the lifting link axle, 2 nipples.

S H 26

Remove the cab air filters from both sides of the cab.
Clean the filters by tapping them against the palm of
your hand, vacuuming on the air intake side, or
preferably clean with compressed air (do not use
high pressure) by blowing against the direction of
the air flow. Also check the condition of the filters. A

---169--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 Lubricating the quick
H 4.6. H 4.7.2. Changing the filter
connectors of the pressure air
brakes (17)

1
S H 82

The pressure air brakes are available as extra equip- S H 30

ment.
1 --- Remove the old filter element (1) by rotating it.
Use Valtra Calsium LF grease to lubricate the rubber 2 --- Clean the spilled oil from the engine frame.
surfaces of the trailer brake quick connectors. The 3 --- Apply oil to the seal of the new filter and tighten
alternative is a Duo---Matic brake connector. the filter in place by hand
Check the tightness of the system. The system
should be sufficiently tight that the pressure will not
drop more than 0.15 bar in 10 minutes after the
engine is shut down (2%). If necessary, fix the leaks.

H 4.7. Change the engine oil and

filter (18) 2
In extremely dusty conditions, the oil and filters 3
should be changed every 250 hours.
If the amount of operating hours is low, the oil and
filters should be changed at least once per year.
S H 77
H 4.7.1. Changing the oil
Pour approved oil into the filling hole (2) until the oil
level reaches the MAX. marking on the dipstick (3).
See the oil grades in the Filling table on page 155.

H 4.7.3. Amount of oil

For oil grades see Filling table on page 155.
The amount of oil with filter installed to the top
marking is 19 l.
NOTE:
After changing the oil and the filter run the
engine and check for possible leaks. Then
recheck the oil level and fill with oil if necessary.

H 4.7.4. Breather pipe

S H 29 Always check that the pipe is open when changing
the oil.
With the engine warm drain the oil by removing the
plug from the engine’s oil pan while the tractor is
parked on a level surface.
Clean and tighten the plug.

H. Scheduled maintenance ---170---

 H 4.8. Check the free travel of the
brake pedals (19)

S H 34

If the indicator light is lit when the auxiliary

S H 32
The brakes are fluid operated. Usually it should not
be necessary to adjust the brakes. The free travel of
the brake pedals should be 30---40 mm when the
pedals are latched together. Adjust if necessary, see
the Checks and Adjustments section on page 190.
The parking brake is adjusted when the drive brakes
are adjusted.
hydraulics are used a lot, it is probable that the
return filter of the auxiliary hydraulics is blocked.
Check this by disconnecting the wires of the return
filter pressure sensor (1) and operating the machine.
If the indicator light remains off, the return filter is the
cause. Changing the return filter is sufficient in this
case.
H 4.9.1. Changing the return oil filter
1

Change the hydraulics

H 4.9. 3
pressure and return oil filters (20) 1

S H 33
4
If the filter indicator light is on, the filters must be S H 73
changed earlier.
NOTE: When changing the filter, maintain
absolute cleanliness.
--- Open the cover (1) by loosening the fastening
screws
---Pull the filter element (2) out of the hydraulic
reservoir

---171--- H. Scheduled maintenance

--- Open the fly nut (4) and install the new filter Check the oil levels in the
H 4.10.
element to the frame
front axle differential and the hub
--- Install the spring (3) between the filter element and
the cover reduction gears (21)
--- Install the cover (1) with fastening screws
H 4.10.1. Differential
H 4.9.2. Changing the pressure filter

S H 37

S H 36 The oil level should be at the level of the inspection

hole. Fill with oil if necessary (see oil grades in the
--- Place a container under the pressure filter and Filling table on page 155).
clean the area surrounding the filter. Unscrew the
filter and remove the filter element. H 4.10.2. Hub reduction gears
--- Wash the housing with fuel and install a new filter
(oil the seal before installing). Do not use the old
seal.
--- Screw the housing to a tightness of approximately
200 Nm with a wrench.
NOTE: The pressure filter must always be
changed when repairs are made to the hydraulic
system caused by dirt.

S H 38

Rotate the wheel until the oil level line on the

inspection hole is horizontal. The oil level should be
at the level of the inspection hole. Fill with oil if
necessary (see oil grades in the Filling table on
page 155).

H. Scheduled maintenance ---172---

 Changing the front PTO
H 4.11. H 4.12. Checking the rubber clutches
housing oil and washing the of the front PTO (23)
filter (22) The front PTO is extra equipment.
The front PTO is extra equipment.
140 Nm

10 7
1

1
2
5 1
4
3 2
6

S H 39 S H 40

--- Drain the oil by opening the plug (1) at the back of Check that there are no tears in the rubber clutches
the housing. (1) (2 clutches). If necessary, the rubber clutches
--- Remove the filter (2) by unfastening the locking must be changed. It is recommended letting
ring (3) and the end plate (4). authorised service staff perform the change.
--- Clean the filter (2) with fuel and dry it with --- If the operation is performed by the operator make
compressed air. sure that the clutch pieces (2) are straight (see
--- Install the filter (2) and the rest of the parts in the figure).
reverse order. Make sure that the O ring (5) goes
in the groove in the end plate.
--- Fill the housing with Shell Donax TX oil (at present
this is the only recommended oil; using other oil
may cause problems) (3.7 liters) to the level of
hole 6. The breather (7) can be removed for
bleeding air. Check that the breather is open at the
same time. The tractor must be level when oil is
put in.

---173--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 H 5. Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly
Change the gearbox and drive
H 5.1. H 5.1.2. Changing the suction filter
gears oil and the suction filter (24)
4
The oil must be at running temperature before it can 5
be drained. 2
1
3
H 5.1.1. Draining

5
2
S H 43

1
The gearbox suction filter (1) is located on the right
side of the gearbox.
---Remove the filter housing (2) and open the
bleeder---screw (3) to empty the filter.
S H 41
--- Replace the paper filter (1) with a new one every
time the oil is changed.
Remove all drain plugs of the drive gears (1) (2
--- The coarse filter, the valve protector strainer (4),
plugs) and
must be cleaned every time the oil is changed.
Check also that it is undamaged. If the strainer
mesh is damaged, replace it. After five cleanings it
is recommended that the coarse filter is replaced
with a new one.
--- Change new O rings (5) and install the suction
filter.

S H 42

the gearbox (2) and drain the oil into a container.

The drain plugs are located at the bottom of the
gearbox and the drive gears.
After draining has been completed, clean the drain
plugs and screw them back in.

H. Scheduled maintenance ---174---

 H 5.1.3. Filling H 5.1.3.2. Drive gears
For oil grades see Filling table on page 155.

H 5.1.3.1. Gearbox

S H 46

--- Fill both drive gears from the inspection holes to

S H 44
--- Fill oil by opening the plug at the rear of the tractor
on the right side of the power take---off housing.
the level of the bottom edge of the holes = 12
liters to both drive gears.
After the oil change, run the tractor in place before
starting off and press the brake pedals (also the
reverse drive brake pedals, if installed) to bleed air
from the brakes.

H 5.2. Change the hydraulic oil (25)

H 5.2.1. Draining

S H 45

--- Fill oil until the oil level is between the markings on
the dipstick (7) = approximately 80 liters.
--- Tighten the pump bleeder---screw (3).

1
S H 47

The oil must be at running temperature before it can

be drained.
--- Open the drain plug at the bottom of the hydraulic
reservoir (1).
--- After draining has been completed, clean the drain
plug and screw it back in.

---175--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 H 5.2.2. Filling H 5.3.Change the oil in the front axle
differential and the hub reduction
gears (26)
2
H 5.3.1. Changing the differential oil

S H 83

--- Fill the oil by connecting a pump to the free return

connector (2) (standard 1/2” male quick
connector) and pump in the oil. In this way you 2
can ensure the purity of the oil.
1

S H 50

Drain the oil through the drain plug (1). Clean and
close the plug. Pour in new oil from the inspection
3 hole (2) to the level of the bottom edge of the hole.
Amount of oil:
--- Front axle without suspension 12.5 l
--- Front axle with suspension 13 l
For oil grades see Filling table on page 155.
S H 49

The hydraulic oil dipstick is located next to the

H 5.3.2. Changing the hub reduction
suction filter cover. Normal filling to the dipstick’s (3) gear oil
minimum marking is 100 liters. Then 70 liters of oil
is available for the auxiliary hydraulics.
If more oil is needed for the auxiliary hydraulics, the
oil can be filled to the maximum marking (115
liters), at which point 85 liters of oil are available for
the auxiliary hydraulics.
If even more oil is needed for the auxiliary hydraulics
in special cases, the oil can be filled to the extra
maximum marking (130 liters), at which point 100
liters of oil is available for the auxiliary hydraulics.
Start the tractor and recheck the oil level.
For oil grades see Filling table on page 155.
NOTE: Change the hydraulic oil of implements
before connecting them to the hydraulics of a
new tractor. When changing the hydraulic oil of
the tractor, change the hydraulic oil of the
implements as well. S H 51

Turn the wheel until the plug is in the lowest position,

open the plug and drain out the oil. Turn the wheel
until the line on the inspection hole is horizontal and
pour in new oil to the level of the hole. Clean and
close the plug.

H. Scheduled maintenance ---176---

Amount of oil, 2 x 1.5 l. H 5.5. Change the fuel filter and the
For oil grades see Filling table on page 155. pre---filter (28)

H 5.4. Change the cab air filters and H 5.5.1. Changing the fuel filter
the recirculation filter (27)

H 5.4.1. Changing the air filter 1

S H 78

NOTE: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a

filter wrench.
--- Open the locking ring (1) and remove the filter
S H 52 element (2).
--- Install a new filter element. NOTE: the filter fits in
Remove the cab air filters from both sides of the cab one position only.
and replace them with new ones.
--- Screw the locking ring CLOSED (ON) until you
If necessary, the filters must be changed more often.
hear a clicking sound.

H 5.4.2. Changing the recirculation filter H 5.5.2. Changing the pre---filter

8 4

S H 53 5 S H 79

Remove the upper panel at the front of the roof. The

recirculation filter is located behind this panel.
Replace the filter with a new one. The filter must be
changed more often if necessary.
NOTE: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a
filter wrench.
--- Slightly open the drain cock (5) at the lower part of
the pre---filter (4) and drain the fuel into a
container, NOT ON THE GROUND.
--- If the bleeder---screw is opened (6) in the
pre---filter’s mounting frame, the fuel drains more
easily. After draining has been completed, close
the bleeder---screw.
--- Unfasten the water trap (7) from the pre---filter.

---177--- H. Scheduled maintenance

--- Open the locking ring (8) and remove the filter Installing the filters
element (4).
--- Make sure that the seals are not damaged
--- Install a new filter element. NOTE: the filter fits in
one position only. --- Make sure that the mating surfaces are clean
--- Screw the locking ring CLOSED (ON) until a --- Install the safety filter (2) carefully in place.
clicking sound is heard. --- Install the main filter (1) carefully in place.
--- Fasten the water trap to the lower part of the --- Install the air filter cover so that the ejector pipe (4)
pre---filter. is pointing down.
NOTE: Change the filters more often if necessary.
The fuel system bleeds air automatically due to the H 5.7. Lubricate the flywheel ring
electric feed pump. If the engine is not restarted, air gear (30)
is bled from the fuel system by holding the ignition
switch in position 1 when the fuel pump is rotating
for one minute at a time. If the engine fails to start,
move the ignition switch back to the STOP position,
bleed again in the position 1 and start the engine.

H 5.6. Change the engine air filter

and safety filter (29)

S H 57

2 1 There is a hole on the left side of the clutch housing

where you can lubricate it. Use a pressure grease
gun to apply grease to a couple of spots around the
3 gear ring, and the grease will then spread
4
throughout the entire gear. Use approximately 1 cm3
of Valtra Grease Moly.
S H 80

The main air filter (1) must be changed at 1000 H 5.8. Check and adjust the wheel
service---hour---intervals at the minimum when the toe---ins (31)
safety filter (2) is changed, unless it has already
been cleaned 5 times and changed earlier. Adjusting toe---ins, see section Checks and
The safety filter works as a backup filter in case the Adjustments on page 192.
main filter is damaged. The safety filter must not be
cleaned.
CAUTION The tractor must not be operated
without the safety filter in place.
Remove the safety filter (2) carefully so that dirt will
not get into the engine’s suction inlet.
--- Remove the air filter cover (3)
--- Remove the main filter (1)
--- Remove the safety filter (2)

H. Scheduled maintenance ---178---

 H 5.9. Clean the fuel tanks (32) is 0.35 mm. The adjustment can be performed when
the engine is cold or warm. Perform the adjustments
to the valve clearances of the desired cylinder in
injection order with the piston at the top dead centre
of the compression stroke.
It is recommended letting an authorised Valtra
service person perform the valve adjustment.

H 5.11.Change the breather of the

hydraulics housing (34)

S H 58

It is recommended that the fuel tanks (below the cab

on both sides of the frame) are cleaned before
winter. In this way you can avoid trouble caused by
water in the fuel system. The best method of
preventing water from condensing in the tanks is to
always keep them as full as possible. S H 84
--- Drain the tanks empty and flush them with clean
fuel. Close the drain plugs. When working continuously in dusty conditions the
--- Refill the tanks with new fuel (use a fine strainer breather must be changed more often.
when filling). Unscrew the old breather. Oil the seal of the new
CAUTION: breather and screw the breather in by hand.
Mixing spirits in the fuel is absolutely forbidden
under all circumstances, because it may cause
the fuel to congeal and thus block the filter. At the H 5.12. Tighten the fastening screws
same time it reduces the lubrication properties of and nuts of the frame (35)
the fuel.
It is recommended that the tightness of the fastening
screws and nuts of the frame should be checked
H 5.10. Adjust the valves (33) every 1000 hours.

S H 59

The clearance for both the intake and exhaust valves

---179--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 H 6. Maintenance every 2000 hours or every other year
H 6.1. Change the fluid in the cooling
system (36)
If there are malfunctions in the cooling system, the
entire system may have to be cleaned thoroughly.
Carry out the following operations.
3
Clean the cooling system using commercial
substances designed for this purpose, following the
manufacturer’s instructions closely.

H 6.1.1. Draining
Always shut down the engine before draining.
S H 63
1
--- Open the water drain plug (3) of the cylinder
group, next to the fuel pre---filter.

S H 61

--- Open the cap of the expansion tank (1). The cap 4
must be opened carefully.

S H 64

--- Also open the drain plug (4) in the oil cooler on the
right side of the engine.

S H 62

--- Remove the air guide from the left side of the
radiators.
--- Attach a hose to the radiator drain cock (2), place 5
the other end in a container and open the cock.

S H 65

--- Open the drain plug (5) in the lower part of the
water pump.
--- Also turn the heater control to the open position.

H. Scheduled maintenance ---180---

 H 6.1.2. Filling H 6.2. Change the brake oil (37)
Dilute the anti---freeze coolant following the
manufacturer’s instructions.

Before filling, close:

--- The radiator drain cock (2)
--- The drain plug of the cylinder group (3)
--- The drain plug of the oil cooler (4)
--- The drain plug of the water pump (5)

S H 25

It is recommended that the brake oil be changed

every other year or at 2000 hour intervals.

6 NOTE: Oil is used as brake fluid, see Filling table

S H 66
--- Open the bleeder plug (6) in front of the
thermostat housing for the duration of filling. Pour
in fluid from the filling hole of the expansion tank
until the fluid level in the system reaches the air
vent. Close the bleeder plug (6).
on page 155.
--- Drain the brake oil reservoir, open the
bleeder---screws and pump the pedals until the
pipes and the cylinders have been emptied of oil.
It is recommended running hoses from the
bleeder---screws to a suitable container.
--- Refill the system with new oil.
---Bleed air from the brakes (see the Checks and
Adjustments section on page 190).
Amount of oil 0.5 l.

8 9

S H 67

--- Fill the expansion tank (8) to the fluid level mark
(9). The mark is on the other side of the tank.
The volume of the cooling system is 31.5 l
Make sure that the radiator always contains coolant
that meets the specifications.
CAUTION: Do not pour cold fluid into a hot
engine, and do not use just water or undiluted
anti---freeze solution as coolant.
After changing the coolant, let the engine run for a
while and check the coolant level.

---181--- H. Scheduled maintenance

 H 6.3. Checking the fuel system
injectors (38)

S H 69

When using biodiesel, the injectors should be

checked at 1000---hour intervals.
The correct running of the engine requires that the
injectors are in good working condition. It is
recommended letting an authorised Valtra service
staff perform their maintenance and service.
What are the indicators of a dirty or defective
injector?
---Cylinder knock indicates that the injector is not
working correctly. Knocking may be heard when
the engine is running idle and is cold, but if
knocking is heard from an engine running at a
normal running temperature, the cause is most
likely in the injectors. Air in the fuel system may
also cause knocking.
--- A smoky exhaust is another indication of an
injector that is not working correctly (unless the
smoke is caused by other reasons, such as a
blocked air filter).

H. Scheduled maintenance ---182---

 I. Checks and adjustments
The checking and adjusting instructions for the most
common extra and alternative equipment can also
be found in this section. For the checking and
I 1.
I 1.1. Bleeding air from the fuel
system
S I 27
To ensure correct function, there should be no air in
the fuel system. Because of the electric feed pump
(1), the system automatically bleeds air from the
filters and the injection pump when the ignition
switch is in the 1--- position.
Allow air to bleed automatically from the system
every time the system has been opened or fuel has
run out during driving (in order to avoid a long
starting time). See changing fuel filters, service item
28 on page 177.
adjusting instructions for other extra and alternative
equipment, see the extra equipment part K at the
end of the guide.
Engine
I 1.2. Air filter
S I 26
The air filter prevents dust and other impurities from
getting into the engine with intake air. Engine wear is
largely dependent on the cleanliness of intake air.
For this reason it is important that the air cleaner is
checked regularly and serviced correctly.
CAUTION: The safety filter inside the main filter
must not be cleaned. It must always be replaced
according to the scheduled maintenance
programme/program. The function of the safety
filter is to prevent the engine from being
damaged if the main filter is damaged.
---183--- I. Checks and adjustments
 I 1.2.1. Air filter maintenance
SI3
The air filter can be cleaned at most five times, after
which it must be replaced. During cleaning, check
that the filter and its seals are undamaged. A
damaged filter must always be replaced.
NOTE: Do not remove or clean the filter unless
necessary. Every time the filter is removed, there
is a chance of impurities getting into the engine’s
suction system.
Cleaning the filter
When cleaning the filter, use clean and dry
compressed air with pressure not higher than 500
kPa (5 bar).
SI4
1. Direct the compressed air flow from the inside out
along the filter folds. Blow the compressed air
from a distance of approximately 3---5 cm.
2. Then blow the exterior surface of the filter with
compressed air along the folds, and once more
after this from the inside out, still along the folds.
3. Use a light to check the filter and its sealing
surfaces. Change the filter if it has holes or other
damage.
NOTE: See maintenance instructions on
I. Checks and adjustments ---184---
page 161.
I 1.3. Cooling system maintenance
SI5
In order for the cooling system to function properly,
the following procedures should be followed:
--- check the coolant level (maintenance
programme/program, section 2 on page 163)
--- check the condition of the fan belt (maintenance
programme/program, section 8 on page 166); the
belt is automatically tensioned.
--- periodically clean the radiator core with
compressed air.
I 1.3.1. Coolant
The tractor manufacturer fills the cooling system with
a mixture of water and anti---freeze solution. The
anti---freeze solution also prevents rust from forming
inside the cooling system. However, the
rust---preventive properties of the solution are
reduced with time. For this reason it is important to
change the coolant at regular intervals. We
recommend using a mixture of half anti---freeze
solution and half water. But, see the solution
manufacturer’s instructions (maintenance
programme/program, section 36).
 I 2. Electrical system
I 2.1. Battery checking and
maintenance
SI6
--- Use a hydrometer to check the battery charge. The
specific gravity should be 1.23 at minimum.
--- Make sure that the tension of the belt of the battery
charging generator is correct.
--- Keep the battery clean. It can be cleaned with
warm water. The battery must be removed from
the tractor for washing (the negative cable must
always be disconnected first).
--- Dry all surfaces after cleaning and apply
multi---purpose grease to the battery and cable
terminals.
--- Secure the battery firmly in place (connect the
positive cable first).
---185---
WARNING:
Avoid sparks and open flame in the
vicinity of the battery, because highly
explosive hydrogen gas evaporates
from the battery.
Beware the electrolyte --- danger of
corrosion.
I 2.2. Alternator
The tractor is equipped with a negative---grounded
alternator. It can be damaged, if a faulty connection
is made in the electrical system. An incorrect
connection (such as connecting the battery the
wrong way) can burn out the rectifiers of the
alternator. The charging circuit must not be opened
while the engine is running.
I 2.3. Precautions when servicing the
electrical system
--- always connect the battery correctly
---always disconnect the negative cable first and
connect it last
--- do not cut power or disconnect wire connections
while the engine is running
--- when the generator is removed, the negative cable
of the battery must be disconnected
--- remove the covers when charging the batteries to
prevent the collection of highly explosive gases.
WARNING:
The battery leads (negative first), the
alternator wiring and the engine
management multipole connector have
to be disconnected before arc welding
is carried out on the tractor or an
implement which is attached to it.
I. Checks and adjustments
 2

S I 31

The engine management multipole connector (1) is I 2.4. Fuses

located behind the engine electric power center.
--- First disconnect the electric power center by
pulling the lower part and after that the upper part
from its rubber---mounted brackets.
--- To disconnect the connector turn the locking
device (2) upwards and the connector will open.
By re---connecting turn the locking device back to
the locking position ( in the picture the locking
device is in the open position).
--- Finally fasten the electric power center in place in
reverse order.
NOTE: If the battery cable will be disconnected
from the tractor, the tractor terminal has to be
turned off/switched off, before disconnecting the
cables. (details see turning off the tractor terminal
page 87). SI7
Never run the engine with the generator cables
disconnected. Always keep both, the fuse box of the cab in the
Never attempt to connect any additional electrical lower part of the right side of the control panel (in
equipment, because this may damage existing the picture) and the engine fuse box left, clean.
components in the electrical system. There are 48 fuse holders in the cab box and in the
engine box 12 pcs. Their rated current is 5---30 A.
When a fuse is blown, you must find the malfunction
that caused it. Do not replace a fuse with one
which is of a higher voltage than normal, because
this causes a risk of damage to the electrical
equipment.

I. Checks and adjustments ---186---

 I 2.4.1. Cab fuse list F19 30 MIRROR HEATING
F20 15 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
The fuse diagram in which the fuse locations are F21 10 CAB AND STEP LIGHT
marked is placed at the rear part of the fuse box co- F22 25 ISO---CURRENT SOCKET
ver.
L15 --- (=ELECTRIC AFTER STARTER SWITCH)

Fuse/Max A
F23 5 FRONT LOADER, RELEASE THE BUCKET
(EXTRA EQUIPMENT)
F24 10 WORK HYDRAULICS, VALVE BLOCKS
Y1D---Y7D
F25 5 DIGI---INPUT OF THE CONTROL
F26 7.5 FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION A1F, S1F; S2F
F27 25 AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER
F28 10 DIRECTION INDICATORS
F29 15 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS (not Sweden)
F30 RESERVED
F31 RESERVED
F32 RESERVED
F33 5 NSTRUMENTATION A1P, INDICATOR
LIGHTS, PSD---DISPLAYS (P6, P1W), B9E,
B2C
F34 10 WINDSCREEN WIPER + WASHER, HORN
F35 5 LINKAGE CONTROL A1E, (F1E), B8
F36 15 TRAILER HITCH Y23, WORKING
HYDRAULICS CHANGE Y24, Y25
F37 10 MC---CONTROL A1A, UC2---CONTROL
A1H (RIGHT SIDE PANEL)
F38 15 AIR SUSPENSION SEAT/HEATING
F39 5 TRACTOR TERMINAL A1T,
F40 10 BRAKING LIGHTS
F41 15 SUPPLY TO THE FUSES F45 AND F46
F42 7.5 GEARBOX CONTROL A1Z (F1ZF)
SI8 F43 10 REAR WINDOW WIPER + WASHER,
MIRRORS + RADIO
F44 7.5 ARM REST A1S
L30 --- (=DIRECT BATTERY CURRENT, AFTER F45 RESERVED
MAIN SWITCH) F46 7.5 CAN --- BRIDGE A1X, CAN --- BRIDGE
2/CC /ISO 11786 ADAPTER A2X
Fuse/Max A F47 RESERVED
F 1 20 FRONT WORKING LIGHTS E13, E14 AND F48 RESERVED
REAR WORKING LIGHTS E31, E3
F 2 15 LOW BEAM BAT --- (=CONTINUOUS, BEFORE MAIN SWITCH,
F 3 15 PARKING LIGHTS SUPPLY, LOW--- AND from the engine room fuse F11)
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
Fuse/Max A
F 4 10 CIGARETTE LIGHTER
F 5 10 FRONT SIDE WORKING LIGHTS E29, 30 F13 5 RADIO, CLOCK, CAB AND STEP LIGHT
F 6 20 FRONT WORKING LIGHTS E33, 34 AND DELAY
REAR WORKING LIGHTS E11, E12 F16 5 TT (A1T) MEMORY, ELECTRIC MAIN
F 7 10 LINKAGE CONTROL A1E, (F2E) SWITCH CONTROL, (MEMORY
F 8 20 FRONT WORKING LIGHTS E35, E36 AND ELECTRIC), WORKING LIGHT CONTROL,
REAR WORKING LIGHTS E9, E10 CAN---BRIDGES
F 9 15 TRAILER SOCKET F29 15 HAZARD LIGHT (NO SWEDEN)
F10 15 STARTER SWITCH
OTHERS;
F11 15 REAR WORKING LIGHT FOR IMPLEMENT
MOUNTING AND ROTATING ROOF Fuse/Max A
LIGHT F14 5 PARKING LIHGTS, RIGHT
F12 15 HIGH BEAM F15 5 PARKING LIHGTS, LEFT, WORKING LIGHT
F17 10 DIN---CURRENT SOCKET. ISO---CURRENT CONTROL A1V
SOCKET
F18 7.5 GEARBOX CONTROL A1Z (F2ZF)

---187--- I. Checks and adjustments

 I 2.4.2. Electric power center A4 in the engine room

S I 28

The electric power center is situated on the engine

left side, including the following fuses:
F1 10 AUXILIARY RELAY OF THE GRILL (AFTER
THE MAIN SWITCH CONTROL)
F2 10 THE FUEL FEED PUMP (AFTER THE MAIN
SWITCH CONTROL)
F3 RESERVED
F4 RESERVED
F5 RESERVED
F6 RESERVED
(F7) 30 ISOBUS 11783 SUPPLY (FROM BATTERY)
(F8) 15 ISOBUS 11783 ECU PWR SUPPLY (FROM
BATTERY) S I 30
F9 25 EEM2/VP44 PUMP SUPPLY (FROM BAT-
TERY) F 52 250A GRID HEATER 2.1 kW (COLD START
F10 10 EEM2 SUPPLY ELECTRIC RESISTANCE)
F11 15 BAT + SUPPLY TO CAB FUSES F13, F16, The fuse is situated on the engine left side, in the
F29 (FROM BATTERY) electric cable mountings.
F12 RESERVED (FROM BATTERY)
When continuous power is required, for example for
Fuses outside of the fuse boxes an implement, lighting etc., you can take the power
from the power connectors in the cab and the rear of
the tractor (see page 72).

S I 29

F 50 250A CAB SUPPLY

Fuse F 50 is situated in the cab supply cable,
between battery and frame. To change the fuse the
cover has to be detached.

I. Checks and adjustments ---188---

 I 2.5. Headlamp adjustment If the tractor is equipped with raised headlamps (on
top of the cab), the lights must be adjusted so that
The correct adjustment of headlamps is important the beam lights an area to a distance of 30 m on a
especially when you have to drive on public roads. level surface.
The lights can be quickly and accurately adjusted
optically at a service station or a repair workshop. If
an optical device is not available, you can adjust the
lights according to the picture.
Before adjusting the lights, check that the tractor is
under a normal load and that the tyre/tire pressures
are correct. The upper edge of the low beam light
pattern should be at height H when the tractor is at
distance L. The distance between the light spots of
the high beams should be B. If necessary, use the
three adjustment screws to align the headlamps.

S I 11

Dimensions: L = 5 m
B = distance between the centres of
the headlamps
H = the height of the headlamps from
the ground minus 50 mm

---189--- I. Checks and adjustments

 I 3. Brake system
I 3.1. Adjusting the free travel of the I 3.3. Bleeding air from the brake
brake pedals system
When the brake oil used by the pedals is changed,
air must be bled from the system from several
3 locations, beginning with the lowest bleed nipples.
2 NOTE: Check that the brake oil reservoir is full
before bleeding air.
The brake pedals must be unlatched when air is
bled from the brakes. If the tractor is also equipped
with reverse drive equipment, air must be bled from
the reverse drive brake pedals after the front brake
pedals using each bleed nipple.
3 Bleeding speed can be increased by first letting the
2 brake oil run through the system, keeping the bleed
nipple open and pouring brake oil into the reservoir.

I 3.3.1. Bleeding air from the pressure

1
S I 12 air brake valve

The free travel of the brake pedals should be 30---40

mm when the pedals are latched together.
When the parking brake is fully released, the brake
lever (1) should not be under tension. If necessary,
adjust as follows:
--- Make sure that the tractor cannot move by itself.
--- Adjust the brake caliper mechanisms located on
top of the drive gears under the rear of the cab.
Both brakes are adjusted separately. 2 3
--- Loosen the locking nut (3).
--- Tighten the nut (2) to 10 Nm and loosen it two full
turns. 1
--- Tighten the locking nut (3) to 80 Nm.
--- Cover the locking nut (3) with sealing wax.
--- Check that the brake action is the same on both
wheels while driving with the pedals latched
together.
S I 13
Check the free travel of the pedals.
If the tractor is equipped with pressure air brakes as
extra equipment, start bleeding the air from the
I 3.2. Parking brake trailer brake valve.
The parking brake utilises a spring---return pressure The brake valve (1) is located over the right---side
cylinder that affects the drive brake linkage. drive gear next to the pressure air reservoir. The
Adjustments made to the drive brakes also affect the brake pedal bleed nipples for the left pedal (2) and
parking brake. the right pedal (3) are located on the left and the
The adjustment has been made at the factory and right in the driving direction.
no readjustment is necessary (unless parts have
been changed). Bleed the air as follows:
--- press the brake pedal while opening the brake
The reverse drive brakes, available as extra bleeder valve on the side of the brake being bled.
equipment, are adjusted at the same time as the Before fully depressing the brake pedal and
drive brakes. opening the bleed nipple, pump the pedal a few
times to build up pressure in the system.

I. Checks and adjustments ---190---

--- with the pedal depressed, close the bleed nipple
and release the pedal.
--- continue in this manner until the oil draining from
the bleed nipple is completely airless.
--- do the same for the other brake pedal.
--- after bleeding the air, check the brake oil level in
the reservoir.
I 3.3.3. Bleeding air from the brake
boosters
Finally bleed air from the brake boosters. The brake
boosters are located on top of the drive gears.
Bleed air from the system in the same manner as
above with the pressure air brake valve.

I 3.3.2. Bleeding air from the fluid brake

valve
The trailer fluid brake valve is extra equipment.

5 6

4
8

S I 15

--- The bleed nipple (8) of the left---side booster is

located at the rear end of the booster in the driving
direction (the thinner end).
S I 14

The trailer fluid brake valve (4) is located on top of

the left drive gear. The brake pedal bleed nipples for
the left pedal (5) and the right pedal (6) are located
on the left and the right in the driving direction (do
not open the bleed nipple between these two bleed
nipples).
Bleed air from the system in the same manner as
above with the pressure air brake valve.

S I 16

--- The bleed nipple (9) of the right---side booster is

located at the front end of the booster in the
driving direction (the thinner end).
Do not open the bleed nipples at the other end of
the boosters or in the actual brake calipers. Gearbox
oil circulates in them. They do not need to be
opened even when gearbox oil is changed; the
system bleeds air by itself when the engine is
running and the pedals are being pumped.

---191--- I. Checks and adjustments

 I 4. Steering system
I 4.1. Toe---in adjustment
A
A+0---3 mm
S I 17
Before adjustment, check that there is no play in the
ball joints of the steering arms and the tie rod. The
wheels must be centred during adjustment.
I 4.1.1. Checking
Make marks on the rear inner sides of both front
tyres/tires level with the hubs. Measure the distance
between the marks. Drive the tractor forward until
the marks are at the inner front side of the tyres/tires.
Measure the distance between the marks again.
When correctly adjusted, this distance is 0---3 mm
larger at the back of the tyres/tires than at the front.
I 4.1.2. Adjustment
1 2
S I 18
In order not to limit steering movement, both tie rods
must be adjusted (both tie rods must be of the same
length after the adjustment).
Loosen the tie rod locking nut (1) and turn the
adjustment screw (2) in the desired direction.
I. Checks and adjustments ---192---
Perform the measurement described above and
tighten the locking nut (1) once the correct distance
has been achieved.
I 4.2. Steering angle adjustment
1 2
S I 19
CAUTION: With narrow track widths and certain
tyres/tires, or when a front loader is attached,
make sure that the wheels do not come into
contact with the frame or the loader. To prevent
this, the hubs are equipped with stop screws
locked with nuts.
If necessary, adjust by loosening the locking nut (1)
and turning the screw (2) in the required direction.
After adjusting, tighten the locking nut (1).
NOTE: Adjust the screws on both sides to the
same length so that the steering angle is the
same on both sides.
I 4.3. Track width adjustment
Every time you adjust the track width (by moving
the tyres/tires from one side to the other) or
change the tyres/tires, you must check/adjust the
steering angles at maximum articulation of the
front axle in both directions. When using chains,
check also that the distance between the tyre/tire
and the cab is not less than 80 mm. Additionally,
you must check that the distance from the
parking lights to the outer edge of the tyre/tire is
not more than 400 mm.
The track widths of both front and rear wheels are
adjusted in the same way.
Two alternative track widths can be attained with a
set of fixed wheel rims by moving them to the other
side.
--- Before adjusting, prevent the tractor from moving,
for example by placing wedges under the front
wheels (rear wheels) and raising the rear (front) of
the tractor up on sturdy blocks.
--- Make sure that the tyre/tire pattern points forward
(when looked from above).
--- When fastening the wheels, lubricate the screws
and tighten them to the correct tightness. The
fastening screws must also be retightened after
the tractor has been used for some time (see
tightening torques in the Technical Specifications
section on page 199).
--- Every time you adjust the track width or change
the tyres/tires, you must check/adjust the steering
angles at maximum articulation of the front axle in
both directions.
Track width can be adjusted by changing the
position of the wheel rim in relation to the central
disc or by moving the wheels to the other side.
You can find the track width options in the Technical
Specifications section on page 200.

I 4.3.1. Front axle

14.9R38

2285 2179 2077 1971 1885 1779 1677 1571

S I 20

The standard track widths are underlined. 1. Loosen the hub from the axle

I 4.3.2. Rear axle

2
I 4.3.2.1. Adjusting the continious track B B
A
width, bar---axle
The track width of the Bar---axle can be adjusted 1 3
infinitely by moving the position of the wheel hub of
the tyres/tires on the axle.

NOTE: When driving on the public roads with

wide track widths you must follow the orders for
the over wide transports.
4 6

A
B B
5
S I 21

--- Loosen the wheel from the hub, screws A

--- Loosen the shield plugs from the drawing
holes (B)
--- Loosen the locking screws 1, 3, 4and 6
--- Loosen the fastening bolts 2 and 5 ca 45 --- 50 mm

---193--- I. Checks and adjustments

--- Install the screws in the drawing holes (A) for the --- install the key (D) without grooves into the flange
keys (E) and align the holes of the screws 1, 2 and 3.
--- Turn the drawing hole screws in turn to loosen the --- Install the screws 1, 2 and 3 with the base plates
keys from the flange. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS YET.
--- Turn the axle until the key slot is upwards.
2. Fasten the hub to the axle --- Ensure, that the band (F) is correct in the axle
groove. Install the key with the groove (G) into the
E shaft disc (E) and focus the holes for 4, 5 and 6.
2
--- Install the screws 4, 5and 6 with base plates.
D DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS YET.

1 3

4
6

G
5 F
S I 22

--- All the dirt, grease or extra paint has to be

removed from the axles. All the parts have to be
clean, dry and oilless by adjusting.

3. Adjustable rim

2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600

1999 1753
1

2090 1854
2
520/85R46
2207 1958
3

2311 2062
4

2408 2159
5

2512 2263
6
2
2540 2362
7

2540 2471
8 1

S I 32

I. Checks and adjustments ---194---

 4. Fixed rim

2300 2052

2422 2174
650/65R38

2316 2068

2
650/65R42
2406 2158 520/85R42
580/70R42

2337 2089

710/70R42

2385 2137

S I 34

--- The adjusting areas for the track widths for
different tyres/tires and rims will be found in the
pictures above
The standard track widths are underlined.
Maximum track width:
--- When using the twin wheels and the wide
bar---axles (tractor width 3000 mm from the axle
end); with the outer wheels 3300 mm and inner
wheels 2540 mm
C = 225

C = 450

S I 35

S I 33
--- Move the hub to the minimum track width
positionaccording to the picturei. Tighten the
---With one tyre/tire 2540 mm
flange/keyparts with screws so tight, that it cannot
move on the axle.

---195--- I. Checks and adjustments

--- Place a plate on the axle end and measure the
axle end distance (C) from the mounting flange.In
the corresponding version it has to be according
to the picture.
--- Subtract from the track width value the desired
minimum track widht value of the version in
question.
(t.eg. value desired 2032 mm = 80”and the
adjustable rim version 3, 2032---1958 = 74 mm)
--- Subtract the resultant value from the flange
distance value of the hub construction in question
and set the flange this distance from the axle end.
(type 2, 225---74 = 151)
(type 1, 450---74 = 376)
I 5. Storing the tractor
I 5.1. Storing the tractor
For less than 2 months
No special procedures are required, if:
--- The tractor has been regularly maintained
--- The tractor is clean
--- The freezing point of the coolant has been
measured
--- The fuel tank is full
---The battery has been stored
--- The air conditioning is used at least once per
month for approx. 5 min. at a time
For more than 2 months
--- Clean the exterior and perform general lubrication
--- Clean the fuel tanks
--- Fill the tank with fuel
--- Change the fuel system pre---filter
--- Change the fuel filter
--- Clean the air filter
--- Change the engine oil and oil filter
--- Measure the freezing point of the coolant and the
charge level of the battery
--- Run the engine until it reaches a normal running
temperature and drive the tractor for a while
--- Lower the lifting device (lifting devices) all the way
down
---Remove the injectors and pour approx. l dl of
preserving oil into each cylinder
--- Crank the engine only a couple of revolutions
--- Replace the injectors. Use new seals.
I. Checks and adjustments
--- Set tape to the axle rear edge of the flange.
--- Tighten the screws ca 70 Nm step by step in the
following order 2, 1, 3 and 5, 4, 6 to the final
tighteness 550 Nm.
--- Install the shield plugs to the drawing holes of the
keys.
THE KEYPARTS DO NOT NECESSARY HAVE TO BE
QUITE AT THE SAME LEVEL AFTER THE FINAL
TIGHTENING.
NOTE: Check the tightening of the screws after
30 minutes and always at 100 hours intervall.
--- Remove the battery, clean it and store it in a cool,
dry place at an even temperature. Recharge the
battery approx. every 2 months.
--- Loosen the battery charging generator/air
conditioner compressor belt
--- Protect parts susceptible to corrosion with
preserving oil
--- Cover the opening of the exhaust pipe with plastic
foil
--- Use the air conditioning at least once per month
for approx. 5 min at a time
I 5.2. Removing the tractor from
storage
After less than 2 months of storage
--- Install a fully charged battery
--- Check the oil and fluid levels and tyre/tire
pressures
--- Perform a general lubrication
--- Pour approx. 0.2 l of engine oil into the
turbocharger’s bearing housing from the pressure
oil pipe fitting
--- Start the engine but do not race it.
--- Test drive the tractor to make sure that all
equipment functions correctly.
After more than 2 months of storage
---Remove protective coverings
--- Remove protective greases
--- Tighten the battery charging generator/air
conditioner belt
--- Remove the upper valve gear housings and
lubricate the valve gears with engine oil
---196---
--- Check the oil and fluid levels and tyre/tire
pressures
--- Install a fully charged battery
---Pour approx. 0.2 l of engine oil into the
turbocharger’s bearing housing from the pressure
oil pipe fitting
--- Start the engine but do not race it.
---Test drive the tractor to make sure that all
equipment functions correctly.

---197--- I. Checks and adjustments

 J. Technical specifications
The technical specifications for the most common extra and alternative equipment are in this chapter. For
the technical specifications of other extra and alternative equipment, see the extra equipment part K at the
end of the guide.

J 1. Dimensions and weights

Dimensions (mm) S240, S280
With front tyres/tires 460/85R30
With rear tyres/tires 520/85R42
Length 5100
Width 2500
Width with the stepless adjustable
type 1, 3000
rear axles (bar---axles) from the axle
type 2, 2548
end
Height to the top of the roof 3400
Height to the end of the exhaust 3400
Wheel base 3082/31073)
Clearance under the front axle 560
Clearance under the rear axle 520
3) Front axle with suspension

Weight kg S240, S280

With tyres/tires 520/85R42
Total weight (with full tank, without
8800
ballast weights)
Front axle weight (%) 3780 (43)
Rear axle weight (%) 5020 (57)
The weights are also valid for a front axle with hydraulic suspension.
Weights may vary depending on the equipment fitted to the tractor.

J 2. Maximum allowed weights for the front and rear axles, kg

Regardless of any limitations due to tyres/tires, with standard track width.

Tractor S240, S280

at the front max 40 km/h 6000
max 7 km/h 7600
at the rear, max 40 kph 10000
total weight, max 40 kph 14000

J. Technical specifications ---198---

J 3. Tyres/tires (tyre/tire options in pairs)
Rear Front S240, S280
650/85R38 600/70R30 X
650/65R42 540/65R30 X
520/85R42 460/85R30 X
580/70R42 480/70R30 X
710/70R42 600/70R30 X 1
520/85R46 14.9R38 X 2

Always contact your district dealership when changing tyres/tires to ensure the correct gear ratio. When
changing tyres/tires or adjusting track width, always check that the tyres/tires will not come into contact with
the side covers. Limit steering movement if necessary.
1) This tyre/tire combination exceeds the maximum width of 2500 mm, rendering it invalid for EU homologa-
tion.
2) For row crop cultivation

NOTE: On the traffic tractors 50 km/h the tyre/tire loadings are smaller. Check from the tyre/tire manu-
facturer’s catalogue/catalog.

J 3.1. Wheel nuts, tightening torque

---Wheel nuts:
in front, M22 x 1.5, 10 nuts/wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 Nm
at the rear, M22 x 1.5, 10 nuts/wheel . . . . . . . . . 750 Nm
--- rim---wheel disc ( front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Nm
--- At the bar---axle the hub fastening to the axle; the tightening phased 70 Nm at a time and a certain tighte-
ning order, the final tightening 550 Nm. Always check the tightness of the screws after 100 running
hours.

J 3.2. Tyre/tire load capacities and air pressures (R tyres/tires 40 kph)

Rear axle Front axle
Tyre/tire Load capacity Air pres- Tyre/tire Load capacity Air pres-
sure sure
650/85R38 6150 kg 160 kPa 460/85R30 2650 kg 160 kPa
520/85R42 4320 kg 160 kPa 480/70R30 2360 kg 160kPa
580/70R42 3875 kg 160 kPa 540/65R30 2630 kg 160 kPa
650/65R42 4070 kg 160 kPa 600/70R30 3250 kg 160 kPa
710/70R42 5150 kg 160 kPa 2060 kg 160 kPa
520/85R46 4250 kg 160 kPa 14.9R38 2500 kg 240 kPa
3000 kg 320 kPa

When fitting twin wheels, note the following:

--- the load capacity of the two wheels in twin wheel fitting = 1.76 x the load capacity of one wheel
--- twin wheel fitting is meant to reduce ground pressure, not to increase side support
--- do not use a larger tyre/tire than listed in the tyre/tire change table
--- the track width of the inner wheels must be adjusted to the minimum
--- if necessary limited turning axle.

---199--- J. Technical specifications

J 4. Track widths mm
On the ground between the middle of the tyres/tires.

In the front Track width

460/85R30, 480/70R30,
1970, 1880
540/65R30
600/70R30 1855, 2000
1571, 1677, 1779, 1885,
14.9R38
1971, 2077, 2179, 2285

At the rear with fast shaft collars Track width

650/85R38 1845, 1965
650/65R42, 520/85R42, 580/70R42 1860, 1950
710/70R42* 1880, 1930

*) Demands the national acceptance because of the wide of thetractor.

At the rear, steppless adjutment, bar---axles Track width

1753---1999, 1854---2090,
1958---2207, 2062---2311,
520/85R46
2159---2408, 2263---2512,
2362---2540, 2471---2540
650/65R38 2052---2300, 2174---2422
650/65R42, 520/85R42, 580/70R42 2068---2316, 2158---2406
710/70R42 2089---2337, 2137---2385

Fixed rims
Instructions for adjustment see the point Adjustments, checkings on the page 192.
Factory track widths underlined. Every time the track width is adjusted or the tyres/tires changed, the
steering angles must be checked/adjusted at maximum oscillation of the front axle in both directions.
When adjusting the rear axle track width, check that the rear wheels can rotate freely. When using
chains, check also that the distance between the tyre/tire and the cab is not under 80 mm.
Additionally, check that the distance from the parking lights to the outer edge of the tyre/tire is not
over 400 mm.
The distance between the rear mudguards is 1026 mm.
When using narrow track widths on the rear axle, check that the lower links will not come into contact with
the tyres/tires. If necessary, lock the check links.

J. Technical specifications ---200---

J 5. Engine
Model S240 S280
Type designation 84 ETA/NK 84 ETA/NK
4---stroke direct injection diesel 4---stroke direct injection diesel
Type
engine engine
Turbocharged yes, intercooled yes, intercooled
Number of cylinders 6 6
Cyl. numbering from front 1---2---3---4---5---6 1---2---3---4---5---6
Cylinder diameter, mm 111 111
Stroke length, mm 145 145
Cylinder displacement, dm3 8,4 8,4
Compression ratio 16:1 16:1
Max. power, DIN kW/(hp)/RPM 181 (246)/2200 206 (280)/2200
Torque, Nm/RPM 970/1400 1075/1400
Maximum racing RPMs 2400 2400
Idling speed RPMs 850 850
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead --- push---rod operated
Valve clearances cold/hot:
---intake valve, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,35
---exhaust valve, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,35

J 5.1. Lubrication system

Engine lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear pump --- strainer on the suction side and a
replaceable filter on the pressure side
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposable filter element
Oil pressure at idling speed (min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 kPa (1,0 kp/cm2)
Oil pressure at normal working speed . . . . . . . . . . 250---500 kPa (2,5---5 kp/cm2)
For oil grades and volumes, see the Filling table on page 155.

J 5.2. Fuel system and the air filter

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel fuel, see the quality requirements on page 156
Injection pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distributor pump
Feed pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric
Order of injection from the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1---5---3---6---2---4
Injection pump timing mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On the flywheel
Filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper filter
Pre---filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper filter
Cold start device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Intake air heating with an electric resistor
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two---part, dry element, equipped with a warning light for
blockage
Air filtration pre---filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejector
Fuel tank volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 liters

---201--- J. Technical specifications

J 5.3. Cooling system
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugal pump, pressurised cooler with an expansion
tank, adjusted by a pressure cap, 0.7 bar
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 thermostats, 79˚C and 83˚C
Fan, belt---operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visco fan, fan automatically engages and disengages
depending on coolant temperature, 9 blades, ø 660 mm
See the fluid volumes in the Filling table on page 155.

J 6. Electrical system
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, negative grounding
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Ah
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 A
Starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,2 kW
Safety start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operated by the parking brake
Lightbulbs:
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60/55 W---H4
Marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5W
Rear/brake lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5/21 W
Turning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 W
Worklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55 W --- H3
Towing hook light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 W
Instrument panel lights and warning lights . . . . . .
1,2 W
Cab lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 x 10 W
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 A 1 fuse
25 A 2 fuses
20 A 3 fuses
15 A 9 fuses
10 A 11 fuses
7,5 A 6 fuses
5 A 9 fuses
For more details on fuses, see the fuse list on page 187.

J 7. Power transmission

J 7.1. Clutch
Electronically controlled multi---disc clutch located inside the gearbox. The multi---disc clutch is operated by
pressurised oil, controlled electronically with the HiShift buttons located in the gear shift lever or with the
clutch pedal.
The clutch does not need to be adjusted.
Number of friction discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 discs
In addition to the regular driving clutch, the tractors feature a Turbine clutch (HiTrol):
The turbine clutch slip is approx. 2 % at the max. running speed of the engine.
---Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voith (TD 460 VA1)
---Oil filling (does not need to be checked or changed)
---S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,5 l
---Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Donax TA

J. Technical specifications ---202---

J 7.2. Gearbox
Helical gears, fully synchronised (except the crawler range), 6 main gears (1...6)
Additionally the tractors feature a 4---step quick---gear, bringing the total amount of gears to 24 gears forward
and 24 gears reverse. Finally, the crawler range increases the amount of gears to 40 forward and 40 reverse
(the 5th and 6th gears are locked when in crawling mode). The quick---gear is also controlled by an
electronic system. When required, there are pre---programmed/pre---programed automatic functions of the
quick---gears for different driving situations.
The base speed is 50 kph with all power transmissions (in certain market areas), but the engine running
speed may be electronically limited to a top speed of 40 kph, if necessary.
The power shuttle is controlled by a lever next to the steering wheel or by the rocker switch in the arm rest
(as extra equipment, also next to the reverse driving steering wheel), and is combined with operating the
parking brake. The parallel operation switch of the power shuttle is located on the right---side arm rest.
Power shuttling may be performed while the tractor is moving without pressing the clutch pedal.
For oil grades and volumes, see the Filling table on page 155.
Power transmission
--- S240, S280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZF T7336 L (modified)
Powershift gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (L) = 1,46
2 (M) = 1,22
3 (H) = 1,02
4 (S) = 0,85

J 7.3. Drive gear

Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual planetary gear in the rear axle housing
Reduction ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,989
Flange distance at rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1889 mm

J 7.3.1. Differential lock, rear axle

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro---hydraulically actuated multi---disc system
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic with electrical control

J 7.4. Speed ranges

Speeds kph at max. power engine speed of 2200 RPM, at 2% slip in the hydraulic coupling there is noticed
a difference in the speed, reverse speeds are approx. 1.7 % slower.
On 40 kph models the speed is electrically limited with the engine revolutions.

50 kph

650/65R42, 580/70R42 520/85R42

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 LL1
LL2 0,7 0,9 1,0 1,3 LL2 0,7 0,9 1,1 1,3 LL2
LL3 1,1 1,3 1,5 1,8 LL3 1,1 1,3 1,6 1,9 LL3
LL4 1,6 1,9 2,2 2,7 LL4 1,6 1,9 2,3 2,8 LL4
1 3,0 3,6 4,3 5,2 1 3,1 3,7 4,4 5,3 1
2 5,2 6,2 7,5 9,0 2 5,3 6,4 7,7 9,2 2
3 7,6 9,1 10,9 13,1 3 7,8 9,4 11,2 13,5 3
4 11,2 13,4 16,1 19,3 4 11,5 13,8 16,6 19,9 4
5 17,5 21,0 25,1 30,2 5 18,0 21,6 25,9 31,0 5
6 25,8 31,0 37,1 44,6 6 26,6 31,9 38,2 45,9 6

---203--- J. Technical specifications

 50 kph

650/85R38 710/70R42
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 LL1 0,5 0,5 0,6 0,8 LL1
LL2 0,8 0,9 1,1 1,3 LL2 0,8 0,9 1,1 1,4 LL2
LL3 1,1 1,3 1,6 1,9 LL3 1,1 1,4 1,6 2,0 LL3
LL4 1,7 2,0 2,4 2,9 LL4 1,7 2,0 2,4 2,9 LL4
1 3,2 3,8 4,6 5,5 1 3,2 3,9 4,7 5,6 1
2 5,5 6,6 7,9 9,5 2 5,6 6,7 8,1 9,7 2
3 8,1 9,7 11,6 13,9 3 8,2 9,8 11,8 14,1 3
4 11,9 14,3 17,1 20,5 4 12,1 14,5 17,4 20,9 4
5 18,5 22,3 26,7 32,0 5 18,8 22,6 27,1 32,5 5
6 27,4 32,9 39,4 47,4 6 27,9 33,4 40,1 48,1 6

J 7.5. Power take---off

J 7.5.1. Rear PTO

Electro---hydraulic control with a multi---disc clutch. The electronic control device engages the PTO
smoothly. Outside, at the back of the cab, there is an emergency stop socket that can be connected to work
as remote---controlled mechanically or electrically. There are push buttons in the rear mudguards that can
be used to start and stop the PTO.

PTO alternatives S240, S280

1000 EHD x

Nominal speed of 1000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At engine running speed of 2112 RPM

Power take---off shaft, replaceable:
ø 1 3/4” (45 mm) ISO 500, type 3, 20---groove, standard
ø 1 3/8” (35 mm) ISO 500, type 2, 21---spline, extra equipment (spare parts)
ø 1 3/8” (35 mm) ISO 500, type 1, 6---spline, extra equipment (spare parts)

J. Technical specifications ---204---

 Lower link ball distance from the PTO shaft (T dimension, mm)
PTO shafts
Lower link length (mm) 20---spline (45 mm) 21---spline (35 mm) 6---spline (35 mm)
1080 698 708 708

S J0 1

J 7.5.1.1. Driving speeds at rear PTO nominal revs (kph)

In the tables are the driving speeds of the rear PTO nominal revs (1000 r/min at engine revs 2121 r/min).
The driving speeds at the front PTO nominal revs are approx 2 % slower.
At 2% slip in the hydraulic coupling there is noticed a difference in the speed On 40 kph models the speed is
electrically limited with the engine revolutions.

650/65R42, 580/70R42 520/85R42

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 LL1
LL2 0,7 0,8 1,0 1,2 LL2 0,7 0,9 1,0 1,2 LL2
LL3 1,0 1,2 1,5 1,8 LL3 1,1 1,3 1,5 1,8 LL3
LL4 1,5 1,8 2,2 2,6 LL4 1,6 1,9 2,2 2,7 LL4
1 2,9 3,5 4,2 5,0 1 3,0 3,6 4,3 5,2 1
2 5,0 6,0 7,2 8,6 2 5,2 6,2 7,4 8,9 2
3 7,3 8,8 10,5 12,6 3 7,5 9,0 10,8 13,0 3
4 10,8 13,0 15,5 18,6 4 11,1 13,3 16,0 19,2 4
5 16,8 20,2 24,2 29,1 5 17,3 20,8 24,9 29,9 5
6 24,9 29,9 35,8 43,0 6 25,6 30,8 36,9 44,3 6

---205--- J. Technical specifications

 650/85R38 710/70R42
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 LL1 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 LL1
LL2 0,7 0,9 1,1 1,3 LL2 0,7 0,9 1,1 1,3 LL2
LL3 1,1 1,3 1,6 1,9 LL3 1,1 1,3 1,6 1,9 LL3
LL4 1,6 1,9 2,3 2,8 LL4 1,6 1,9 2,3 2,8 LL4
1 3,1 3,7 4,4 5,3 1 3,1 3,8 4,5 5,4 1
2 5,3 6,4 7,7 9,2 2 5,4 6,5 7,8 9,3 2
3 7,8 9,3 11,2 13,4 3 7,9 9,5 11,3 13,6 3
4 11,5 13,8 16,5 19,8 4 11,7 14,0 16,8 20,1 4
5 17,9 21,5 25,7 30,9 5 18,2 21,8 26,1 31,4 5
6 26,4 31,7 38,0 45,7 6 26,9 32,2 38,6 46,4 6

J 7.5.1.2. PTO maximum power at PTO nominal speed of 1000 RPM (engine 2112
RPM), kW (hp)
S240 S280
150 (204) 172 (234)

J 7.5.2. Front PTO, extra equipment

Electro---hydraulic control with a multi---disc clutch. The electronic control device engages the PTO
smoothly. There are push buttons at the front of the linkage frame that can be used to start and stop the
PTO.
Nominal speed of 1000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At engine running speed of 2071 RPM
PTO shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ø 45 mm ISO 500, type 3, 20---spline
Direction of rotation counter---clockwise when viewed from the front, built---in clutch prevents rotation in the
wrong direction.
Torque limiting clutch with a maximum of 1345 Nm must be used.
The driving speeds corresponding to the nominal speeds of the front PTO are 2 % smaller than correspon-
ding speeds of the rear PTO, see the driving speeds at the rear PTO nominal revs on page 205.

J. Technical specifications ---206---

J 8. Powered front axle

Hi---lock Hi---lock axle with

Axle type (ZF APL 2075)
standard axle suspension
Electrically controlled hydraulic multi---disc
Coupling
clutch
Gear ratios, differential 2,75 2,75
Gear ratios, planetary gear 6,4 6,4
Total ratio 17,6 17,6
Gear ratios, front axle/rear axle 1,3 1,3
Differential lock, electro---hydraulic multi---disc lock,
yes yes
controlled simultaneously with the rear axle lock
Adjustable steering angle max 52° max 52°
Angle of deflection (oscillation) 8° 8°
Caster 0° 0°
King pin inclination KPI 8° 8°
Camber 1° 1°
Toe---in, mm 0---3 0---3
Flange distance, mm 1940 1940

For oil grades and volumes, see the Filling table on page 155.

J 9. Brakes
Hydraulically actuated wet multi---disc brakes
Number of brake discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 discs on both sides
Brake disc diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,3 mm
Friction surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5123 cm2/organic
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic, two brake cylinders, boosted
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engages drive brakes with a spring, disengages with a
pressure cylinder
--- controlled by the power shuttle lever
--- electro---hydraulic control
--- when the engine is not running, the parking brake is engaged
Brake pedal free travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30---40 mm
Trailer brake valve available as extra equipment, output 50 l/min
Pressure air brakes for trailer available as extra equipment.

J 10. Steering
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic steering, oil output from the main pump
through a priority valve. Adjustable telescopic steering
column. One double---action cylinder in the middle of the
frame.
Maximum steering pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 MPa (170 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,5 MPa (225 bar)
Steering valve revolution volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 cm3
Steering speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over 2 turns/sec. at idling speed
Steering turns from lock to lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,4 turns

---207--- J. Technical specifications

J 10.1. Turning circle radius

Tractor S240, S280

Tyres/tires, with standard track width 600/70R30 1854
Smallest turning circle radius, m 6,95

J 11. Hydraulics
The hydraulic system is independent of the drive and PTO clutches.

J 11.1. Electro---hydraulic linkage

The rear linkage and the front linkage (available as extra equipment) are electrically controlled via the CAN
bus. The rear linkage controls are located on the arm rest and the front linkage controls are located on the
side panel. Adjustments for both linkages are made with the tractor terminal.

Autocontrol Autocontrol C
Functions Front linkage (Can bus)
Extra equipment Rear linkage
Electrical linkage X X
Electro---hydraulic lower link draft sensing X
Adjustments made with the tractor terminal X X
Position control X X
Draft control mixing (mixture of position
X
control/draft control)
Lowering speed independent of load X X
Raising speed independent of load X X
Transport height X X
Pressure control X X
Implement sensor control X X
Drive balance control X
Slip control X

There are separate pumps for the work hydraulics circuit and the low---pressure circuit with a common
suction strainer.

J 11.2. Low---pressure circuit

Pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 l/min at engine running speed of 2200 RPM
Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,98 MPa (19,8 bar)
Produces oil pressure for the following functions Drive clutch
Power shuttle
Powershift gears
Powered front axle
Power take---off
Differential locks
Gearbox and PTO lubrication
Brake booster
Parking brake

J. Technical specifications ---208---

J 11.3. Work hydraulics circuit
Variable displacement pump, produces oil pressure as required
Pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 l/min at engine running speed of 2200 RPM, at
unloading pressure
over 100 l/min at engine running speed of 1600 RPM, at
unloading pressure
Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MPa (200 bar)
Stand---by pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MPa (30 bar)
Hydraulic system capacity at maximum RPM 36 kW, measured from Power Beyond output:
--- pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,0 Mpa (170 bar)
--- output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 l/min
Pump shock valve opening pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 21 MPa (210 bar)
Work hydraulics circuit shock valve opening
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 MPa (240 bar)
Produces oil pressure for the following functions Steering (prioritised), linkage hydraulics, auxiliary
hydraulics, trailer brake valve (prioritised) (available as
extra equipment)
Available volume of oil for auxiliary implements:
--- At minimum filling of 100 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 l
--- At maximum filling of 115 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 l
--- At extra maximum filling of 130 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 l
Direct connection for a hydraulic motor (Power Beyond) standard at the rear (extra equipment in the front),
maximum flow rate 130 l/min.
For oil grades and volumes, see the Filling table on page 155.

J 11.3.1. Auxiliary hydraulic valves

Seven double---action valves, electric control via the CAN bus. The controls are located on the arm rest and
the side panel.

Valve---specific adjustments can be made with the tractor terminal

Valve block functions that can be adjusted:

--- on/off switching
--- maximum flow
--- time of output increase/decrease
--- output progression in relation to lever movement

Valve block functions that can be activated/adjusted:

--- holding time of the position lock
--- position lock
--- floating position
--- output as a function of driving speed

---209--- J. Technical specifications

 Null
Output Shock
Valve Control leak--- Hydraulic motor connection
l/min valve
age
Lever on the arm
1 100 S
rest
Lever on the arm
2 80 Z
rest
Lever on the arm
3 80 Z
rest
One---lever control Can select 4th valve at the rear or the 8th
4 80
(joystick) valve at the front
One---lever control Can select 5th valve at the rear or the 9th
5 80
(joystick) valve at the front
Can select 6th valve or 10th valve
Lever on the side
6 80 (hydraulic towing hook operation, available
panel
as extra equipment)
Lever on the side
7 80
panel

J 11.3.1.1. Counter pressures in the free return connectors of the auxiliary hydraulics
1/2” connector, flow 50 l/min, 10°C max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 bar
1/2” connector, flow 50 l/min, 50°C max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 bar
1” connector (extra equipment), flow 50 l/min, 10°C max. 5 bar
1” connector (extra equipment), flow 50 l/min, 50˚C max.3 bar

J 11.4. Linkage

J 11.4.1. Rear linkage

Three---point
Lifting cylinder ø Lower link type Lower link length
linkage
110 mm Category 3 quick---coupling
S240, S280 1080 mm
stroke 230 mm heads

J 11.4.1.1. Maximum lifting power in the entire lifting range, kN

Lifting links at the attachment points furthest back 100
Lifting links at the attachment points in the middle 90
Lifting links at the attachment points furthest forward 80

J 11.4.1.2. Range of movement at the lower link ends, mm

Lifting links at the attachment points furthest back 740
Lifting links at the attachment points in the middle 770
Lifting links at the attachment points furthest forward 840

J. Technical specifications ---210---

J 11.4.2. Front linkage, extra equipment

Three---point
Lifting cylinder ø Lifting link type Lifting link length
linkage
100 mm Category 3 quick---coupling
S240, S280 890 mm
stroke 240 mm heads
Maximum lifting power at the entire lifting range . 73,5 kN
Range of movement at the lower link ends . . 790 mm
The ends of the lifting links can be turned up
Front towing point is standard

J 12. Other technical specifications

J 12.1. Cab filter capacities

Standard filter (dop test, 300 m3) . . . > Ø 0,2 μm 10 %, > Ø 1 μm 20 %, > Ø 5 μm 90 %, > Ø 8 μm 100 %
Activated carbon filter (dop
test, 200 m3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . > Ø 2 μm 100 %, gases > 98 %

J 12.2. Rim fixing stud spacing

The rear axles, adjusted stepless (bar---axles) have the same fixing with the rim fastening bolts.

S J0 2,1

---211--- J. Technical specifications

 K. Extra and Alternative Equipment
K 1. Extra equipment catalogue
The extra equipment included in the following list is K 1.6. Frame and wheels
available for the tractors. Alternative equipment is
factory---installed and cannot be fitted to the tractor Front ballast weights 12 x 42 kg, not available with
once it has left the factory without incurring front linkage
unreasonable modifications. Solid ballast weight 1100 kg (three---point attaching,
available with front and rear linkage)
Rear wheel weights 4 x 40 kg
K 1.1. Engine Rear wheel weights 8 x 40 kg

K 1.2. Electrical equipment K 1.7. Cab and covers

Engine heater, Denmark First aid kid
Engine heater, France Charcoal filter
Engine heater, Scandinavia + Germany Dry powder extinguisher, reverse drive controls
Radio equipment Dry powder extinguisher, without reverse drive cont-
Radio RDS /cassette player rols
Radio RDS/CD
Radio RDS/CD top
Antenna, whip (radio) K 1.8. Hydraulics
Antenna, dualband (radio/gsm)
Front linkage, not with front ballast weights
Reversing alarm
Front power take---off, only with front linkage
Upper headlights, right---hand traffic
Front PTO only with front linkage
Upper headlights, left---hand traffic
Top link, hydraulic, Ball---Hitch, cat 3
Socket for cab heater
Leveling screw, hydraulic
Douple rotating warning light, yellow
Working hydraulics, front (4 couplings + free return
Hands Free---function on the phone
flow), only with front linkage
Wireless Hands Free---function on the phone, no
telephone holder
K 1.8.1. Towing devices
K 1.3. Power transmission Hydraulic towing hook Euro + drawbar
Wagon towing device frame, long (height 580 mm,
PTO shaft ø 1 3/8” (35 mm) ISO 500, type 2, width 330 mm)
21---spline, (spare parts) Wagon towing device frame, short (height 480 mm,
PTO shaft ø 1 3/8” (35 mm) ISO 500, type 1, width 330 mm), can be used with the hydraulic
6---spline, extra equipment (spare parts) towing hook
Wagon towing device, long, with ball---hitch K80,
frame width 330 mm
K 1.4. Brake system Wagon towing device, long, with shank hitch PF
Pressurised air brake system 1 and 2 pipe system (Piton Fix), frame width 330 mm
Duo Matic pressurised air brake system Drawbar for the wagon towing device, fits types K80
Emergency brake and PF (Piton Fix)
Hydraulic brake cylinder Towing bracket A10 (bolt ∅ 31 mm) for the wagon
towing device frame (frame width 330 mm)
Towing bracket A11 (bolt ∅ 38 mm) for the wagon
K 1.5. Steering system towing device frame (frame width 330 mm)

Front mudguards
Controlling systems, rear

K. Extra and Alternative Equipment ---212---

 K 2. Extra and alternative equipment, operation and service
This chapter contains the operating and service alternative equipment (the reverse driving
instructions for the extra and alternative equipment equipment, the front linkage, the front power
that are more complex and require special take---off) that are substantially connected to the
maintenance. However, the operating and service operation of a basic tractor can be found together
instructions for the more common extra and with the instructions for the basic tractor.

K 2.1. Engine

K 2.2. Electrical equipment

K 2.3. Power transmission

---213--- K. Extra and Alternative Equipment

 K 2.4. Brake system

K 2.4.1. Trailer air pressure brakes (press air compressor)

10
11
2A

2 15

12
1
Duo---Matic
9

13
4

7A

16

3
14
5

8
3a

6
DUO---MATIC
15

S K 19

K 2.4.1.1. The construction of the air 3A Air pressure coupling

pressure brakes 4 Pressure meter
5 Air pressure container
1 Compressor 6 Water draining valve
2 Anti freeze pump 7 Operating valve for trailer
2A Anti freeze device flow valve 7A Bleed nipples
3 Pressure adjuster

K. Extra and Alternative Equipment ---214---

8 Steering valve for trailer, one pipe system, not in
Duo---Matic system
9 Trailer coupling Duo---Matic
10 Trailer coupling two pipe system; container line
(red)
11 Trailer coupling one pipe system; connector
(black)
12 Trailer coupling two pipe system; brake line
(yellow)
13 Trailer parking brake lever
14 Overflow valve
15 Quick coupling for output of compressed air, in
front and rear
16 Pressure air for cab suspension
K 2.4.1.2. Instructions for operating
On the two hose system the trailer is connected to
two different couplings, which have been marked as
follows:
--- Container line (10) --- red cover
--- Brake line (12)--- yellow cover
On one hose systems the trailer is connected to the
coupling with a black cover (11) (brake line) (used
in some marketing areas).
The Duo---Matic system has only one coupling (9)
which can be connected.
NOTE: When using the trailer brakes the brake
pedals must always be locked together when
driving on the road. When pressing one brake
pedal, the brake action of the trailer is smaller.
The trailer brakes operate also when using the
parking brake.
From the air pressure system it is possible to get
pressure for external purposes, e.g. for tyre/tire filling
(8 bar) from quick couplings (15) on the tractor rear
part and on the right between the engine and the
fuel tank.
Compressed air can be also got from coupling (3A)
---215---
which is situated above the pressure container by
turning the coupling as far as it will go. Through this
coupling the system can be filled, when needed, by
outside compressed air e.g. when the compressor of
the tractor is broken. By doing this, the coupling
cannot be turned to bottom.
When the couplings (9---12) of the trailer are not in
use, keep the covers on them.
When the ambient temperature is colder than
+5°C, the antifreeze container (2) must be filled with
with antifreeze compound including lubricant. The
liquid streaming valve (2A) has to be in the open
position (1 aligned with the arrow).
The container and streaming valve are situated on
the right of the tractor rear part.
CAUTION: There must be maximum pressure in
the air pressure system, about 7---8 bar (pressure
gauge (4) of the system is located on the
instrument panel), before driving a tractor, which
has a trailer with air brakes.
K 2.4.1.3. Service
The system includes a filter, which is situated in the
pressure regulator (3). It has to be cleaned/changed
occasionally (depending on use). The filter can be
removed by first loosening the air pressure coupling
(3A).
The pressure regulator is provided with an inbuilt
pressure regulator, which operates, if the pressure
rises to 12---14 bar. This can be caused by a broken
pressure regulator valve, frozen or blocked filter.
The services, which are repeated periodic are
together with the scheduled maintenance.
Bleeding the operating valve for trailer brakes (7A),
instructions are in “Checks and adjustments” on page
190.
K. Extra and Alternative Equipment
 K 2.4.2. Brake valve of the trailer, hydraulic

14
13

12A
11 12

9 12A

2
9 10

1 11

4 3

8
S K 17

K 2.4.2.1. Construction of trailer brake 12A Bleed nipples of the trailer brake valve
valve 13 Quick---action coupling for the trailer brake
14 Brake cylinders for the trailer
1 Variable displacement pump The trailer brake valve system makes use of the
2 Pressure filter pressure of the tractors hydraulic system.
3 Priority valve
4 Oil for working hydraulics
5 Steering valve for forward driving
K 2.4.2.2. Instructions for operating
6 Brake oil reservoir, common with the tractor The trailer brakes are connected to the quick---action
brakes coupling at the rear part of the tractor (13).
7 Brake pedals
8 Main brake cylinders NOTE: When using the trailer brakes the brake
9 Control pressure from both brake pedals for the pedals must always be locked together when
trailer brake valve driving on the road.
10 Brake pedals for reverse drive equipment (extra The trailer brakes do not operate, if only one of
equipment), control pressure from both pedals the brake pedals is pressed. When the locking of
for the trailer brake valve the brake pedals is disconnected, the tractor bra-
11 Control pressure for the trailer pressure air kes can be used as steering brake.
brakes (extra equipment)
12 Trailer brake valve NOTE: The trailer brakes do not work when using

K. Extra and Alternative Equipment ---216---

the parking brake.
NOTE: When the engine is not running, the power
brake of the trailer does not work.
Bleeding the trailer brake valve (12A), instructions are
in “Checks and adjustments” on page 191.
K 2.4.2.3. Specifications
--- Function with the pressure of the tractor
hydraulics, controlled by the braking valve
--- The brake valve control pressure will be led from
both the brake pedal circles (also the reverse drive
equipment as alternative equipment)
--- Trailer brake connection to the tractor with
quick---action coupling
--- The brake valve pressure ratio 1 : 11
--- The steering and trailer brakes have equally
priority
--- Maximum pressure 15 MPa (150 bar)
--- Maximum output from brake coupling is about 50
l/min, also when idling

K 2.5. Steering system

K 2.6. Frame and wheels

K 2.7. Cab and covers

K 2.8. Working hydraulics and towing devices

K 2.8.1. Hydraulic towing device (Euro) SFS---ISO 5692
hitch/drawbar

SK1

Either a hook (see figure) or a drawbar can be S K 14

attached to the frame of the hydraulic towing device.
When the hook/drawbar is being changed, the frame
of the towing device should be lowered down
(unlocked) and extended, see instructions below.
The hook/drawbar can then be changed by
removing the carrier pin (1) locked with a cotter pin.
The standard depicted in the figure above involves a
towing eyelet that is attached to the hook.
NOTE: Use only towing eyelets that are
undamaged and conform to the standard. If other
kinds of towing eyelets are used, both warranty
and liability become null and void.

---217--- K. Extra and Alternative Equipment

 K 2.8.1.1. Operation 1.1. Towing hook/drawbar extension

When the frame of the towing device is lowered

1. Lowering (unlocked), it can be hydraulically extended to make
it easier to attach the hook/drawbar to the towing
2 1 eyelet.

3 2

SK2

--- Turn the position control knob (1) to the maximum

lowering position (counter---clockwise)
--- Use the tractor terminal to adjust transport height 1
to the maximum
--- Press the lift/stop/lower switch (2) to the lift
position.

S K 21

To extend the towing hook:

S K 20
--- Press the rear linkage Autocontrol bypass switch
(3) and at the same time press the towing hook
release switch (4)
--- Release the rear linkage Autocontrol bypass
switch (3)
--- Release the towing hook release lever (4)
--- Press the lift/stop/lower switch (2) to the lowering
position
--- Depress the upper side of the (valve block 6/10)
change---over switch (2) of the control lever (1).
The control lever can then be used to control the
towing hook’s extension cylinder (valve block 10).
--- Pull the control lever (1) (+ direction) to extend the
towing hook.
--- Push the control lever (1) (--- direction) to retract
the towing hook. The towing hook can also be
retracted when it is lifted up.

K. Extra and Alternative Equipment ---218---


S K 5,1
NOTE: To make sure that the extension is locked,
the towing hook must be fully retracted while it is
locked in the upmost position. THE EXTENSION
LOCKING PINS (5) WILL THEN BE DOWN. The
distance of the roll pins from the plate will also
be 2---5 mm.
2. Lifting
2 WARNING: While using a trailer, always make
3 WARNING: Towed implements that rest their full
SK6
--- Back up to the trailer and attach the towing hook
to the trailer’s towing eyelet
--- Press the lift/stop/lower switch (2) to the lift
position. Transport height must have been set to
maximum in the tractor terminal.
---219---
--- Press the rear linkage Autocontrol bypass switch
(3) (lifted another 2 %) until the hook is
automatically locked. If the lifting links are correctly
adjusted, this 2 % movement will lock the towing
hook.
S K 13
Make sure that the locking indicator (4) next to
the hook/drawbar is fully upright when the
hook/drawbar is in the upmost position. If the
indicator is not upright, the hook is not locked.
sure that the towing device is locked and
supported by the latch.
WARNING: Before lifting an implement into
position, make sure that the towing eyelet is in
the correct position on the towing hook.
weight on the towing point are only allowed to be
attached to the towing hook.
When driving with a trailer on a sloping surface,
the towing eyelet must be rotating to avoid risk of
breaking.
A loaded towing hook must always be lowered using
the linkage.
K. Extra and Alternative Equipment
 K 2.8.1.2. Checks and adjustments
1. Adjusting the length of the lifting links of
the linkage
SK7
The length of the lifting links must be adjusted so
that the links are slightly loose when the linkage is
lifted to the upmost position (the mudguard buttons
have been used in the lifting). The towing device
must, however, also lock behind the latch when the
towing hook is loaded.
This adjustment has already been made at the
factory, and usually there should be no need for any
adjustment. If, however, you are adjusting the length
of the linkage lifting links, proceed as follows:
--- Lift the three---point linkage to its upmost position
using the mudguard buttons (the towing hook
must be unloaded).
K. Extra and Alternative Equipment
SK8
---Loosen the locking nuts (1) of the lifting links and
turn the links (2) until there is only a small amount
of play in the links. Also make sure that after the
adjustment, the lifting links are equal in length.
--- Next, tighten the locking nuts (1).
Finally use the rear linkage switches on the arm rest
to check that the towing device is locked behind the
latch.
NOTE: Perform the adjustment carefully. If the
lifting links are adjusted too short, they may
break.
2. Checking the wear in the towing hook
min 44 mm
S K 15
DANGER: When the towing hook has
worn down to 44 mm at its thinnest
part, it must be replaced.
---220---
 K 2.8.1.3. Technical specifications K 2.8.2. Wagon towing device
--- Control, hydraulic control
--- Replaceable hook or drawbar
--- Maximum vertical load on the towing hook is 25
kN (the largest permitted axle load must not be
exceeded)
--- Maximum vertical load on the drawbar is 10 kN
(the largest allowed axle load must not be
1
exceeded)
--- Tractor’s maximum weight 12,000 kg
--- Towing hook/drawbar is lowered down to the
ground when extended. 3

S K 18 3

In the picture is the wagon towing device frame with

fixed hitch (1) (shank hitch Piton Fix, the other
alternative is with ball---hitch K80) + agricultural
towing device (2). The locking (3) with trailer must
be secured.

K 2.8.2.1. Instructions for operating hitch

2
3

SK9

S K 10

To attach the trailer to the hitch, turn lever (1) to the

upmost position to lift up the towing hitch. When the
towing eyelet is completely inside the towing
bracket, the towing hitch is automatically released.
The towing hitch can be released by turning the

---221--- K. Extra and Alternative Equipment

lever (2) down. K 2.8.2.2. Maintenance
The height of the towing bracket can be adjusted by
turning the lever (3) up and then left. Move the
towing bracket to the desired height and release the
lever, and the return springs move the locking bolts,
locking the lever to the correct peg. The towing
bracket can be lifted off its frame using the same
lever.

NOT LOCKED

3
4
TOWING HITCH 5
LOCKED 1 2
S K 16

S K 11
WARNING: The towing hitch is locked
to its lowest position when the release
button is out. The hitch locking must be
checked every time a trailer is
attached.
1. Clean regularly:
--- towing hitch (1) (no pressure cleaning)
--- towing hitch guide (2)
---locking pin (3) (2 pins)
2. Lubricate regularly:
--- nipple (4), lubricate with Valtra Calsium LF grease.
After lubricating, rotate the towing bracket from left
to right at least 90° to spread the grease evenly on
the desired surfaces.

NOTE: If the towing bracket displays corrosion,

S K 12
To guarantee that only allowed towing angles are
possible, use only the permissible towing eyelets
featured in the figure.
A rigid towing bar must be used because of the
rotating towing bracket.
NOTE: Use only towing eyelets that are
undamaged and conform to the standard. If other
kinds of towing eyelets are used, both warranty
and liability become null and void.
caused, for example, by fertilisers, rust removers
should not be used, because they may cause
malfunctions. Instead, contact an authorised
service person.
3. Lubricate as necessary or every 1000
hours:
--- nipple (5), use Valtra Calsium LF Grease
K 2.8.2.3. Technical specifications
--- Tractor’s maximum allowed total weight 12,000 kg
--- Maximum vertical load on the towing hook
1,500 kg
--- Towing hitch diameter of towing bracket 31 mm or
38 mm

K. Extra and Alternative Equipment ---222---

 L. Alphabetical Index
A C
Activating a valve block function, 101 Cab air filters, 177
Activating the front linkage, 140 Cab fuse list, 187
Activating the rear linkage, 136 Calibrations in detail, tractor terminal, 108
Active service code, 110 Calibrations, tractor terminal, 108
Adjustable functions of the valves, Change---over blocks 6 and 10, 97
work instructions, 144 Change---over blocks, auxiliary hydraulics, 97
Adjusting the continuous track width, bar---axle, 193 Change---over blocks, one---lever control
Adjusting the implement sensor, linkage, 91 (4/8 and 5/9), 97
Adjusting the length of the lifting links of the linkage, Changing the engine oil, 170
extra equipment, 220 Changing the fuel filters, 177
Adjusting the lowering speed of the front lifting Changing the PTO shaft, 130
device, 141 Check links, 134
Adjusting the lowering speed of the rear lifting Checks and adjustments, 183
device, 138 Clutch, technical specifications, 202
Adjusting the raising speed of the front Combination switch, 43
lifting device, 141 Connecting and operating a hydraulic motor, work
Adjusting the raising speed of the instructions, 147
rear lifting device, 138 Controls outside the cab, introduction, 38
Adjusting the tractor terminal screen brightness, 86 Controls outside the cab, more detail, 83
Adjusting the transport height, lifting device, 141 Conversion table for common units, 227
Adjusting the transport height, Cooling system maintenance, 184
rear lifting device, 137 Cooling system, technical specifications, 202
Air filter, 183 Crawler gear switch, 56
Air filters, cab, 177 Crawler gear, using, 120
Air filters, maintenance, 161 Creating a folder (New folder), tractor terminal, 113
Allowed weights for axles, 198 Cruise control, 123
Alphabetical Index, 223
Alternator, 185 D
Attaching implements, 150
Automatic traction control, 121 Daily maintenance, 163
Automatic Traction Control switch, 57 Deleting settings/folders, tractor terminal, 115
Auxiliary hydraulics, 143 Differential lock, 124
Auxiliary hydraulics change---over blocks, 97 Differential lock automatic switch, 62
Auxiliary hydraulics controls in more detail, 67 Dimensions and weights, 198
Auxiliary hydraulics valves, Direct connection of a hydraulic motor without a
technical specifications, 209 valve (Power Beyond), 147
Auxiliary hydraulics, controls, introduction, 31 Display menus (functions) introduction, tractor
terminal, 87
Display, side pillar, 42
B Displaying valve block basic settings, 97
Balls for quick---hitch claws, 135 Draft control, 93
Bar axle, adjusting the track width, 193 Draft control, rear lifting device, 137
Battery checking and maintenance, 185 Drive Balance Control, 95
Bleeding air from the brake system, 190 Drive balance control, rear lifting device, 139
Bleeding air from the fuel system, 183 Drive clutch, using, 120
Block floating position, 102 Drive gear, technical specifications, 203
Block function operation, 103 Driving, 119
Block output increase/decrease time, Driving speeds at PTO nominal revs, 205
progressiveness, 99, 145
Block position lock, 102 E
Block position lock holding time, 102
Brake adjustment, 190 Electric power center in the engine room, 188
Brake pedals, 39 Electrical system, technical specifications, 202
Brake system, extra equipment, operating and Electro---hydraulic linkage,
service, 214 technical specifications, 208
Brake valve of the trailer, hydraulic, Emergency brake, 123
extra equipment, 216 Empty or restore settings from the recycle bin,
Brakes, introduction, 22 tracror terminal, 116
Brakes, technical specifications, 207 Empty the whole recycle bin, tractor terminal, 115
Engine, introduction, 18
Engine, technical specifications, 201

---223--- L. Alphabetical Index

Euro hook/drawbar, extra equipment, 217
Extra and Alternative Equipment, 212
Extra and alternative equipment, operation and
service, 213
F I
Filling table, 155
Filter system, 156
Fixing stud spacing for rims, 211
Floating position for hydraulic blocks, 102
Floating position, front lifting device, 141
Floating position, rear lifting device, 137
Floating position, work instructions, 146
Forward---reverse shuttling while driving, 121
Four---wheel drive, 124
Four---wheel drive automatic switch, 61
Free return conenctor, counter pressures, 210
Front lifting device, adjusting the
lowering speed, 141
Front lifting device, adjusting the raising speed, 141
Front lifting device, position control, 140
Front linkage, 135
Front linkage controls in more detail, 65
Front linkage settings, 89
Front linkage, activating, 140
Front linkage, extra equipment, technical
specification, 211
Front linkage, maintenance, 162
Front PTO, 130
Front PTO controls in more detail, 66
Front PTO, extra equipment,
technical specifications, 206
Front suspension selection switch,
manual/auto/locked, 59
Fuel, 156
Fuel requirements, 156
Fuel storage, 156
Fuel system and the air filter, 201
Function operation for blocks, 103
Functions selectable to be displayed on the main
page (middle section of the screen) on the tractor
terminal, 106
Fuses, 72, 186
G Oil change, engine, 170
Gauges and controls, introduction, 26
Gauges and Controls, more detail, 39
Gear shift lever, 55
Gearbox and drive gear oil, 168
Gearbox, technical specifications, 203
General Description, 13
Graphical display of the
Proline instrument panel, 47
Grease, 157
H Output as a function of driving speed
Hazard---warning switch, 44
Headlamp adjustment, 189
HiShift switch, using, 120
HiShift, switch, 56
Holding time of the position lock, 102
Holding time of the position lock,
work instructions, 146
L. Alphabetical Index ---224---
Hydraulic towing device hitch/drawbar, extra
equipment, 217
Hydraulics, introduction, 24
Hydraulics, technical specifications, 208
Ignition, 55
Implement sensor control, rear linkage, 94
Implement setting saving menu, 113
Implement settings, tractor terminal, 113
Indicator lights, 46
Instrument panel display, 47
Instrument panel, introduction, 27
Instrument panel, more detail, 40
Introduction, 13
L
Left---side controls, introduction, 33
Left---side controls, more detail, 74
Lift/stop/lower switch, 63
Lifting links, 133
Light switch, 44
Linkage, technical specification, 210
Linkage/PTO controls, more detail, 62
Linkage/PTO, controls, introduction, 30
Loading settings (Load settings),
tractor terminal, 115
Low---pressure circuit, hydraulics, technical
specifications, 208
M
Main gears, operation, 119
Main index, 2
Main power switch, 44
Maintenance, 154
Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly, 174
Maintenance every 2000 hours or
every other year, 180
Maintenance every 250 hours, 168
Maintenance schedule, 157
Maximum flow adjustment, 99, 145
O
Oil recommendations according to outdoor
temperature, 155
One---lever control change---over blocks
(4/8 and 5/9), 97
Operating the rear linkage, 136
Operating the tractor during the first 50 hours, 117
Operations relating to service, tractor terminal, 107
Other controls in the right---side panel and the elbow
rest in more detail, 71
Other settings made with the tractor terminal, 104
for blocks, 103
Output depending on driving speed, work
instructions, 147
Overhead panel controls, front, introduction, 35
Overhead panel controls, front, more detail, 78
Overhead panel controls, left, introduction, 36
Overhead panel controls, left, more detail, 79
Overhead panel controls, right, introduction, 35
Overhead panel controls, right, more detail, 78
P Rear lifting device, position control, 137
Pedals, introduction, 26
Pedals, more detail, 39
Ploughing, 151
Ploughing with a semi---pull type plough, 152
Ploughing with a swing plough or
reversible plough, 152
Ploughing with a three---point hitched plough, 151
Plowing, 151
Plowing with a semi---pull type plow, 152
Plowing with a swing or reversible plow, 152
Plowing with a three---point hitched plow, 151
Position control knob, 63
Position control, front lifting device, 140
Position control, front linkage, 90
Position control, rear lifting device, 137
Position control, rear linkage, 93
Position lock for hydraulic blocks, 102
Position lock, work instructions, 146
Power shift gear, 122
Power shift gear automatics, 122
Power shuttle, 121
Power shuttle and parking brake lever, 40
Power shuttle and parking brake lever, reverse
controls, 75
Power take---off (P.T.O.), 129
Power take---off, technical specifications, 204
Power transmission, introduction, 19
Power transmission, technical specifications, 202
Powered front axle, technical specifications, 207
Powershift buttons, 56
Powershift pre---programming/pre---programing
button, 42
Powershift pre---programming/pre---programing
switch, reverse controls, 76
Powershift switch, manual/Auto1/Auto2, 58
Pre---programming/pre---programing button,
powershift, 42
Pre---programming/pre---programing switch (reverse
controls), for the Powershift gears, 76
Pressure air brakes, 131
Pressure air brakes, maintenance, 162
Pressure control for the rear linkage, 93
Pressure control, front lifting device, 142
Pressure control, rear lifting device, 139
Programming/programing the power shift gear, 122
Progressiveness to block functions, 99, 145
Proline instrument panel, 45
PTO driving speeds at nominal revs, 205
Q Speed ranges, 203
Quality requirements of engine fuel, 156
Quick---hitch claws, 135
Quick---loading the settings, tractor terminal, 115
R Steering, technical specifications, 207
Rear controls, introductions, 34
Rear controls, more detail, 75
Rear lifting device, adjusting the
lowering speed, 138
Rear lifting device, adjusting the raising speed, 138
---225---
Rear lifting device, adjusting the
transport height, 137
Rear linkage, 133
Rear linkage controls in more detail, 62
Rear linkage pressure control, 93
Rear linkage settings, 92
Rear linkage, activating, 136
Rear linkage, technical specification, 210
Rear PTO, 129
Rear PTO controls in more detail, 64
Rear PTO, technical specifications, 204
Recycle bin (Recycle bin), tractor terminal, 115
Rename a folder (Rename folder),
tractor terminal, 114
Rename the settings (Save settings), tractor
terminal, 114
Resetting the travel distance (DISTANCE), 105
Resetting the worked area (AREA), 105
Return connector for hydraulics, 147
Reverse driving equipment display, 76
Right---side panel, other controls, 32
Right---side panel/arm rest controls,
in more detail, 55
Right---side panel/arm rest, controls,
introduction, 29
Right---side panel/elbow rest, controls, driving,
introduction, 29
Rim fixing stud spacing, 211
S
Safety, 8
Safety precautions, 8
Saving the settings (New settings),
tractor terminal, 114
Scheduled maintenance, 161
Seat, introduction, 37
Seat, more detail, 81
Serial numbers, 1
Service code history, 112
Service code that can be selected to be displayed
(ERROR), 105
Service menu, tractor terminal, 107
Setting of the implement width (MACHINE), 104
Settings of the auxiliary hydraulic valve blocks, 97
Settings of the functions, tractor terminal, 89
Short ploughing instructions, 153
Short plowing instructions, 153
Shutting down the tractor terminal, 87
Side pillar display, 42
Slip control, 95
Slip control, rear lifting device, 139
Starting, 117
Starting and driving the tractor, 117
Starting off, 119
Steering angle adjustment, 192
Steering system, introduction, 23
Stop indicator light, 46
Stopping, 125
Storing the tractor, 196
Switching a valve block ON/OFF, 98
L. Alphabetical Index
 T V
Table of Contents, 4 Valve (= valve block) functions, 144
Technical specifications, 198 Valve block function, activating, 101
The calibration of the front clutch pedal, 108 Valve block functions that can be
The calibration of the front linkage activated/adjusted, 101
control knob, 109 Valve block functions that can be adjusted, 98
The calibration of the rear clutch pedal, 109 Valve block ON/OFF switch, 144
The calibration of the rear linkage position Valve block settings, 97
control knob, 109 Valve functions that can be activated/adjusted, work
The calibration of the speed sensors, 110 instructions, 146
The hydraulics pressure and return oil filter, 171 Valve functions that can be adjusted, 98
The implement sensor of the front linkage (FRONT
HITCH), 105 W
The implement sensor of the rear linkage (REAR
HITCH), 106 Wagon towing device, extra equipment, 221
The quick---hitch claw balls, 135 Weekly maintenance, 164
Three---point linkage, 133 Wheel nuts, tightening torque, 199
Time of output increase/decrease, progressiveness Work hydraulics circuit, technical specifications, 209
to blocks, 99, 145 Working hydraulics and towing devices, extra
Tire load capacities and air pressures, 199 equipment, operation and service, 217
To the operator, 3 Working instructions, 127
Toe---in adjustment, 192 Working space adjustments, front linkage, 92
Towing the tractor, 126 Working space settings, front linkage, 89
Track width adjustment, 192 Working instructions, 125
Track widths, 200 Working space adjustments, front linkage, 91
Traction release automatics, 121 Working space settings, front linkage, 88
Tractopr terminal, recycle bin (Recycle bin), 115
Tractor information, tractor terminal, 107
Tractor terminal, 85
Tractor terminal control buttons, 85
Tractor terminal display menus (functions)
introduction, 87
Tractor terminal, adjusting the screen brightness, 86
Tractor terminal, creating a folder (New folder), 113
Tractor terminal, deleting settings/folders, 115
Tractor terminal, empty or restore settings from the
recycle bin, 116
Tractor terminal, functions selectable to be displayed
on the main page, 106
Tractor terminal, implement setting
saving menu, 113
Tractor terminal, implement settings, 113
Tractor terminal, load settings (Load settings), 115
Tractor terminal, quick---loading the settings, 115
Tractor terminal, rename a folder
(Rename folder), 114
Tractor terminal, Rename the settings (Save
settings), 114
Tractor terminal, settings of the functions, 89
Trailer, 131
Trailer air pressure brakes, extra equipment, 214
Trailer brakes, air pressure, extra equipment, 214
Trailer’s electrical connection, 131
Turning circle radius, 208
Tyre load capacities and air pressures, 199
Tyres/tires (tyre/tire options in pairs), 199

U
Using a universal shaft, 150
Using single---action devices,
auxiliary hydraulics, 147
Using the front linkage, 140
Using the top link, 152

L. Alphabetical Index ---226---

 Conversion table for common units
Metric Weights and Measures with Customary Equivalents
Length
1 millimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.03937 inch
1 centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.3937 inch
1 meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 39.37 inches
= 3.281 feet
= 1.094 yards
1 kilometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.6214 mile
Area
1 square centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.155 square inch
1 square meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.196 yards
= 10.764 square feet
1 hectare (10,000 m2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2.471 acres
1 square kilometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.386 square mile
= 247.1 acres
Capacity or volume
1 cubic centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.061 cubic inch
1 cubic meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.315 cubic feet
= 1.308 cubic yards
1 milliliter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0352 fluid ounce (U.K.)
= 0.0338 fluid ounce (U.S.)
1 liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.20 fluid ounces (U.K.)
= 1.7598 pints (U.K.)
= 0.8799 quart (U.K.)
= 0.220 gallon (U.K.)
= 0.0275 bushel (U.K.)
= 0.110 peck (U.K.)
= 33.81 fluid ounces (U.S.)
= 2.1134 pints (U.S.)
= 1.0567 quarts (U.S.)
= 0.2642 gallon (U.S.)
= 0.0284 bushel (U.S.)
= 0.1135 peck (U.S.)
= 0.908 dry quart (U.S.)
1 kiloliter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 219.97 gallons (U.K.)
= 264.17 gallons (U.S.)
Weight
1 gram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.03527 ounce (avdp.)
1 kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.274 ounces (avdp.)
= 2.205 pounds (avdp.)
1 metric ton (1,000 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.984 ton (long)
= 1.102 tons (short)
= 2204.6 pounds (avdp.)
Volume per unit area
1 liter/hectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.089 gallon (U.K.)/acre
= 0.107 gallon (U.S.)/acre
Weight per unit area
1 kilogram/square centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.22 pounds (avdp.)/square inch
1 kilogram/hectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.892 pound (avdp.)/acre
Area per unit weight
1 square centimeter/kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0703 square inch/pound (avdp.)
Temperature conversion formulas

---227---
 Centigrade (Celsius) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 5/9 (Fahrenheit ---32)
Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9/5 centigrade (Celsius +32)
Illumination
1 foot ---candle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 10.764 lux
1 lux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0929 foot---candle

Travel speed
1 km/h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.62 mph
1 mph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.61 km/h
Drawbar pull
1 kN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 224.81 lbf
1 lbf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 4.4482 N
Power (identified by such terms as crankshaft power, pto power,
belt power, drawbar power; indicating the point at which the
measurement was taken)
1 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.3596 hp
1 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.7355 kW
Engine torque
1 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.738 lbf ft
1 lbf ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.356 Nm
Fuel economy
1 kg/kWh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.278 kg/MJ
= 1.644 lb/hph
1 lb/hph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.169 kg/MJ
= 0.608 kg/kWh
Engine displacement
1 liter (dm3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 61.024 in3
100 in3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.6387 liters (dm3)
Hydraulic pump pressure
1 MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 145.037 psi
1000 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.8948 MPa
Tyre/Tire pressure
100 kPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.5037 psi
1 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.8948 kPa

When conversions are made the results should be rounded to a meaningful number of digits, relative to
the accuracy of original measurements. Values for weights and volumes are based on pure water at 4˚C.
under 760 mm of atmospheric pressure.
For additional conversion factors, or for greater accuracy, refer to National Bureau of Standards Misc. Publ.
233 or to the Handbook of Chemistry and Physics.

---228---
 Customary Weights and Measures with Metric Equivalents
Length
1 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2.54 centimeters
1 foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 30.48 centimeters
= 0.3048 meter
1 yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.9144 meter
1 mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1609.34 meters
= 1.609 kilometers
Area
1 square inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.452 square centimeters
1 square foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0929 square meter
1 square yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.8361 square meter
1 acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.4047 hectare
1 square mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 259.0 hectares
Capacity or volume
1 cubic inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 16.387 cubic centimeters
1 cubic foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0283 cubic meter
1 cubic yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.7646 cubic meter
1 fluid ounce (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 28.409 milliliters
= 0.0284 liter
1 fluid ounce (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 29.586 milliliters
= 0.0296 liter
1 liquid pint (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0568 liter
1 liquid pint (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.4732 liter
1 liquid quart (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.1365 liters
1 liquid quart (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.9463 liter
1 gallon (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 4.5461 liters
1 gallon (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 3.7853 liters
1 bushel (U.K.) = 4 pecks (U.K.) = 8 gallons (U.K.) = 36.3687 liters
1 bushel (U.S.) = 4 pecks (U.S.) = 32 dry quarts (U.S.) 35.2391 liters
1 peck (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9.0922 liters
1 peck (U.S.) = 8 dry quarts (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 8.8098 liters
1 dry quart (U.S.) = 1 1/6 liquid quarts (U.S.) . . . . = 1.1012 liters
Weight
1 ounce (avdp.) = 28.50 grams
1 pound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 453.592 grams
= 0.4536 kilogram
1 ton (short) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.907 ton (metric)
1 ton (long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.016 ton (metric)
= 1016.05 kilograms
Volume per unit area
1 gallon (U.K.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 11.234 liters/hectare
1 gallon (U.S.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9.354 liters/hectare
Weight per unit area
1 pound (avdp.)/square inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0703 kilogram/square centimeter
1 pound (avdp.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.121 kilograms/hectare
Area per unit weight
1 square inch/pound (avdp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.22 square centimeters/kilogram

---229---
 Brief summary
Filling dm3 (liters) Air pressure

Engine oil (including filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Rear axle Front axle

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Air Air
Tyre/tire press. Tyre/tire press.
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . min 100 kPa kPa
max 115
650/85R38 160 460/85R30 160
extra max 130
520/85R42 160 480/30R30 160
Power transmission: 580/70R42 160 540/65R30 160
Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 650/65R42 160 600/70R30 160
710/70R42 160 14.9R38 160---
Drive gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 x 12
320
Powered front axle: 520/85R46 160

--- Axle housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no suspension 12,5

suspension 13
--- Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 x 1,5
Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Brake oil reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,5

Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Technical specifications
Hydraulics max. pressure:

--- Low---pressure circuit . . . . . . . 1,98 MPa (19,8 bar)

--- Work hydraulics pressure circuit 20 MPa (200 bar)

(Dimensions and weights are listed with the same

tyres/tires as in the technical specifications)
Total weight of tractor, kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8800
Max. height of tractor, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3400

Tightening torque of wheels, Nm:

--- Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
--- Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
--- Rim---wheel disc front and rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
--- At the bar---axle the hub fastening to the axle; the
tightening phased 70 Nm at a time and a certain
tightening order, the final tightening 550 Nm.
Checking the tightening of the screws always
after 100 running hours.

---230---
 www.valtra.com

Taking care
of your tractor throughout
its entire service life.
Original Valtra warranty filters
--- compare the structure, think of the risks
The centre tube, like the other The bypass valve has a sturdy
parts, has been manufactured structure and will open only when
according to a quality standard in necessary.
order to withstand the pressures Pirate The bypass filters opening va-
it is subjected to. filter lues do not match the opening
values of Valtra. Dirty oil gets
Pirate Material quality is highly vari- into the circulation.
filter able and the centre tube is
poorly designed. The filter The tested filter material is durable
may give out in extreme in all conditions, and reinforced
conditions. with a supporting mesh.
The tested seals endure
corrosive impurities and keep the Pirate The material is incorrectly
oil where it should be. filter creased and there is no sup-
porting mesh. The filter material
Pirate The filter has been manu- may give out and disintegrate
filter factured according to no into the oil circulation.
standards and has not been
tested in Valtra working
condition.

---231---
Ref no 39 808 21 3 01/2005
Printed in Finland by Kopijyvä
English

Valtra Inc.
FIN--- 44200 Suolahti, Finland
Tel. +358 20 45501
www.valtra.com